JP2019187600A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of achieving appropriate display control for a second holding display, in a game machine that can be controlled in a special state.SOLUTION: A state can be controlled to a predetermined state (e.g., a small winning game state) different from an advantageous state, a normal state (e.g., a non-KT state), and a special state (e.g., KT state) having higher frequency that is controlled to a predetermined state than the normal state. A first holding display corresponding to first identification information and a second holding display corresponding to second identification information can be displayed. In the normal state, the first holding display can be displayed and the second holding display cannot be displayed. Furthermore, a light emission performance can be executed with a second specific pattern that causes LED to emit light by a plurality of patterns that cause the LED to emit light in a light emission mode in which specific colors such as blue, green, and red are blinked. The big winning reliability is different and the light emission period of the specific color is different between the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 63

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game using a game medium.

As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area (also referred to as a “start prize”), the game machine is predetermined. Some prize balls are paid out to the player. Further, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) when a game medium wins in a specific winning area (also referred to as “starting area”). Depending on the display result of the variable display of information, what is configured to be controllable to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player and a predetermined state (small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state is there.

The advantageous state means an advantageous state for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the advantageous state is, for example, a state in which the state of the special variable winning means is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a game medium (a big hit gaming state), or a state in which a right to become an advantageous state for the player has occurred. In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given. In addition, the predetermined state is a state that is advantageous to the player, similarly to the advantageous state, but is a state (small hit gaming state) in which the degree of profit is relatively lower than the advantageous state.

In such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display device that displays a symbol as identification information becomes a display mode (a jackpot symbol) indicating “big hit”, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, It shifts to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that makes it easy to win a prize, and in each opening period, there is a prize at a predetermined number (for example, 10) of big winning openings, or when a predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, The winning opening will be closed. Further, when the display result of the variable display device indicates “small winning” (small winning symbol), for example, an advantageous state (small winning gaming state) in which the big winning opening is opened once and the game medium can be won. When a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.8 seconds) elapses, the special winning opening is closed.

In the above gaming machines, the first identification information is variably displayed when a game medium is won in the first start area, and the second identification information is variable when the game medium is won in the second start area. Display, and variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (also referred to as “simultaneously variable”). Further, in such a gaming machine, when variable display of the first identification information cannot be started, information regarding the variable display of the first identification information is stored as the first reserved storage, and the variable display of the second identification information is displayed. When it cannot start, the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information can be stored as the second reserved storage. And in this simultaneously variable gaming machine, by providing a special state in which a time shorter than the normal state is set as the variable display time (variation time) of the second identification information, There is a configuration in which the frequency (for example, the occurrence frequency of small hits per unit time) is controlled to be high. For example, in Patent Documents 1 and 2, in a high probability state (special state) of a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), by setting the variation time of the second identification information shorter than the normal state (low probability state), It is described that control is possible in a state where the occurrence frequency of small hits is higher than in the normal state.

JP 2017-86643 A (paragraphs 0128, 0234, 0237, 0512) JP, 2006-202287, A (paragraph 0009, 0308-0311)

By the way, in Patent Documents 1 and 2 that can be controlled in the special state as described above, the variation time of the second identification information is set to be relatively long in the normal state. Specifically, in Patent Document 1, it is set to 180 seconds to 300 seconds, and in Patent Document 2, it is set to 10 hours. In this way, in a gaming machine such as that described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, in the normal state, the variation time of the second identification information is long. In the normal state, the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage (second hold display) It is not appropriate to make it visible.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing appropriate display control for the second hold display in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) advantageous to a player, and includes first identification information (for example, first identification information) Variable display execution means (for example, steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560) that can execute variable display of one special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (for example, second special symbol) in parallel A predetermined state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S358 to S360) that can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. Portion), normal state (for example, non-KT state), and execution time of variable display of the second identification information is higher than the normal state. State control means (for example, for game control) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) that is frequently controlled to a predetermined state by selecting a short variation time in proportion (for example, see FIG. 13) Steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B in the microcomputer 560, and a first hold storage unit (for example, a first hold memory) that can store information related to variable display of the first identification information as the first hold memory. 1 hold storage buffer), 2nd hold storage means (for example, 2nd hold storage buffer) which can memorize | store the information regarding the variable display of 2nd identification information as 2nd hold memory, and the 1st corresponding to 1st hold memory Hold display (for example, the first hold display in the first hold display unit 61) and the second hold corresponding to the second hold storage Display (for example, the second hold display in the second hold display section 62) can be displayed, for example, the hold display means (for example, the portion that executes step S707 in the production control microcomputer 200), the hold display means In the normal state (for example, non-KT state), the first hold display can be displayed, but the second hold display cannot be displayed (for example, if step S7073 is Y, execute step S7075, Steps S7080 and S7082 are not executed when N in S7077), and the light emitting unit (LED 909: left frame LED 909b, top frame LED 909a, right frame LED 909c, accessory LED, panel LED, light guide plate, seg indicator, dot A game machine (such as a pachinko machine 901) equipped with a display, etc., and using the light emitting unit And a light emission effect means (effect control board 12: CPU 90120 for effect control, etc.) that can be executed, and the light emission effect means is configured to emit light by flashing a specific color (monochrome: blue, green, red, etc.). A first specific pattern (light emission pattern table 901211: category: LP11 to LP13: light emission patterns LP11-1, LP12-1, LP13-1, etc.) in FIG. 72 and a plurality of colors including the specific color The light emission effect is generated by a second specific pattern (light emission pattern table 901211: category LP14: light emission pattern LP14-1 etc. in FIG. 72) that causes the light emitting unit to emit light in a light emission mode in which any one of the colors is changed to another color. The first specific pattern and the second specific pattern can be executed with a degree of expectation for the player (big hit The gaming machine is characterized in that the reliability is different and the light emission cycle of the specific color is different (FIG. 74: the switching unit light emission time Δtn is shorter than the blinking unit light emission times Δto1 to Δto3, etc.).
According to such a configuration, the player's visibility with respect to the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage in the normal state can be reduced, and appropriate display control can be realized for the second hold display. . Further, according to this, the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern have different expectations for the player, and the light emission cycle of the specific color is different, so that the effect effect of the light emission effect is enhanced and the game Can be improved.

(Means 2) When the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed in the means 1, the specific display corresponding to the second identification information (for example, the second in the second specific display section 62a) Specific display means capable of displaying (specific display) (for example, a part of steps S9308 and S9310 in the production control microcomputer 200), and the above-mentioned specific period (for example, a period of five fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time) In other periods, the hold display means can display the second hold display and the specific display means can display the specific display. In the specific period, the hold display means makes the second hold display difficult to see. (For example, if Y in step S7081 is not performed, step S7082 is not executed) and the specific display unit displays the specific display. Difficult to (e.g., does not execute the step S9310 if it is Y in Step S9309) It is possible, it may be characterized in that. According to such a configuration, when the special state ends, appropriate display control can be realized for the specific display corresponding to the second identification information.

(Means 3) Predetermining means (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S65A and S65B) for deciding whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the establishment of the start condition in the means 2; Specific determination means for determining whether or not an advantageous state is obtained based on the second reserved memory (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S312, S215, S216, and S322 before the prior determination means determines) And the hold display means changes the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage, which is the determination target of the specific determination means, to the first special mode according to the determination result of the specific determination means. The first mode change effect to be performed (for example, the advance notice) can be executed, and the specific display means determines the prior determination means according to the determination result of the prior determination means. A second mode change effect (for example, a specific advance notice) for changing the specific display corresponding to the second identification information to be determined to the second special mode can be executed, and a predetermined period (for example, a chance time) including the specific period In the period of 9 fluctuations or less until the end), the on-hold display means restricts the execution of the first mode change effect (for example, if step S7078 is Y, step S7079 is not executed) and the specific display means is the second. The execution of the aspect change effect is limited (for example, step S9307 is not executed when Y in step S9306). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the production in a specific period in which the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage and the specific display corresponding to the second identification information are difficult to visually recognize.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the state control means includes a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state as a special state. (For example, the second KT state) can be controlled. According to such a configuration, the monotony of the gameability in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game when controlling to the special state can be improved.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the production symbol (for example, the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a or the second background symbol display unit 92a) can be changed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information. Effect control means (for example, effect control micro) capable of executing display and variable display of a reduced symbol smaller than the effect symbol (for example, a small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b or the second small symbol display unit 92b). The computer 200 includes portions for executing S920D, S920E, S920H, S920I, and S920K), and the effect control means is an effect design (for example, a non-KT state) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the non-KT state). , A variable display of the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a is executed, and an effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, The variable display of the second background symbol display unit 92a is not performed (for example, if step S920C is Y, step S920E is executed, and if step S920G is N, step S920J is executed), In a special state (for example, the KT state), the variable display of the production symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display of the production symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is not executed (for example, Step S920I is executed when it is Y in Step S920G, and Step S920F is executed when it is N in Step S920C), depending on whether the normal state or the special state is controlled. And a reduced symbol (for example, the first small symbol display portion 91b or the second small symbol table) corresponding to the variable display of either the second identification information or the second identification information. The variable display of the small symbol in the unit 92b is executed (for example, one of steps S920D and S920H is executed depending on whether the state is the non-KT state or the KT state). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate display control corresponding to the state for the reduced symbol, and it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the variable display of the second identification information to the player in the normal state.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the hold display means displays the second hold display in a specific period including a timing at which the special state ends (for example, a period in which the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time). Can be made difficult to view (see, for example, FIG. 64). According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. More specifically, when the special state ends, appropriate display control can be realized for the second hold display.

(Means 7) In the means 6, the hold display means displays the first hold memory number corresponding to the number of the first hold memory (for example, the first hold) regardless of whether the hold state is controlled in the normal state or the special state. Display the stored number display 71) and do not display the second stored number display corresponding to the number of the second reserved storage (for example, if step S7071 is Y, execute step S7072 and if step S7076 is Y) However, the process corresponding to step S7072 is not executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's visibility with respect to the number of the second reserved memories while ensuring the player's recognizability with respect to the number of the first reserved memories. Appropriate display control can be realized for each of the two reserved storage numbers.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to 7, the game medium (for example, a game ball) is provided in a predetermined path (for example, to the right of the game area 7) among the flow-down paths through which the game medium flows, and the game medium can pass An advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area after a certain specific area (for example, the operation gate 17) and a predetermined condition (for example, that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) are established. ) Controllable advantageous state control means (for example, the part that executes steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 in the case of Y in step S2501 in the game control microcomputer 560) and that a predetermined condition is satisfied A predetermined promotion notification (for example, a first instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium to a predetermined route is executed, and the predetermined promotion notification is executed. And a promotion notification means (for example, a production control microcomputer) capable of executing a specific promotion notification (for example, a second instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific area after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. 200, the steps for executing steps S4404, S4405, S4604, and S4605 at 200) may be further included. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control to the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

Moreover, the invention concerning the following means 9-18 is contained in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in game machines, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-147835, a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area by a launching device, and a prize opening provided in the game area Some game balls are configured to give a predetermined prize value to a player when a game ball wins a prize area. Furthermore, variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means becomes a specific display result, a predetermined game value Is configured to give to the player (so-called pachinko machine). In the gaming machines as described above, it is known that the strobe light emission effect can be executed and the reliability of the big hit is higher as the strobe light emission period is longer.
However, although it is possible to enhance the game entertainment by the light emission effect, there is a problem that the effect of the effect is insufficient when the light emission period is simply increased according to the reliability of the big hit. Therefore, it is to propose a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of the light emission effect and improving the gaming interest.

  (Means 9) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect includes a light emitting unit (LED 909: left frame LED 909b, top frame LED 909a, right frame LED 909c, accessory LED, panel LED, light guide plate, seg indicator, dot A game machine (pachinko machine 901, etc.) equipped with a display, etc., and further comprising a light emission effect means (effect control board 9012: effect control CPU 90120, etc.) capable of executing a light emission effect using the light emitting unit. The light emission effecting means is configured to emit a first specific pattern (light emission pattern table 901211: category of FIG. 136: LP11 to LP13 in FIG. 136) that emits light by a light emission mode in which specific colors (monochrome: blue, green, red, etc.) are blinked. : Light emission pattern LP11-1, LP12-1, LP13-1, etc.) and any one of a plurality of colors including the specific color The light emission effect can be executed by a second specific pattern (light emission pattern table 901121: category LP14: light emission pattern LP14-1 etc. in FIG. 136) that causes the light emitting unit to emit light in a light emission mode that changes to the color of The one specific pattern and the second specific pattern have different expectations (such as jackpot reliability) for the player, and the light emission period of the specific color is different (FIG. 138: switching unit light emission time Δtn is blinking unit light emission time) It is shorter than [Delta] to1- [Delta] to3, etc.). According to this, by making the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern different in the expectation for the player and by making the light emission period of the specific color different, the effect effect of the light emission effect is enhanced, and the game entertainment is enhanced. Can be improved.

  The invention according to means 10 is a gaming machine (pachinko machine) equipped with a light emitting unit (LED 909: left frame LED 909b, top frame LED 909a, right frame LED 909c, accessory LED, panel LED, light guide plate, seg display, dot display, etc.). A light-emitting effect means (effect control board 9012: effect control CPU 90120, etc.) that can execute a light-emitting effect using the light-emitting unit, and the light-emitting effect means includes a specific color (single color). : First pattern (light emission pattern table 901211: FIG. 126: category: LP1 to LP3: light emission patterns LP1-1, LP1-2, LP2-1, LP2-) 2, LP 3-1, LP 3-2, and the like) and a second pattern for causing the light emitting unit to emit light in a plurality of colors (blue, green, red → rainbow, etc.) (FIG. 12). Of the light emission pattern table 901121: category LP4: light emission pattern LP4-1, LP4-2, etc.) (the light emission effect process of FIG. 135, etc.), and the first pattern and the second pattern Then, the expectation level (big hit reliability, etc.) for the player is different and the production period is different (light emission pattern table 901211: light emission effect time in FIG. 126, FIG. 125, FIG. 144: the light emission effect is higher as the big hit reliability is higher). This is a gaming machine characterized by a long period of time). According to this, by making the first pattern and the second pattern different in the degree of expectation for the player and different in the production period, the production effect of the light emission production can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved. .

  The invention according to means 11 is a gaming machine (pachinko machine) equipped with a light emitting part (LED 909: left frame LED 909b, top frame LED 909a, right frame LED 909c, accessory LED, panel LED, light guide plate, seg display, dot display, etc.) A game machine 901, etc.), further comprising a light emission effect means (effect control board 9012: effect control CPU 90120, etc.) capable of executing a light effect using the light emitting unit, wherein the light effect effect means comprises at least a part of the light effect effect means. The light emission effects can be executed by a plurality of light emission patterns (light emission pattern table 901121: various light emission patterns, etc. in FIG. 126) having different light emission modes (light emission colors, etc.), and each of the plurality of light emission patterns has a specific color ( Monochrome: Blue, green, red, etc.), and the player's expectations (such as jackpot reliability) are different. The light emission unit time for the specific color is different (FIG. 131: the single color blue, green, and red emit light continuously, whereas the rainbow color repeats in order of blue → green → red. The switching unit light emission time Δtn is shorter than the continuous unit light emission time Δtm, etc.). According to this, it is possible to pay attention to the difference in the period during which the specific color is emitted by changing the degree of expectation for the player with a plurality of light emission patterns and by changing the light emission unit time for the specific color. It becomes possible, and the effect of the lighting effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved.

  The invention according to means 12 is the gaming machine described in means 9 (the same applies to means 10 and 11), wherein the light emitting effect means includes the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern, The timing at which the light emitting unit starts to emit light (reach state occurrence timing, etc.) is common, but the timing at which the light emitting unit ends light emission (timing at which the lighting effect time elapses from the reach state occurrence timing, etc.) is varied (see FIG. 125, FIG. 144, etc.), a gaming machine characterized by the above may be configured. According to this, although the timing for starting light emission is common, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation by changing the timing for terminating light emission.

The invention according to means 13 is the gaming machine described in means 9 (the same applies to means 10 and 11), wherein the light emitting effect means blinks the first specific color (monochrome: blue, etc.). A first stage in which the light emitting unit emits light according to a light emitting mode; and a second stage in which the light emitting unit emits light in a light emitting mode in which a second specific color (monochrome: green, red, etc.) after the first stage is blinked. And the light emission effect by the second specific pattern can be executed after the end of the period corresponding to the second stage (FIG. 144: single color: blue) Etc. → single color: green, red, etc. → rainbow, etc.).
According to this, by performing the light emission effect by the first specific pattern including two stages with different colors to be blinked, the effect effect of the light emission effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved. In addition, after the period corresponding to the second stage ends, the player can have a sense of expectation by executing the light emission effect by the second specific pattern.

  The invention according to means 14 is a gaming machine described in means 9 (the same applies to means 10 and 11), and variable display (special symbol display: first special symbol display, second special symbol display, etc.) Executable variable display means (special symbol display 904: first special symbol display 904A, second special symbol display 904B, etc.) and specific display corresponding to variable display by the variable display means (holding display, active display) Specific display means (holding indicator 9025 or the like) that can execute the display, etc., and the light emission effecting means has a specific display display mode (color of hold display, lighting / flashing, etc.) by the specific display means. A light-emitting effect may be executed with a corresponding pattern (pending display notice effect determination processing in FIG. 142, prefetching mode determination table 901219 in FIG. 143, etc.). . According to this, by performing the light emission effect by the pattern according to the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the variable display, it is possible to enhance the effect effect of the light emission effect and improve the game entertainment.

Further, as an invention relating to means 15, it is a gaming machine described in any one of means 9, 12 to 14 (the same applies to means 10 and 11), and variable display (special symbol display: first special symbol display) Variable display means (special symbol display 904: first special symbol display 904A, second special symbol display 904B, etc.) capable of executing a second special symbol display, etc., and an advantageous state (big hit) for the player Control means (main board 9011: game control microcomputer 90100, etc.) that can be controlled in a gaming state, etc., and the light emitting effect means is such that the display result by the variable display means is in an advantageous state by the control means. In the case of a controlled display result, a gaming machine characterized by executing a light emission effect by the second specific pattern may be configured.
According to this, when the display result by the variable display means becomes a display result controlled to be in an advantageous state, the player can have a sense of expectation by executing the light emission effect by the second specific pattern.

  The invention according to means 16 is the gaming machine described in any one of means 9, 12 to 15 (the same applies to means 10 and 11), wherein the light emitting effect means is a color change mode ( The second identification is made by a plurality of common patterns (light emission pattern table 901211: light emission patterns LP11-1, LP12-1, LP13-1, LP14-1, etc. in FIG. 136) common to white blue, white green, white red, etc. A light emission effect by a pattern can be executed, and in the plurality of common patterns, the expectation level (big hit reliability, etc.) for the player is different, and the light emission period of the common color is different (FIG. 140: the higher the big hit reliability is, A gaming machine characterized by a short switching unit light emission time Δtn) may be configured. According to this, with a plurality of common patterns with common color change modes, the expectation for the player is different, and the light emission period of the common color is different, thereby enhancing the effect of the light effect, Amusement interest can be improved.

  Further, as an invention relating to the means 17, the gaming machine described in any one of the means 9, 12 to 16 (the same applies to the means 10, 11), which is advantageous for the player (such as a big hit gaming state) ) Is further provided with a specific effect execution means (such as an effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect (reach effect or the like) corresponding to the notification of whether or not it is true, and the light emission effect means executes the specific effect by the specific effect execution means. The game machine may be characterized in that a light-emitting effect is executed based on a predetermined operation of the player (button operation: whether or not button operation promotion notification is made). According to this, during the execution of the specific effect corresponding to the notification of whether or not the advantageous state is advantageous for the player, the effect of the light effect is enhanced by executing the light effect based on the predetermined action of the player, Amusement interest can be improved.

  The invention according to means 18 is the gaming machine described in any one of means 9, 12 to 17 (the same applies to means 10 and 11), wherein the light emitting portion (cap shape, stick shape, arch shape) Etc.), and the light emission effecting means has a special pattern for causing the plurality of light emitting parts to emit light in different colors (a pattern for changing the color of the plurality of light emitting parts in gradation, etc.). A gaming machine characterized in that the light-emitting effect can be executed. According to this, by performing the light emission effect by the special pattern that causes the plurality of light emitting parts to emit light in different colors, the effect effect of the light emission effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved.

  The gaming machine according to another aspect includes the inventions according to A1 to A19 shown below. The invention according to the above means may further have a configuration of A1 to A19.

  (Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes electrical components (for example, board side LEDs 909d and 909e, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, first effect motor 90303 for rotating the movable portion 90302, Control means (for example, effect control CPU 90120) for controlling the second effect motor 90330 for sliding the movable member 90321 and electric components are driven in accordance with a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means. Output means (for example, light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b, motor drive drivers 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c) that output specific signals (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11). And the output means has a plurality of different types. The specific signal output by the parallel communication method is output from the specific signal output terminals grouped into a group, and the output timing of the specific signal from the plurality of specific signal output terminals is different for each group (for example, as shown in FIG. 73). The output timings of the output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11 are distributed for each group), and a plurality of layers (for example, layers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. Data setting area (for example, the control data area shown in FIG. 106), and at each layer of the data setting area, light emission data for performing light emission control of at least light emitters (for example, LEDs 909a to 909e) of the electrical components (For example, control data for causing the LEDs 909a to 909e to emit light) can be set. (For example, the effect control CPU 90120 applies the control data set in the control data area shown in FIG. 106 to each of the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F. When the emission data is set in a plurality of layers in the data setting area, the emission control of the illuminant is performed based on the emission data set in the higher priority layer (for example, production When control data is set in a plurality of layers, the control CPU 90120 transmits the control data set in the layer to which the highest priority value is assigned among the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016C. Output to 9016F). According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the control accuracy of the electrical components while suppressing radio wave radiation to the outside of the gaming machine.

  (Means A2) In the means A1, the light emitting means including a plurality of light emitting elements is controlled to emit light based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output terminal of the same group of the output means (for example, the modification shown in FIG. 81) As in FIG. 5, signals input to the same full color LED may be connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a deviation in the light emission timing of the light emitting means including the plurality of light emitting elements while suppressing the emission of radio waves to the outside of the gaming machine.

  (Means A3) In the means A1 or A2, the output means outputs the output state when the input control signal is output to the other output means, in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, a normal slew rate) Output state (see FIG. 71 (1))) and a second output state in which the waveform rises more slowly than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 71 (2)). (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is low through). It may be configured to be set to a rate output (see FIG. 70). According to such a configuration, the setting can be changed according to the use environment, and the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased according to the setting.

  (Means A4) The means A3 includes a plurality of output means (for example, the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c), and the plurality of output means output the input control signals. The output state setting is common (for example, as in Modification 3 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, for all the serial-parallel conversion circuits, the through outputs are set to the normal slew rate outputs, respectively. Or, for example, as in Modification 4 shown in Fig. 80, the through outputs are set to the low slew rate outputs for all the serial-parallel conversion circuits. . According to such a configuration, design errors can be reduced while considering noise resistance.

  (Means A5) In any one of the means A1 to A4, the output means has a stop function (for example, time-out) for stopping the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the input of the control signal. (For example, the time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. 70). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an operation failure due to a wiring failure or the like, and to control the electrical component stably.

  (Means A6) In the means 5, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 performs at least a predetermined period (in this example, in the effect control process processing (see step S9055)). By repeatedly outputting a control signal every 1 second), lighting control of the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c is continuously executed, or the first effect motor 90303 and the first The control may be such that the drive control of the two effect motor 90330 is continuously executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

  (Means A7) In the means A5 or A6, the output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (for example, by setting the T terminal to L (low), the timeout function is set to the invalid state, The time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high). According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting of the stopping function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by sharing parts.

  (Means A8) In any one of the means A1 to A7, the first operation (the standing operation that is the movement from the tilting position to the standing position) and the second operation (the tilting operation that is the movement from the standing position to the tilting position) ) Capable of performing a production (production design variation processing (S9075), jackpot game processing (S9078), etc.), and a performance execution means (production control CPU90120). The effect execution means is a first pattern that executes the special effect of the first mode in accordance with the first motion of the movable body (the flame effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body motion effect, and the second movable body motion effect is not executed). Production pattern A1, production pattern A2) in which a flame effect production is executed during the first movable body operation production and a flame effect production is carried out during the second movable body operation production. A second pattern in which a special effect of the first mode is executed with the first motion of the body and then a special effect of the second mode different from the first mode is performed with the first motion after the second motion of the movable body. (The effect pattern A3 in which the flame effect effect is executed at the first movable body operation effect and the lightning effect effect is executed at the second movable object operation effect) may be configured to be able to execute the effect. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the production by changing the aspect of the special production accompanying the first operation of the movable body, and to improve the interest of the production when the movable body operates. it can.

  (Means A9) In any one of means A1 to means A8, the special effect is a specific effect (executed during the execution of the fifth round, and whether or not the promiscuous state is controlled after the big hit gaming state is determined) This is an effect (an effect of displaying an image in which the flame effect image 901010 or the lightning effect image 901020 is superimposed on the black image 901001 on the effect display device 905) executed at a timing before the challenge effect notified by the effect mode. Depending on which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is executed, the ratio that the predetermined notification is performed in the specific effect is different (when the effect pattern A3 is selected, the effect pattern A1, The probability variation jackpot may be notified at a higher rate than when A2 is selected. According to such a configuration, the player is interested in which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

  (Means A10) In any one of the means A1 to means A9, the effect execution means executes a third pattern for executing the special effect of the second mode in accordance with the first motion of the movable body (during the first movable body motion effect). The lightning effect effect is executed and the second movable body operation effect is not executed. The effect pattern B1, the lightning effect effect is executed during the first movable object operation effect, and the lightning effect effect is also executed during the second movable object operation effect. An effect can be executed with the effect pattern B2), and when the effect is executed with the third pattern, the proportion of the predetermined state (probability change state) is higher than when the effect is executed with the first pattern. It may be configured. According to such a configuration, the player expects the special effect of the second mode to be executed in accordance with the first motion of the movable body, but the special mode of the first mode is temporarily associated with the first motion. Even if the effect is executed, the interest in the special effect can be maintained because there is an expectation that the second effect of the second aspect will be executed in accordance with the subsequent first operation.

  (Means A11) Any one of the means A1 to A10 further includes operation means (push button 9031B) that can be operated by the player, and changes the mode of the special effect according to the operation of the operation means (black image) It is possible to change the image of the flame effect image 901010 superimposed on the 901001 to the image of the lightning effect image 901020 superimposed on the black image 901001). According to such a configuration, the player can expect a change in the aspect of the special effect due to the operation, and can enhance the interest of the special effect.

  (Means A12) In any one of the means A1 to A7, the first operation (standing operation that is movement from the tilting position to the standing position) and the second operation (tilting operation that is movement from the standing position to the tilting position) ) Capable of performing a production (production design variation processing (S9075), jackpot game processing (S9078), etc.), and a performance execution means (production control CPU90120). The effect execution means is a first pattern that executes the special effect of the first mode in accordance with the first motion of the movable body (the flame effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body motion effect, and the second movable body motion effect is not executed). Production pattern A1, production pattern A2) in which the flame effect production is executed at the first movable body operation production and the flame effect production is executed at the second movable body operation production, A second pattern in which a special effect of the first mode is executed with the first motion of the moving body, and then a special effect of the second mode different from the first mode is performed with the first operation after the second motion of the movable body. The effect can be executed with (the effect pattern A3 in which the flame effect effect is executed at the first movable body operation effect and the lightning effect effect is executed at the second movable object operation effect). When executed, the ratio of the predetermined state (probability change state) may be higher than when the effect is executed with the first pattern. According to such a configuration, by changing the aspect of the special effect accompanying the first operation of the movable body, the effects of diversification can be improved, and the interest about the effect when the movable body operates can be improved.

  (Means A13) In the means A12, the special effect is a specific effect (a challenge effect that is executed during execution of the fifth round and notifies whether or not the game is controlled to a promiscuous state after the jackpot gaming state is finished). Is an effect executed at an earlier timing (an effect in which an image in which the flame effect image 901010 or the lightning effect image 901020 is superimposed on the black image 901001 is displayed on the effect display device 905), and the first pattern and the second pattern Depending on which pattern the effect is executed in, the ratio of the predetermined notification in the specific effect is different (when the effect pattern A3 is selected than when the effect patterns A1 and A2 are selected). The probability variation jackpot is notified at a high rate). According to such a configuration, the player is interested in which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

  (Means A14) In means A12 or means A13, the effect execution means executes a third pattern for executing the special effect of the second mode in accordance with the first motion of the movable body (the lightning effect effect is executed at the first movable body motion effect). In effect pattern B2) in which the lightning effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body operation effect and the lightning effect effect is executed at the time of the second movable object operation effect. Even if the production is executable and the production is executed in the third pattern, the ratio of the predetermined state (probability change state) is higher than the production in the first pattern. Good. According to such a configuration, the player expects the special effect of the second mode to be executed in accordance with the first motion of the movable body, but the special mode of the first mode is temporarily associated with the first motion. Even if the effect is executed, the interest in the special effect can be maintained because there is an expectation that the second effect of the second aspect will be executed in accordance with the subsequent first operation.

  (Means A15) Any one of the means A12 to A14 further includes an operation means (push button 9031B) that can be operated by the player, and changes the mode of the special effect according to the operation of the operation means (black image) It is possible to change the image of the flame effect image 901010 superimposed on the 901001 to the image of the lightning effect image 901020 superimposed on the black image 901001). According to such a configuration, the player can expect a change in the aspect of the special effect due to the operation, and can enhance the interest of the special effect.

  (Means A16) In any one of the means A1 to A15, different light emission data is set in each layer of the data setting area in accordance with the gaming state (for example, as shown in FIG. 106, the gaming state is The combination of control data set in the layers 1 to 5 may be different depending on whether the low base state, the high base state, or the big hit gaming state). According to such a configuration, the light emission control of the light emitters can be performed according to the priority order according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  (Means A17) In the means A16, the light emission data for performing the light emission control of the light emitter in accordance with the error notification is set to the layer set with the highest priority among the layers of the data setting area regardless of the gaming state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 106, the control data corresponding to the error notification is set in the layer 5 having the highest priority regardless of the gaming state). According to such a configuration, the light emission control of the light emitter can be performed with priority given to the error notification regardless of the gaming state.

  (Means A18) In any one of the means A1 to A17, the output means (for example, the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c) includes address information from the control means. Based on the control signal by the serial communication system, specific signals (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) by the parallel communication system are output to the electrical components corresponding to the address information, and a plurality of signals are output. Address information is set discontinuously in a predetermined settable range for at least a part of the electrical components (for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, each of the light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, 90413a,. 90413c and motor drive driver 90412 Among addresses that can be assigned, addresses [05] to [06] are unused addresses, and the interval from address [04] to address [07] is discontinuous). Also good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunctioning in the control of the electrical component when the address information included in the control signal output from the control means is incomplete.

  (Means A19) In any one of the means A1 to A17, the output means (for example, the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c) includes address information from the control means. Based on the control signal by the serial communication system, specific signals (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) by the parallel communication system are output to the electrical components corresponding to the address information, and a plurality of signals are output. Address information is set in a range equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, address [02]) exceeding a minimum value (for example, address [00]) among values in a predetermined settable range for the electrical component ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, each light emitter driver 90411a. Of the addresses that can be given to 90411b, 90413a to 90413c and the motor drive driver 90412, the address is not immediately given from the minimum value (for example, address [00]), but a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value (for example, Address [02]) or higher, and addresses from the minimum value to less than a predetermined value (for example, addresses [00] to [01]) are configured to be unused addresses). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunctioning in the control of the electrical component when the address information included in the control signal output from the control means is incomplete.

  In addition, the modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include the inventions according to (1) to (4) shown below. The invention according to the above means A1 to A19 may further have the configurations (1) to (4).

  (1) Display means (effect display device 905, etc.) capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects (reach effects, etc.), a movable body (movable member 90321, etc.), and a movable body effect for operating the movable body can be executed. Movable body effecting means (production control CPU 90120, movable body effect processing in the effect symbol changing process of S9075 in the effect control process of FIG. 104), and when the movable object effect is executed, a plurality of types are provided. Depending on which effect display is performed among effect displays (battle reach effect, story reach effect, etc.), different effect effect display (particle effect image 9071 according to battle reach effect, according to story reach effect) The flame effect image 9073, etc.) can be displayed on the display means (FIGS. 115, 116, etc.) (the effect control process in FIG. 104). Effect in performance symbols change during the processing of S9075 in Seth treatment effect display processing, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, when the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to display an effect effect display in a different mode depending on which effect display is performed among a plurality of types of effect display. As a result, it is possible to enhance the production effect in which the operation of the movable body and the production effect display of the display means are linked.

  (2) In the gaming machine of (1), when a specific type of effect display (battle reach effect or the like) is executed among the effect displays in which the movable body effect is executed, the effect effect display in a specific mode. 115 (D), (E) particle effect image 9071 and the like can be executed to superimpose the specific type of effect display (winning effect image display) (FIGS. 115 (A) to ( G) etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to link a specific type of effect display in which the movable body effect is executed and an effect display of the display means, and the operation of the movable body by the specific type of effect display and the display means It is possible to further enhance the production effect in cooperation with the production effect display.

  (3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2), when a predetermined type of effect display (story reach effect or the like) is executed among the effect displays in which the movable body effect is executed, The effect display (the flame effect image 9073 in FIGS. 116D and 116E) is displayed in the predetermined image (the black image 9072 in FIGS. 116D and 116E) displayed in the entire display area of the display means. Etc.) can be executed (FIGS. 116A to 116G, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to link a predetermined type of predetermined effect in which the movable body effect is executed and an effect display on the display unit, and in addition to emphasize the movable body effect, the game Can improve the interest of

  (4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), the movable body (movable member 90321 and the like) has a standby position (first position and the like shown in FIGS. 95 and 96) and an advance position (FIG. 95, the second position shown in FIG. 96, etc.), and when the gaming machine is activated, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable body (initializing the movable member in step S9051B in FIG. 103) And control means (production control CPU 90120, etc.) for executing a running-in operation for moving the movable body (step S9051A in FIG. 103, an operation in the movable member running-in process in FIG. 105, etc.). .

  According to such a configuration, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable body and a running-in operation for moving the movable body are executed. For this reason, since the movement of the movable body is not accustomed, it is possible to suppress the influence on the operation of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the movable body from operating well.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the random number for jackpot determination, and a jackpot determination value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the open pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st start port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change process in a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st grand prize opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the external output signal which a game machine outputs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the external output signal which a game machine outputs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a normal symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory operating process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a process at the time of reception of a confirmation command. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol process process. It is a flowchart shown about an instruction | indication alert | report control process. It is a flowchart which shows a demonstration display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a demonstration display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the instruction | indication alert | report in this Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the instruction | indication alert | report in this Embodiment. It is a timing chart when the big hit gaming state is finished and controlled to the first KT state. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding memory | storage display control process in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation | variation start process in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the specific display control process in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen layout in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of display controls, such as a 2nd hold display, in a modification. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a figure which shows the structural example of a drive control board, and the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of the board | substrate side LED. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, and right frame LED909c. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for describing each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit illustrated in FIG. 69. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the slew rate setting of the through output of a clock signal and data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a control data format. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal in a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification in the case of branching on the board | substrate the control signal which one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board is output. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 3. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 3. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification Example 4. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 5. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 6. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 6. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 6. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 7. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 7. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 7. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each light-emitting body driver and a motor drive driver. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each light-emitting body driver and a motor drive driver. (A) is a front view showing an effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed from an oblique front. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed from obliquely behind. (A) is a front view which shows the state which has a movable part in a tilting position, and (B) shows the state which has a movable part in a standing position. (A) is a pinion gear, (B) is a rear view showing a rack gear. (A) is the schematic which shows the state which has a movable member in the 1st position, and (B) shows the state which exists in the 2nd position. (A) is the side view of the schematic which shows the state which has a movable member in the 1st position, and (B) shows the state in the 2nd position. (A) is a schematic view showing a state where the pinion gear is engaged with the rack gear, (B) is a state where the rack gear is moved, and (C) is a schematic view showing a state where the rack gear is regulated. (A)-(D) are the principal part enlarged views which show the state of the gear until it will be in a control state. (A) is a restricted state, (B) is a state in which the pinion gear is changed to a restricted release state by rotating the pinion gear in the first operating direction, and (C) is a schematic diagram showing an initial driving state. (A) is a regulation state, (B) is a state in which the pinion gear is changed to a regulation release state by rotating the pinion gear in the second operation direction, and (C) is a schematic diagram showing a driving initial state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a movable member break-in process. It is a figure showing an example of a data area for control. It is a time chart which shows the LED control example. It is a time chart which shows the LED control example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production execution setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production execution setting processing. (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition which changes to a control state by the control means as the modification 1 of a movable part drive mechanism. (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition which changes to a control state by the control means as the modification 2 of a movable part drive mechanism. (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition which changes to a control state by the control means as the modification 3 of a movable part drive mechanism. (A) is a control part as a modification 4 of the movable part drive mechanism, (B) is an explanatory view showing a control part as a modification 5 of the movable part drive mechanism. It is a display screen figure of an effect display device when a battle reach effect is performed. It is a display screen figure of an effect display device when a story reach effect is performed. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control of the effect production and movable body production in a specific super reach production. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control of the effect production in a specific super reach production, and movable body united operation production. It is a figure which shows an example of the production pattern of a movable body operation | movement effect and an effect production. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display of an effect display apparatus when a movable body operation effect and an effect effect are performed. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control of a movable body operation effect and an effect production. It is a display screen figure which shows the other example of a display of an effect display apparatus when a movable body operation effect and an effect effect are performed. It is a timing chart which shows the other example of control of a movable body operation effect and an effect production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal in a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is a figure for demonstrating the principle of light emission effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of a light emission pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of the light emission effect distribution table. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for light emission control. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the data for light emission control production | generation. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the data for light emission control production | generation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a light emission pattern, and the time change of the RGB value corresponding to each light emission pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of gradation control data. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of gradation control data. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of gradation control data. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the light emission effect process. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of a light emission pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the data for light emission control production | generation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a light emission pattern, and the time change of the RGB value corresponding to each light emission pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the data for light emission control production | generation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a light emission pattern, and the time change of the RGB value corresponding to each light emission pattern. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a light emission pattern, and the time change of the RGB value corresponding to each light emission pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a pending | holding display announcement effect determination process. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of a prefetching mode determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the principle of light emission effect. It is explanatory drawing of the change of the luminescent color for every light emission site | part.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (bullet ball gaming machine) 1 as seen from the front. Note that a pachinko gaming machine is shown here as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like. Also good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball (hit ball) that has been struck can flow down.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition that is the first execution condition (for example, that the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 13). A display area (hereinafter, referred to as a first variable display portion 9a) for variably displaying an effect decoration pattern (first decoration pattern) and displaying a display result, and establishment of a second start condition that is a second execution condition A display area for variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative symbols for display (second decorative symbols) that can be distinguished from each other based on (for example, that the hit ball has won the second start winning opening 14) and deriving and displaying the display result (Hereinafter referred to as the second variable display portion 9b) and a display area (hereinafter referred to as background pattern) that allows the player to visually recognize the display contents more easily than the first variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b. Display unit 9c). Note that easy to visually recognize the display content is, for example, that the size of the display area is large, or that the display content in the variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b is always monochromatic. The display color may change. In this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c controls the display of identification information (hereinafter also referred to as a background symbol) in the three display areas of left, middle, and right. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means stopping and displaying the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol effect part 9c is provided for two variable display parts (first variable display part 9a and second variable display part 9b). Since an effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) variably displayed on the two variable display portions is executed, the decorative symbol status (for example, whether the big hit symbol is derived and displayed) It is difficult to grasp whether or not. In this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing symbol variation display for effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to effect identification information, a decorative symbol, and an effect symbol. .

A first special symbol display device (a special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display device 8b that variably display special symbols as identification information are provided on the top of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, for example. Has been. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a may be referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as a second special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the number of the first reserved memory (the stored memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol reservation storage display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one. Also, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of reserved memories. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

The first variable display section 9a performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol (for production) during the variable symbol display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a. Further, the second variable display section 9b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable symbol display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. The first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that perform variable display of decorative symbols are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display portion 9a is sometimes referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display portion 9b is sometimes referred to as a second decorative symbol. In addition, the first decorative design and the second decorative design may be collectively referred to as a decorative design. Note that the type of the first decorative design and the type of the second decorative design may be the same (for example, both 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative design includes numbers 0 to 5 and characters other than numbers, and the type of the second decorative design is a character other than numbers 0 to 5 and the first decorative design. It is also possible to include characters that are different from the characters.

On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the number of effective winning balls entered into the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number, and the number of effective winning balls entered into the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. There is an area (hereinafter referred to as symbol hold storage display unit 18c) that displays the total number (the total number of hold storage). As described above, in this embodiment, by displaying the total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c that is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize, It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol hold memory display 18a and the second special symbol hold memory display 18b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs smaller than the symbol hold memory display unit 18c, respectively. Although configured, in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, a display of another aspect may be used. As an example, each of the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b is composed of one display, and the display color is different according to the number of reserved memories or the display density is different. I will let you.

In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the total pending storage number that can be displayed, that is, the total pending storage number is 8. The symbol holding storage display unit 18c increases the number of display areas to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Each time variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of display areas to be lit is reduced by one. Alternatively, among the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 18c, the number of areas displayed in a color determined in advance as an effective start winning is increased by one. Each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in the color determined as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4. Accordingly, when the first reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the first start condition. When the first reserved memory number is less than 4 and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13, the win becomes an effective start win (first effective start win) that satisfies the first start condition. Similarly, when the second reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the second start condition. When the second reserved memory number is less than 4 and a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, the win becomes an effective start win (second effective start win) that satisfies the second start condition. In this example, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the combined reserved memory number is set to 8, but these values are only examples. . Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 32 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a. An operation gate 17 is provided below the gate 32. The game ball that has passed through the operating gate 17 is detected by the operating gate switch 17a.

A special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the operation gate 17. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in an advantageous state (a big hit gaming state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the large winning opening as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, there are provided a special variable winning ball apparatus 22 for forming a special winning opening 24 for small hits, and a variable winning ball apparatus 15 having a second start winning opening 14. As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball apparatus 15 is arranged adjacent to the right side. As will be described in detail later, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and are formed as plate-shaped bottom surfaces that are formed as the bottom surfaces of the channels through which the game balls flow down By moving the member back and forth in the front-rear direction, the game ball is won in an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can win in the special winning port 24 or the second start winning port 14 located below the bottom member. It is changed to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 22 moves the bottom member forwardly in the small hit gaming state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. From the closed state, the bottom member is moved backwards backward to execute the opening control for opening the special winning opening 24 that becomes the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state where the bottom member is moved forward when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, An opening control is performed to open the second start winning opening 14 that becomes a winning area.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are formed to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 The special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is slightly larger than the above. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, so that the game area 7 is dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 20. The game ball first drops onto the variable winning ball device 15, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is moved backward and the second start winning port 14 is open, The game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. On the other hand, if the second start winning opening 14 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is moved backward to open the special winning hole 24, the game ball wins the special winning hole 24. Furthermore, if the special winning opening 24 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 and falls to the out opening 26 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 15 is arranged on the right side. When the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is formed so as to be gently inclined from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 15 has a special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 22, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

In the special winning opening 24, a switch (second count switch 25a, see FIG. 5) capable of detecting a game ball won in the special winning opening 24 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) through the special winning opening 24 opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 22, the number of winning balls is smaller than when the gaming ball has won the big winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball passes (enters) through another prize opening, such as the first start prize opening 13a and the second start prize opening 13b. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening 24 is opened, the player is in an advantageous state. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 24 is in a closed state, the game balls cannot be passed through (entered) into the special winning opening 24, so that a prize ball cannot be obtained. It becomes disadvantageous for the person.

Further, an S switch 14 a capable of detecting a game ball won in the second start winning opening 14 is provided in the second starting winning opening 14. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the special variable winning ball device 20 (large winning port), the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning port 14), and the special variable winning ball device 22 (special winning ball device). Since the winning opening 24) is provided on the right side of the game area 7, when the player is in the big hit game or in the KT state to be described later, the player aims at the right side of the game area 7 and performs a launch operation (so-called right Hitting operation).

In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is configured to be 0.6 seconds or longer. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the gate 32 and the variable winning ball apparatus 32 and the nail group that forms the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 can be controlled to open based on the game ball passing through the gate 32. In the first KT state described later, the game ball is gate 32. The time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state after passing through is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball passes from the gate 32 until reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since the required time is shorter than 0.6 seconds, when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state, when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the one game ball is The variable winning ball apparatus 15 can be won as it is.

Below the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined time. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

Decorative lamps 25 flashing and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and there is an out port 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won a prize. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c provided on the front frame are provided at the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 7. Also, a prize ball lamp 51 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball break lamp 52 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut out is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c. Is provided.

In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch the gaming ball into the game area 7. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hit ball operation handle 5, a game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the big hit game ends or the previous variable display ends) The first start condition is satisfied), variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display unit 8a, and variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed in the variable display unit 9a. Be started. In other words, the first special symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the total reserved memory number (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c Increase by one.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the previous variable display) Is completed and the second start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display unit 8b, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second variable display unit 9b. The variable display starts. In other words, the second special symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the total number of reserved memory (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c on the condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit. Increase by one. However, even if the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol reserved memory display portion 18c is increased by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the first special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is released until a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls have won the big winning opening. One round in the big hit gaming state is from when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is released until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls are won in the big prize opening or when a certain period of time elapses after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, and 16 rounds). A V winning area may be provided at the special winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on the condition that the hit ball has won the V winning area while the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened. Note that the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, the types of big hits are 2R normal big hit, 2R positive big hit, 6R normal big hit, 6R positive big hit, and 16R positive big hit. If a state is given and a 6R normal jackpot or 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot gaming state is awarded, and if a 16R probability jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is awarded.

When it is decided to change the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stoppage of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 8a to a jackpot symbol with probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, “7”, etc.) Has a higher probability of being a big hit than a low probability state (a low probability / non-KT state and a low probability / first KT state, which will be described later) have a higher probability of being a big hit. (State) is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined as the probability variation symbol and the probability transition state is entered, not only the probability that the first special symbol in the first special symbol indicator 8a becomes a jackpot symbol is increased, The probability that the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b becomes a big hit symbol is also increased. That is, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second start prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display portion 9b are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the second special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), it shifts to a jackpot gaming state.

When the second special symbol display unit 8b determines that the stop symbol at the time when the second special symbol fluctuates is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Has a higher probability of being a big hit than a low probability state (a low probability / non-KT state and a low probability / first KT state, which will be described later) have a higher probability of being a big hit. (State) is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be a probable variation symbol and shifts to a probable variation state, not only the probability that the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b becomes a jackpot symbol is increased, The probability that the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a becomes a big hit symbol is also increased. In other words, not only the jackpot determination based on the second start prize but also the jackpot determination based on the first start prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of the stop becomes a small hit symbol, the game proceeds to the small hit gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened until a certain time has passed so that a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. Thereby, although it is less than a big hit game state also in a small hit game state, it is set as the open aspect which a player can obtain a ball.

In the probability variation state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are the jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example, , The odd number of 0 to 9) is higher than the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that tends to be a small hit compared to the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When controlled, when controlled to a low probability and the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and controlled to a high probability and the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) In some cases, the control is performed with high probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

Of the KT states, the first KT state, as will be described later, is likely to cause a small hit, but the special variable winning ball device 22 is likely to be in the open state. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). In the KT state, the second KT state, as will be described later, has a short opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 15, and when a small hit occurs, a game ball is placed in the downstream special variable winning ball device 22. Easy to win.

The probability variation state is a gaming state that tends to be a big hit than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is generated more than the low probability state. The gaming state is easy to play.

Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is likely to occur compared to the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state at the normal time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, when the second special symbol fluctuates, it is configured so that it will be all small hits except in the case of big hits (except for the case of forced deviation described later), so the KT state is smaller than the normal state. It is in a gaming state that tends to become. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to change, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, as a structure for making the KT state into a gaming state that is easier to hit than the normal state, it is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 will be in the open state per normal symbol is the same as the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes By configuring the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the KT state has a higher rate of variation with respect to a certain time than the normal state, and the KT state is in the normal state. It may be a gaming state that tends to be a small hit.

Next, the game state transition in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming to the left of the game area 7. Therefore, in the normal state, a start winning is mainly generated at the first start winning opening 13, and a variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, the state shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / first KT state. After that, when 100 variation display is finished without generating the big hit, the first KT state is ended and the normal state is changed. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / first KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / second KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

In this embodiment, the case where the first KT state is ended when the variable display of 100 times is uniformly ended when the low probability / the first KT state is controlled is shown. Absent. For example, it is configured to provide a plurality of jackpot types that trigger the low probability / first KT state, and the number of variable displays that the first KT state continues after the jackpot game is different according to the jackpot type (for example, 20 times Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

In this embodiment, when the player has moved to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 7. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated at the second start winning port 14, and a variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, the state shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / first KT state, and thereafter, after 100 variations display is finished without occurrence of a big hit, the first KT state is ended and the state is changed to the normal state. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation big hit or 6R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / second KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

However, as will be described later, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation big hit is made even though the state is the non-KT state before the big hit starts, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, control is performed so as to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later). In other words, it is a case where a right hit is made due to the change display of the second special symbol in spite of being in the normal state, and a 16R probability variable big hit is generated. If it is made possible to obtain a prize ball, some players may actively play a right-handed game in a normal state, and the original game performance is impaired. For this reason, even if a right-hand hit in the normal state and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, a penalty is imposed by making a transition only to the first KT state. Aggressive right-handed games can be suppressed.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display portion 9a. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display portion 9b. Here, the synchronization means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 9a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol indicator 8b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 9b.

Further, when the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that reminds the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 9a. When the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a special decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that recalls the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 9b.

In the background symbol display unit 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the background symbol display unit 9c. When performing a reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during variable display. Although there are exceptions as will be described later, basically when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 9c. Displayed (the background symbols are finally stopped in the three display areas). If the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left Three background symbols with the middle right aligned. Hereinafter, such background symbols are also referred to as jackpot symbols.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the background symbol display unit 9c.

When the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and at the same time the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. An effect corresponding to any one of the variable displays is executed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed alone, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is delayed. When the special symbol for which variable display ends is stopped and displayed, variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) for a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) And all or some of the background symbols are displayed in a synchronized manner while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

For example, a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that is a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display regions of the left, middle, and right display regions in the background symbol display unit 9c. The display area in the middle is still being displayed in a variable manner, and all or some of the symbols in the display area are changing and displaying synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, the background) The variable display is performed on all of the left, middle, and right display areas in the symbol display unit 9c, and the variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are aligned.

In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the background symbol display unit 9c are called reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) is displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 9c (a ground color or pattern different from the symbol and the character) Etc.) may be changed (for example, color).

Next, FIGS. 2 to 4 are views showing the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, but the variable winning prize is only slightly smaller than the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. The structure of the ball device 15 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 22.

As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 includes a base plate portion 101 having a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is fixedly supported by the game area 7 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 7 with, for example, a screw. In the substantially central region of the base plate portion 101, a special winning opening 24 (second starting winning opening 14 in the case of the variable winning ball apparatus 15) that opens toward the front is formed, and the special winning opening in the base plate portion 101 is formed. A slit-like accommodation hole 102 that is long in the left-right direction is formed at a position above the opening 24 to accommodate the bottom surface member 23 on the back side (rear side) of the game area 7 when the bottom surface member 23 moves backward. Has been. In the present embodiment, the special prize opening 24 is specifically formed on the left side slightly from the center in the left-right direction of the base plate portion 101, but may be on the left or right side.

The bottom member 23 is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down toward the left, and the accommodation hole 102 is inclined downward to follow the inclination of the bottom member 23. It is formed to do. The bottom surface member 23 can be moved forward and backward in the forwardly moved state shown in FIG. 3 and the backwardly moved state shown in FIG. 4, and the bottom surface member 23 is located on the back side (backward) of the base plate portion 101. A drive device (not shown) for moving the vehicle forward and backward is disposed.

Returning to FIG. 2 to FIG. 4, a flow path forming base part 112 protruding forward is formed on the front side of the base plate part 101. An upstream flow path portion 113 that is continuous with the upstream region 23U that is the upper side end (right end) of the bottom surface member 23 in the state of being in the longitudinal direction of the bottom surface member 23 and forms the flow path of the game ball together with the bottom surface member 23; A downstream region 23L that is a lower side end portion (left end portion) of the bottom surface member 23 and a downstream flow path portion 114 that forms a flow path of a game ball together with the bottom surface member 23 are formed. Yes.

In addition, the upper part of the flow path forming base 112 is recessed downward from the end on the bottom surface member 23 side of the upstream flow path part 113 and the downstream flow path part 114, and the special winning opening 24 is left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 115 is formed to guide the game ball dropped below the bottom surface member 23 to the special winning opening 24 so as to surround from below.

The upstream-side channel portion 113 and the downstream-side channel portion 114 are formed so as to incline to the left so that the game ball can flow down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide channel portion 115 extends to the left toward the special winning opening 24 and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 24. In the recessed space at the bottom of the guide channel portion 115, a triangular guide portion 116 that guides the game ball backward toward the special prize opening 24 side (the back side of the game area 7) is disposed. ing.

Furthermore, the front part (player side) of the flow path forming base part 112 is integrally formed with a covering part 117 that covers the upstream flow path part 113, the downstream flow path part 114, and the guide flow path part 115 from the front. Has been. The covering portion 117 covers the upstream flow passage portion 113, the downstream flow passage portion 114, and the guide flow passage portion 115 from the front, so that the game balls flowing down these flow passage portions jump to the glass door frame 4 side. It has a function to prevent it. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 112, but may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball apparatus 22, a flow of game balls that are connected in the left-right direction, including the upstream flow path portion 113, the bottom surface member 23, and the downstream flow path portion 114, between the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. A path F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed with a plurality of regulating pieces 118 that reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F.

In the present embodiment, the restricting piece 118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 101 or protruding backward from the covering portion 117. When there is no restriction piece 118, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball flowing down to the left meanders with the movement of the longitudinal component by interfering with Than delay. These regulating pieces 118 are formed so as to be arranged at a predetermined interval in the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. In addition, the restriction piece 118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 23, and is set to a width dimension that allows a game ball to pass between adjacent ones. Yes. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one restriction piece 118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 117 that covers the upstream-side passage portion 113 from the front, and the downstream-side passage portion of the covering portion 117. One restriction piece 118 is formed at a portion covering 114 from the front. In addition, a total of five restricting pieces 118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed at portions of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 that cover the bottom surface member 23. Note that the number of such restriction pieces 118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulating piece 118 is covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the restricting pieces 118 as described above, referring to FIG. 3, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 (and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 configured in the same manner) of the present embodiment tries to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P flows down so as to meander on the flow path F. When the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning port 24 (or the second start winning port 14). Without passing, the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) is basically passed. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 4, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which the bottom member 23 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P is guided to the flow path forming base 112. It is possible to fall into the flow path portion 115 and flow down the guide flow path portion 115 to win a special winning opening 24 (or the second start winning opening 14).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 5 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

Further, detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are given to the game control microcomputer 560. An input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31 and controls the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20, the solenoid 106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 22, and the solenoid 206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15. An output circuit 59 that is driven in accordance with a command from the microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control microcomputer 560 when the power is turned on and generation of a big hit gaming state Information such as jackpot information indicating Information output circuit that outputs a force signal to an external device such as a hall computer (not shown) is also mounted on the main substrate 31. The main board 31 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting a test signal to the outside of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control is performed on the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 9c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown) and receives a signal (intake signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 202 and the input port 203. Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 6 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 205. The effect control CPU 201 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the input / output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, a special winning opening lamp 24a is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 22, and the lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to the special winning opening lamp 24a.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are transmitted between the effect control CPU 201, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 in two-way communication (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

The effect control CPU 201 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among images displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including a decorative design and a background design). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 209. The VDP 209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 201.

In this embodiment, a VDP 209 that controls display of the effect display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 209 has an address space independent from the effect control microcomputer 200, and maps the VRAM to the address space. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. The VDP 209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

In this embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. It may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second circuit on which circuits for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with this production control board. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but other boards (for example, the audio output board 70 and the lamp shown in FIG. It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 in the effect control board 80 via the driver board 35 or the like. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35, and the control means receives the command. Control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9 as it is or, for example, changed to a simplified command. May be. In addition, when two boards, the first effect control board and the second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board, A command is transmitted as it is from the second effect control board to the first effect control board, or is transmitted after processing (for example, changing the command form or contents, simplifying, or selecting only necessary commands). You may comprise.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the gaming machine is turned on and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether the contents of the program are valid. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is the interrupt address. Is the mode shown.

Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process. In this example, if “55H” is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (ON state), and if a value other than “55H” is set, it means that there is no backup (OFF state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check of the backup RAM area (parity check in this example) (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that must not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and in accordance with the contents, the control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80. Control is performed such that a recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery is transmitted (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, special symbol buffer, total prize ball number storage buffer, special symbol process flag, award ball flag, out of ball flag, payout stop flag and the like are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set in the flag for this.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). Examples of the initialization command include a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9.

In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a big hit determination random number generation counter). A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls itself a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the gaming machine. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination is one round (a random number generation counter for jackpot determination, etc.) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value that can be taken, the initial value is set in the counter.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are input via the input driver circuit 58. Then, the state determination is performed (switch processing: step S21).

Next, the CPU 56 performs a display control process for performing display control of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b. Execute (Step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S32.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for jackpot determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows. (1) Random 1: Decide whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit determination) (2) Random 2: Type of big hit, that is, 2R normal big hit, 2R probability variable big hit , 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 16R probability variation jackpot is determined (for jackpot type determination) (3) Random 5: The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined (for variation pattern determination) (4) Random 6: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for determination per normal symbol) (5) Random 7: Determines an initial value for random 1 (for determining a random 1 initial value) (6) Random 8: Determine the initial value of random 6 (for determining the initial value of random 6)

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (1) a big hit determination random number, (2) a big hit type determination random number, and (4) a normal symbol determination determination. A counter for generating a random number is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the game effect, random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (6) are also used. In this embodiment, a common random number (random 2) is provided as a random number for determining the type of jackpot and a random number for determining the type of jackpot. However, different random numbers are provided. May be.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a first special symbol process (step S26A). In the first special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Next, the CPU 56 performs a second special symbol process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. Perform the appropriate processing. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Then, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol process processing (step S26C). In the normal symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 10 and the variable winning ball device 15 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a hold storage process (step S27a). In the pending storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process for calculating and managing the total number (total pending memory number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved memories (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a being turned on. The payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. Output (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for effect display of the first special symbol in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data according to the value of the first special symbol process flag. In addition, special symbol display for setting second special symbol display control data for effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag is set in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data A control process is performed (step S32). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby variably displaying the special symbols on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. Execute.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 performs variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed by the two displays of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. Control is performed so that a big hit does not occur simultaneously in the two displays.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a non-probable change big hit determination table used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability). Probability / second KT state)) is used in the probability change jackpot determination table. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 10 is set in the non-probable change big hit determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column in FIG. 10 is set in the probability changing big hit determination table. . The numerical values described in FIG. 10 are jackpot determination values.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1). If it matches the big hit determination value, it is decided to make a big hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 10 indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

In this embodiment, when it is decided not to make a big hit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, all are unconditionally set off. In addition, if it is decided not to make a big hit when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it will be unconditionally made a big hit (however, as will be described later, it will be dismissed forcibly afterwards) Sometimes).

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131 a stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table 131a determines that the jackpot type is “2R normal jackpot”, “2R” based on a random number (random 2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probable big hit”, “6R normal big hit”, “6R positive big hit”, or “16R positive big hit”.

As shown in FIG. 11A, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 20%, and “ "6R probability variable big hit" is determined, and "6R normal big hit" is determined with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30% The “6R probability variation big hit” is determined, the “2R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 5%, and the “2R normal big hit” is determined with a probability of 35%.

The “16R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to the 16-round jackpot gaming state and is shifted to the high probability / second KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the game is shifted to the probability variation state. At the same time, the state is shifted to the second KT state (see steps S2207A, S2208A, S2207B, and S2210B described later). The probability variation state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

However, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the big hit start, even if it becomes “16R probability variable big hit”, it is not in the second KT state. There is a case where the state shifts to the first KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later).

The “6R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a six-round jackpot gaming state, and shifts to a high probability / first KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the jackpot is shifted to a probability varying state). At the same time, the state is shifted to the first KT state (see steps S2210A, S2211A, S2212B, and S2213B described later). Then, the probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The “6R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a six-round jackpot gaming state and is shifted to only the first KT state after the jackpot gaming state is ended (see step S2212A described later). Then, after the transition to the first KT state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state is finished (see steps S2213A and S2010 to S2013). Even before the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is also finished when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The “2R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state and then shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the probability changing state is changed). At the same time, the state is shifted to the first KT state (see steps S2212B and S2213B described later). Then, the probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The “2R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and is shifted to the first KT state only after the jackpot gaming state ends (see step S2214B described later). Then, after the transition to the first KT state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times), the first KT state is finished (see steps S2215B and S2010 to S2013). Even before the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is also finished when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

Note that the types of jackpot types are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to be able to determine 3R probability variation big hit to 7R probability variation big hit other than 16R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, and 2R normal big hit, and various modes are considered. It is done.

FIGS. 12-14 is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol used in this embodiment, and a decoration symbol. EXT shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. 18 types of # 01 to # 18 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the variation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 18) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When the first special symbol variation display is executed and the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by selection. As shown in FIG. 12A, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined as one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12B, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined as one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

In the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by selection. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 02. Specifically, when determining the small hit, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the big hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of time of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even when in the non-KT state, when the change display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, there is a situation where a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game balls to the special prize opening 24. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the variation display execution frequency is lowered. By doing so, the occurrence frequency of the small hits is lowered, and the situation where the winning of the winning balls by the small hits is aimed at despite the non-KT state is prevented. In this embodiment, the “occurrence frequency per unit time” is, for example, the generation rate per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, the small unit per unit time. The occurrence rate of is higher than the normal state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even if it is a big hit. By making the length relatively long, it is possible to prevent an act of unjustly aiming for a winning ball in the special winning opening 24 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of small hit, so it is configured to have a shorter variation time than the case of big hit. Yes.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the low probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations after that. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 13D, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 03 to # 04. Is done.

As shown in FIG. 13D, when it is determined that a small hit is the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, the second variation is a relatively long variation time of 7 seconds. Pattern # 03 (a variation pattern for preparing for opening the second start winning opening) is determined. In this embodiment, as described above, when controlled to the first KT state, the special winning prize is actually increased by increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 although the frequency of small hits is increased. The special prize opening 24 in the ball device 22 is set so as to rarely win. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls have accumulated on the bottom members of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special variable winning ball immediately. If the device 22 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 24. Therefore, in this embodiment, at the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 before the transition to the first KT state. By allowing the special variable winning ball device 22 to be in an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all of the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, This prevents a situation in which more than expected prize balls can be obtained in the first KT state.

Also, if the change display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is executed, FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the second to 99th variation shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13E, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second to 99th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 05 to # 07, # 30. It is decided to either. Further, as shown in FIG. 13E, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 of the shortening fluctuation having a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds. Or, the variation time may be determined to be the second variation pattern # 030 with a shortened variation that is as short as 1 second. The second variation pattern # 05 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 30 can be selected only when one or more second reserved memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. Thereby, it is set as the structure which accelerates | stimulates reservation memory and raises an operation rate. In this embodiment, when the small probability is determined as the second to 99th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 06, the effect display device 9 In the variation display of the background symbol in Fig. 1, the effect of the symbol curling is executed, such as reaching or slipping effect.

In addition, after displaying the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation display of the 100th change (that is, low probability / final change in the first KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 13 (F) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 08 to # 09. Is done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the effect display device 9 displays a character display such as “during chance time”. As shown in FIG. 13F, when it is determined that a small hit is the 100th change in the low probability / first KT state, an end display for displaying characters such as “End of Chance Time !!” on the effect display device 9 Is determined to be the second variation pattern # 08. Further, as shown in FIG. 13F, when the big hit is determined as the 100th change of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 ends the display of characters such as “Chance Time End!”. After the display, the second variation pattern # 09 with a predetermined restoration display is determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first special symbol variation display becomes a big hit during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 having a variation time of 10 seconds is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case in which a big hit immediately occurs in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is a long fluctuation time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is configured to be forcibly disengaged, the forcible disengagement frequently occurs in spite of the second KT state, and the player hits the small hit You will not receive any profits. For this reason, in this embodiment, the variation time of the big hit variation of the first special symbol is set to a short variation time so that it shifts to the big hit gaming state based on the variation of the first special symbol before forcible detachment frequently occurs. It is configured.

Unlike the present embodiment, even when the second special symbol is started to change during the big hit change of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is not forced to deviate (for example, the first special symbol) If the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped, the gaming time of the first special symbol jackpot variation time in the KT state is a gaming machine with a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed. May be a long variation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case in which a big hit occurs immediately after the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state. You will not receive any profits from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time at which small hits can occur at least several times. (For example, 1 minute) is ensured.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the high probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations after that. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 14G, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 10 to # 12. Is done.

Similarly to the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), the second start winning prize is also obtained when the small probability is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state. There is a case where the variation pattern for preparing the mouth opening (second variation pattern # 10) is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 14G, when it is determined that the big hit is the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends. Second variation pattern # 12 including the effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14G, the second variation pattern # 11 including the battle effect may be determined even when the small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state.

Also, in the case of executing the change display after the second change after the big hit game based on the 6R probability change big hit or the 2R probability change big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state is executed, FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT shown and for the second and subsequent variations is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 14H, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation patterns # 13 to # 15, # 31 Decide on either.

As shown in FIG. 14 (H), in the same way as the 2nd to 99th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. There are cases where the second variation pattern # 13 with a short variation of time as short as 5 seconds and the second variation pattern # 031 with a short variation as short as 1 second are determined. The second variation pattern # 13 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 31 can be selected only when one or more second reserved memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. Thereby, it is set as the structure which accelerates | stimulates reservation memory and raises an operation rate.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), in the case of determining a big hit as the second and subsequent changes in the high probability / first KT state, it is suggested to indicate whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends. A second variation pattern # 15 including a battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), the second variation pattern # 14 including the battle effect may be determined even when the small hit is determined after the second variation in the high probability / first KT state. .

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 14 (I) is selected. Variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14I, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 16 to # 18.

As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the shortening variation occurs in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). There is a case where the second variation pattern # 16 of a shortened variation having a variation time shorter than that when the variation display is executed is 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 14 (I), in the case of determining the small hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation including the continuous effect suggesting whether the high probability / second KT state continues. The pattern # 17 may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), in the case of determining a big hit in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends after the continuous performance. The second variation pattern # 18 including the effect is determined.

In this embodiment, when the variation pattern including the continuation effect or the battle effect is determined, the effect display device 9 executes the continuation effect or the battle effect in the variation display of the background symbol. In the case of a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the effect of the victory mode is executed in the battle production, and in the case of a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) When a defeat-type effect is executed and a small hit is made, a draw-type effect is executed in the battle effect. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, and, for example, a defeat mode effect may be executed in the battle effect even when the number of rounds in the big hit game is 2R probability variable big hit. .

In the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the second KT state. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a short variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the case of a low probability state, and a short variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the case of a high probability state.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state. Among these, FIG. 15 (1) shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state, and FIG. 15 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable ball device 15 in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus 22 is shown.

First, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Is determined, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and when it is determined to be off, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol fixed time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol and the off symbol is 0.2 seconds. . When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second startup winning port opening processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins the second start winning port 14 when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the second special symbol variation display is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is kept open for 0.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15A, the open time of the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short. Opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although it is a state where a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins the special winning opening 24 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation displays).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is finished, the next variable winning ball device 15 can be opened for the next normal symbol variation time. After a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is a total of 0.2 seconds, a symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and a second start winning opening opening pretreatment time of 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened.

In the present embodiment, in the first KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. The game ball is gated after 0.5 seconds, which is the total of the symbol variation time 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening release pretreatment time 0.1 seconds. The time required from passing through 32 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is approximately 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state in which the normal symbol is not changed to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually normal. Since the time until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in the state where the symbol is not changed is shorter, the variable winning ball device 15 is already in the open state. When controlled, the game ball reaches the variable winning ball apparatus 15. Therefore, in the first KT state, a game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state in which the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 15.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15 (2), when a game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 10, and the normal symbol is displayed. Is determined, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and when it is determined to be off, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the variation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol fixed time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol and the off symbol is 0.2 second. . When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), after the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning port opening processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins the second start winning port 14 when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the second special symbol variation display is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is kept open for 0.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is as extremely short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 seconds + design fixed time 0) as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened. A relatively long period of 2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second start winning opening opening process is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), since the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 15 is short and the interval period (closed period) is long, the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for a game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 22 of this type, and it is easy to win a game ball to the special winning opening 24.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the second KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 3.8 seconds, which is the total of the symbol variation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning port opening pre-treatment time of 2.6 seconds, the game ball is gated. The time required to reach the variable winning ball apparatus 15 after passing through 32 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. Thus, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually normal. Since it is longer than the time from the game ball passing through the gate 32 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 in the state where the symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 before being played. Therefore, in the second KT state, a game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state in which the normal symbol is not changed is difficult to win the variable winning ball device 15.

In this embodiment, normal symbol process processing is executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) to execute the normal symbol variation display or to control the variable winning ball apparatus 15 to be opened. This is performed by executing (see step S26C). The game control microcomputer 560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit the normal figure in the normal symbol process of step S26C, depending on whether it is the KT state or the normal state. It is determined whether or not to hit the normal map according to different probabilities (for example, 10/11 in the KT state and 1/11 in the normal state). The same probability regardless of whether the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or a jackpot gaming state (For example, 10% or 100%) may be used to determine whether or not to reach the ordinary map.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol determination time are the same in 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the second start winning opening releasing process is The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is made different by shortening to 0.1 second in the 1KT state and 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown. I can't. For example, you may comprise so that the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may differ by varying the variation time and the symbol determination time in the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. By doing so, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be configured to have different closing periods (interval periods). In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 in the first KT state is shortened by any one of the methods described above, it is possible to suppress winning in the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. it can.

Further, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, a variable winning as shown in FIG. The ball device 15 is controlled by a first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, a second opening pattern (for opening the variable winning ball device 15 shown in FIG. 15 (2) for a short time ( You may comprise so that it may control by short open. In other words, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may be controlled not to be set in other states including the big hit gaming state.

Even in the first KT state, when the last change display in the low probability / first KT state is executed, the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be shortened. For example, the special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th special symbol fluctuation stop in the 100th special symbol shortened fluctuation period in the low probability / first KT state. With such a configuration, when a left-handed notification is made after the low probability / first KT state ends, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 15 being long open. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 15, a special symbol variation display shortening variation flag is further used. The special symbol variation display may be controlled, and in this case, the special flag and the shortening variation flag may be separately managed and controlled.

Further, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, in the case where the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 15 is high in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. Then, it is possible to prevent winning in the variable winning ball apparatus 15, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the normal symbol variation time is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol with a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state where the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and the ordinary symbol is not retained. This is because the device 15 is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture the timing of the second special symbol variation stop timing (when the small symbol hits, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 Until the game ball that has passed through reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, the variable winning ball device 15 is not released, and the special winning opening 24 can be won). On the other hand, in this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is released before the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 by shortening the normal symbol variation time. Since it is set so as to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 16, commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H), 8011 (H) to 8022 (H) correspond to the first variable display portion 9 a or the second variable display portion corresponding to the variable symbol variable display. This is an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative pattern variably displayed in 9b. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H), the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit 9b. Control to start the variable display of the decorative pattern at.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (outgoing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is to be lost. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 16R probability variation jackpot. . Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit. . Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. . Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. . The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result designation specified by the effect control microcomputer 200 immediately before the first variation pattern command is performed. Since the command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the second decorative symbol, Although the display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

Also, the game control microcomputer 560 does not transmit a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation big hit / 6R probability variation big hit / 6R normal variation big hit / 2R positive variation big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / loss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the production control microcomputer 200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first ornament symbol stop designation command)) for instructing stop of variable display of the first symbol. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second ornament symbol stop designation command)) instructing stop of variable display of the second symbol.

Command BXXX (H) (X = any hexadecimal number) is an effect control command that is sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first big hit start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first big hit game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) that designates the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) that designates the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) that designates the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) that specifies the start of a small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big prize opening) that designates display during the round during the big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big prize opening) that specifies display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

Command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a big winning opening. Command B 401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached four. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached four. In this embodiment, a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective start winning specified command. The first valid start winning designation command and the second valid start winning designation command are commands indicating that there has been a start winning.

Command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that the first customer is waiting (the first special symbol is not changed and the first reserved memory is not stored). (Wait demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that the second customer is waiting (the second special symbol is not changed and the second reserved memory is not stored). (Wait demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is high probability / first KT state. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is high probability / second KT state.

The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the first variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b and the display state of the background symbol display portion 9c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the display state of the lamp is changed. The sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Note that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed presentation control command related to the big hit game and a presentation control command indicating a gaming state (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the presentation control board 80.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process, the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. In other words, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the first start winning opening 13 has occurred (step S311), a first start opening switch passing process is executed (step S312). Thereafter, the CPU 56 performs any one of steps S300 to S307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes in steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

First special symbol normal process (step S300): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the first big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The first big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

First display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 200 is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

First special symbol changing process (step S303): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the first variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the production control microcomputer 200 Control to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command is performed, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

First special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first big hit flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S304A. If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

First gate passage waiting process (step S304A): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control for waiting for the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 17 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 17 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example).

First big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): This is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first grand prize opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls entered in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Also, the execution time of the first big prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S306. The first big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round. However, when starting the first round, the first big winning opening opening pre-processing is also a process of starting a big hit game.

First big prize opening opening process (step S306): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 200, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the like are performed. In addition, when a game ball is won at the big winning opening and the first counting switch 23a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a big winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition for the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds have been completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

First big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 200 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not is 4) (step S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 20) (step S215). . In the process of step S215, the big hit determination random number (random 1), the big hit type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5), which are software random numbers, are extracted and stored in the storage area. . Note that the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning a prize) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of variation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 5) in a first variation pattern setting process described later. May be.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 20, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, a big hit determination random number (random 1), a big hit type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 5) are stored in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. Is done. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

Further, control is performed to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S216). The first effective start winning command includes a pre-determination result.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process. The state where the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 is a state in which the first special symbol indicator 8a does not display the variation of the first special symbol, and This is a case where the first big hit game is not in progress (the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the first reserved memory number (step S52A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is confirmed.

If the first reserved memory number is 0, a first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200 (step S51A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55 Are stored in the first random number buffer area (step S53A), the value of the first reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is expressed as the first reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers are extracted always coincides with the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. That is, in this example, every time the variable display start condition is satisfied, the contents of each storage area are shifted, so the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified. In this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are: The order of extraction is also stored in an identifiable manner.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, the low probability / non-KT state is determined and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off. When the 1KT flag is on, the low probability / first KT state is determined and the low probability / first KT background designation command is determined. When the probability variable flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the high probability / second It is determined that the state is the 1KT state, and the high-accuracy / first KT background designation command is determined. When the probability variation flag is on and the second KT flag is on, the high-probability / second KT state is determined and the high-accuracy / second KT Send the background specification command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the big special symbol variation of the second special symbol is being performed (step S64AA). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big special hit of the second special symbol is being changed. When it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S68A without performing the processes after step S64A. Thereby, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly deviate regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

Note that the method of forcibly removing is not limited to that described above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step S64AA, a process of setting a random value (fixed value) out of place as the big hit determination random number (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65A. Regardless of which jackpot determination random number (random 1) has been acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forced to be off.

In addition, in a gaming machine that performs a small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, if the big special symbol fluctuation of the second special symbol is in step S64AA, steps S64A to S161A. The random number value (fixed value) is set as a small hit determination random number (may be the same random number as the big hit determination random number or may be a completely different random number) By performing the small hit determination, the big hit determination random number (random 1) may be forcibly disregarded at the time of starting winning.

If the second special symbol jackpot change is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random 1) from the first random number storage buffer (step S64A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S64A). S65A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S66A), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (step S67A). . Then, based on random 2, it is determined whether the big hit type is 16R probability variable big hit, 6R probability variable big hit, or 6R normal big hit (step S160A), the big hit type is stored (step S161A), and the process proceeds to step S68A. . Further, when the big hit is not made in step S66A (that is, when it is out of place), the process proceeds to step S68A.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, the case where it is unconditionally determined to be all off is shown. I can't. For example, even when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be configured to be determined to be a big hit with a low probability.

In step S68A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S68A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step S68A.

In step S65A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first selects any variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12A to 12B according to the game state. (Step S201). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 is based on the variation pattern table decided to be used in step S201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Then, it is determined which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 12 is to be used (step S1700). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1701).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1700, the game control microcomputer 560 sets variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first special symbol process timer to vary. Time measurement is started (step S1702), a measurement execution flag to be described later is set, and the first special symbol display on the first special symbol display 8a is started to be displayed (step S1703). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S1706).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S302), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56), based on the determination result of whether or not to win, and the determination result of the jackpot type, Any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) is controlled to be transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S303) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step S1121A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step S1122A), the symbol is confirmed in the effect control microcomputer 200. Control to transmit the specified command is performed (step S1123A). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

When the first variation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, The determination can be made by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1123A and performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 200 (step S1123A). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

In this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol by executing the processing of steps S1125A to S1125A, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. Is forcibly stopped to prevent a situation where a big hit occurs simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the side of the production control microcomputer 200, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly disengaged, the first variable display portion 9a in the first variable display section 9a receives the symbol confirmation designation command. In addition to stopping the stop display of one decorative symbol, control is performed to forcibly stop and display the symbol as a variation display result of the first decorative symbol based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step S302.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process shown in FIG. 18 and the second special symbol process shown in FIG. 28, the first start port switch passing process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S312). And the second start port switch passing process (see step S322) is executed, so that even when the first special symbol or the second special symbol jackpot symbol is being displayed, a new start prize is generated. It is configured to store new pending storage.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (N in step S1125A), the process is terminated.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the KT number counter indicating the low probability / the remaining number of times of the first KT state is “0” (step S2010). If there is, that is, if the low probability / the first KT state is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT number counter is not “0”, that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 56 subtracts “1” from the value of the KT number counter (step S2011). Is determined (step S2012). When the value of the KT number counter does not become “0”, the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT number counter becomes “0”, that is, when the 100th change of the low probability / first KT state is ended, the CPU 56 resets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state ( Step S2013) and the process proceeds to Step S2014. As a result, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low probability / non-KT state) when 100 fluctuations are completed in the low probability / first KT state.

In step S2014, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step S2014). If the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT number counter (step S2015).

Next, the CPU 56 performs control to start external output of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 (see FIG. 32 and FIG. 33) if not output yet (step S2015X).

Next, the CPU 56 sets a pre-winner opening timer (step S2017), sets round 1 release pattern data corresponding to the big hit type (step S2018), and sets “1” in the round number counter indicating the number of big wins. Is set (step S2019), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S2020).

In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S2015X, the external output of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 can be performed even before the game ball passes through the operation gate 17 and the big hit game is started. The external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is started at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed.

Although details will be described later, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a right-handed notification for urging the player to launch a game ball to the right of the game area 7 can be executed. . Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as a right-handed notification, a firing promotion notification that prompts the player to launch the game ball aiming at the operation gate 17 can be executed.

Conversely, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 or the operation gate 17 in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), a mode with a low degree of recognition (for example, a low volume sound output or a small sound output). It is also possible to make a left-handed notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball to the left of the game area 7 by screen display). On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), a mode with a high recognition degree (for example, a loud sound) You may comprise so that left-handed notification may be performed by an output or a large screen display. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, for a player who has accidentally fired a game ball to the right of the game area 7, a light left-hand notification is given in a mode of low recognition to the surroundings of the gaming machine. Thus, a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation may be configured to perform a left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is high. If comprised in that way, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation can be urged to return to the left-handed operation from the store clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, when the number of detected game balls at the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the second start winning opening 14, and the special winning opening 24 reaches a certain number, a left-handed notification is made. Also good. In addition, the gate 32 and the operation gate 17 perform left-handed notification when a game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), and the second start winning port 14 or the special winning port. In 24, when a certain number (for example, 1) or more of game balls less than a predetermined number is detected, a left-handed notification may be performed.

In addition, for example, when a game ball is detected at the gate 32 or the operation gate 17, no external signal is output, whereas when a game ball is detected at the second start winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24, an external signal is output. It may be configured to do.

In this embodiment, the demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. However, when the demonstration display is performed in the normal state, the gate 32, the operation gate 17, the second start winning award 14 or When a winning of a game ball in the special winning opening 24 is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be terminated and a left-handed notification may be performed.

In this embodiment, since the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is executed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, for example, the low probability / first KT state is terminated before the game store is closed. If the second special symbol hold memory remains later, the second special symbol changes for a long time (5 minutes) in situations such as when the player has ended the game due to the closing of the game shop. Since the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed through the display, it can be output to the outside, so that it is possible to prompt the game shop clerk to initialize the gaming machine 1 between the closing of the amusement store and the next opening. At this time, the store clerk opens the store after initialization (RAM clear).

In addition, not only before the game store is closed, but when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed after the player leaves the seat (for example, the second reserved memory generated in the KT state is digested in the normal state, the second special There is a case where the big hit symbol is derived and displayed after a long time (5 minutes) fluctuation display of the symbol), but even in such a case, the external output of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 is performed at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. Since it is executed, it is possible to prompt the store clerk of the game store to initialize the gaming machine 1.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) in the special symbol process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input (step S2501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is not input, the process is terminated as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input, the CPU 56 transmits a first big hit start designation command (step S2502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first big winning opening opening pre-processing. A corresponding value is set (step S2503).

In this embodiment, when the first gate passage waiting process is executed, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the first special symbol variation display result, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the operating gate 17 The game ball is configured to shift to a big hit game on condition that the game ball passes through and is detected by the operation gate switch 17a.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening pre-processing (step S305) in the special symbol process. In the first big prize opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big prize opening pre-timer by -1 (step S1401). If it is before the start of round 1, the value of the timer for opening the big prize opening set in step S2017 of the first special symbol stop process is measured by executing the process of step S1401. The jackpot display time (fanfare period) before the start of round 1 is measured. Also, if it is round 1 or later, the value of the pre-winner opening timer set in the big open-mouth opening process is measured by executing the process of step S1401, and after each round ( The interval period (except after the last round) will be measured.

In this embodiment, the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are measured using a common time measurement timer. However, the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are separately set. You may comprise so that time may be measured using this timer.

Next, when the timer before opening the big prize opening times out (the value of the time measurement timer is 0) (step S1411), the CPU 56 sets the current round number in the EXT data of the designation command during opening of the big prize opening. Then, control to transmit to the production control microcomputer 200 is performed (step S1412).

Next, the CPU 56 initializes a winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S1413). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to zero.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the special winning opening to be in an open state (step S1414). Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus 20.

Next, the CPU 56 sets the opening time according to the jackpot type and the starting round to the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening (step S1415).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S306) (step S1416).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first big hit end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A). If the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204A. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the first big hit flag is reset (step S2201A), and the first big hit end designation command is transmitted (step S2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203A), and the processing is ended.

In step S2204A, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206A). Whether or not it is 16R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal process. If it is the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207A), and also the second KT flag indicating the second KT state. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S2208A). Then, control goes to a step S2214A.

If it is not the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the type of jackpot that has been completed this time is the 6R probability variation big hit (step S2209A). Whether or not it is 6R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal process. If it is 6R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2210A) and sets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state and the first KT state. (Step S2211A). Then, control goes to a step S2214A.

If it is not the 6R probability variable big hit (that is, if it is a 6R normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2212A). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” to the KT number counter indicating the low probability / the remaining number of times of the first KT state (step S2213A). Then, control goes to a step S2214A.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S2214A).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the second special symbol process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process, the second start port switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the second start winning port 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. In other words, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 has occurred (step S321), a second start opening switch passing process is executed (step S322). It should be noted that if “first” in the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 19 is read as “second”, the second start port switch passing process will be explained. Thereafter, the CPU 56 performs any one of steps S350 to S360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes in steps S350 to S360 are as follows.

Second special symbol normal process (step S350): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the second big hit flag is set. On the other hand, if not a big hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S351. Note that the second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S351): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S352.

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S352): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 200 is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S353.

Second special symbol changing process (step S353): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the second variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S351 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the production control microcomputer 200 Control to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command is performed, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

Second special symbol stop process (step S354): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S354A (11 in this example). If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S358. If neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when forced off), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S350 (0 in this example). Update. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S354A): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control for waiting for the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 17 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 17 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S355.

Pre-opening process for second big prize opening (step S355): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second big prize opening opening pre-process, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls entered in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Also, the execution time of the second big prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S356 (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

Second big prize opening opening process (step S356): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 200, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the like are performed. In addition, when a game ball is won at the big winning opening and the first counting switch 23a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a big winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds have been completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S357 (7 in this example).

Second big hit end process (step S357): This is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 200 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

Pre-opening process for second small hit (step S358): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit pre-processing, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 24) is initialized, and the solenoid 106 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. Also, the execution time of the second small hit release process is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S359 (9 in this example). The pre-opening process for the second small hit is also a process for starting the small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S359): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming that the closing condition of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is satisfied is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 of 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 15) elapses. In addition, when a game ball is won at the special winning opening and the second counting switch 25a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S360 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

Second small hit end processing (step S360): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control for causing the production control microcomputer 200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process (step S350) in the second special symbol process. The state where the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350 is a state in which the second special symbol indicator 8b does not display the variation of the second special symbol, and This is a case where neither the second big hit game (special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (special variable winning ball device 22 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the second reserved memory number (step S52B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is confirmed.

If the second reserved memory number is 0, a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200 (step S51B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55 Is stored in the second random number buffer area (step S53B), the value of the second reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is expressed as the second reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved memory numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. That is, in this example, every time the variable display start condition is satisfied, the contents of each storage area are shifted, so the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S60A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step S64BB). Specifically, when the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed. If it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S68B without performing the processes after step S64B. Thereby, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly deviate regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

Note that the method of forcibly removing is not limited to that described above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step S64BB, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of place as the big hit determination random number (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65B. Regardless of which jackpot determination random number (random 1) has been acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forced to be off.

In addition, in a gaming machine that performs a small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step S64BB, steps S64B to S161B. The random number value (fixed value) is set as a small hit determination random number (may be the same random number as the big hit determination random number or may be a completely different random number) By performing the small hit determination, the big hit determination random number (random 1) may be forcibly disregarded at the time of starting winning.

When the big hit of the first special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the big hit determination random number (random 1) from the second random number storage buffer (step S64B), and executes the big hit determination module (step S64B). S65B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S66B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (step S67B). . Then, based on random 2, it is determined whether the big hit type is 16R probability variable big hit, 6R probability variable big hit, 2R probability variable big hit, or 2R normal big hit (step S160B), and the big hit type is stored (step S161B). The process proceeds to S68B.

When the big hit is not made in step S66B, the game control microcomputer 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the big hit is made (step S164B), and decides to make the big hit as it is. Then, the process proceeds to step S68B.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, the case where it is unconditionally determined to be a big hit is shown (forcibly dismissed) However, this is not the only case. For example, even when the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big win, it may be configured to determine whether or not to make a small win by performing a lottery process based on a random number. In this case, although the lottery process is executed, it may be configured to determine a small hit with a probability of 100%, or may be configured to determine a shift with a low probability.

In step S68B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S68B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step S68B.

In step S65B, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, if “first” is read as “second”, the second variation pattern process is explained.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S352), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit, and the big hit type decision result. Based on this, control is performed to transmit any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the production control microcomputer 200. .

The second special symbol changing process (step S353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S303) shown in FIG. That is, in the first special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 23, if “first” is read as “second”, the second special symbol variation processing is explained.

The second gate passage waiting process (step S354A) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) shown in FIG. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 25, if “first” is read as “second”, the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

The second big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S355) is the same as the first big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S304A) shown in FIG. That is, in the pre-opening process for the first big winning opening shown in FIG. 26, if the “first” is read as “second”, the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening is explained.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second big hit end process (step S357) in the special symbol process. In the second jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S2200B). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204B. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the second big hit flag is reset (step S2201B), and the second big hit end designation command is transmitted (step S2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203B), and the processing is ended.

In step S2204B, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot type that has just ended is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207B). Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not it has been controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the current big hit (step S2208B). Whether the first KT state or the second KT state was controlled before starting the big hit is, for example, in the second special symbol stop process before the big hit game is started, in the first KT state before the big hit is started. The first KT storage flag indicating that the second KT state has been set and the second KT storage flag indicating that the second KT state has been set are set. In step S2208B, it is determined whether or not the first KT storage flag or the second KT storage flag is set. Check it. If neither the first KT state nor the second KT state is set before the big hit, the first KT flag is set and the state shifts to the first KT state (step S2209B). If it is in the first KT state or the second KT state before the big hit starts, the second KT flag is set and the state shifts to the second KT state (step S2210B). Then, control goes to a step S2216B.

By executing the processing of steps S2208B to S2210B, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variable big hit is based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the case is the KT state before the big hit starts. Only when the state shifts to the second KT state and is in the non-KT state before the big hit starts, the state shifts to the first KT state. That is, as already described, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-handed operation is performed, and the first special symbol variation display is mainly executed. It is configured assuming that. However, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it has been configured to unconditionally shift to the second KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, and there is a possibility that the original gaming property is impaired and gambling is unnecessarily increased. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variable big hit is based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the transition to the second KT state is made only when the KT state is before the big hit, Such a situation is prevented, and in the non-KT state, the player is prompted to perform a left-handed operation.

If it is not the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the type of big hit that has been completed this time is 6R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit (step S2211B). Whether 6R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is 6R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212B), and sets the first KT flag and transitions to the first KT state (step S2212B). Step S2213B). Then, control goes to a step S2216B.

If neither the 6R-probable big hit or the 2R-probable big hit is present (that is, if it is a 2R normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2214B). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT number counter (step S2215B). Then, control goes to a step S2216B.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S350) (step S2216B).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the special symbol changing process is being executed) (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing variable symbol special display. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203). ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, the display result designation command transmission processing also varies. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

Next, an external output signal output from the gaming machine 1 will be described. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) performs information output processing (step S29), processing in step S2015X in the first special symbol stop processing, and second special symbol stop processing. By executing the same processing as in step S2015X, an external output signal is output to an external device such as a hall management computer via the external output terminal board provided in the gaming machine 1.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external output signal output from the gaming machine 1. A prize ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal board. The prize ball signal is a signal that is externally output every time a predetermined number (10 in this example) of prize balls is paid out. The jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal board. The jackpot signal 1 is a signal output externally continuously over the period of all jackpot games. The jackpot signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal board. The jackpot signal 2 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during all jackpot games, during the probability variation state, and during the KT state (in the first KT state and in the second KT state). In addition, a special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope. The special winning award winning signal is a signal output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24. In addition, a prize ball number signal is assigned to the terminal 09 of the external output terminal board. The prize ball scheduled number signal is a signal output externally every time the number of prize balls to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

The example shown in FIG. 32 shows a case where a common special winning award winning signal is output to the outside without distinguishing whether the state is the first KT state or the second KT state. I can't catch it. For example, a special winning award winning signal that differs depending on whether the state is the first KT state or the second KT state may be output to the outside. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for describing a modified example of the external output signal output from the gaming machine 1. In the modified example shown in FIG. 33, the special winning opening signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope, and the special winning opening signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 08 of the external output terminal slope. . The special winning opening winning signal 1 is a signal output externally based on the detection of the winning of a game ball to the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. The special winning opening winning signal 2 is a signal output externally based on the detection of the winning of a game ball to the special winning opening 24 in the second KT state.

32 and 33, it may be configured to provide a dedicated small hit signal that is continuously output to the outside during the small hit game period.

Next, the normal symbol process (step S26C) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S5111). A switch passage process (step S5112) is executed. Then, the CPU 56 executes any one of the processes shown in steps S5100 to S5103 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

Gate switch passage processing (step S5112): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. Note that the LED of the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 56 performs processing for extracting the value of the random number for normal symbol determination (random 4) and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passages through the gate.

Normal symbol normal processing (step S5100): The CPU 56 can start the normal symbol variation (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100, specifically, the normal symbol is processed). When the display 10 does not display the change of the normal symbol, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not in the open / close operation based on the normal symbol display 10 being hit and displayed, the gate pass memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol variation time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step S5101): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step S5102): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, it checks whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the time before the normal electric accessory is released is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “5”) indicating the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step S5102A).

Normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step S5102A): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric component operating time in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer To start opening the variable winning ball apparatus 15. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (step S5103).

Normal electric accessory operation processing (step S5103): The CPU 56 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball apparatus 15. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing (step S5100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step S5121). If the number of stored gate passes is 0 (Y in step S5121), the process is terminated as it is. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step S5121), the CPU 56 reads out the random number value for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1 (step S5122). Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the gate passage storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S5123). That is, the random number value for normal symbol determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n−1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective numbers of gate passing memories is extracted is always the order of the number of gate passing memories = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is supposed to match.

Next, the CPU 56 uses the normal symbol determination table to determine whether or not the normal symbol is reached.

FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a determination value per normal symbol to be compared with a random number for determination per normal symbol (random 4) is set. There are a normal normal symbol determination table used in KT and a normal symbol determination table for KT used in the KT state.

As shown in FIG. 36, in this embodiment, it is determined to win with a probability of 1/10 in the normal state and with a probability of 10/11 in the KT state. In the present embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is different between the normal state and the KT state, so that the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is more likely to occur in the KT state than in the normal state. Although it is configured so that small hits are likely to occur, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the normal state and the KT state may be the same.

Specifically, the CPU 56 selects the normal symbol determination table for KT if the KT state is set (if the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set) (Y in step S5123A, S5123B), and if it is the normal state. The normal symbol determination table is selected (if the first KT flag or the second KT flag is not set) (N in step S5123A, S5123C).

Then, in step S5124, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the normal symbol per-determination random number value read in step S5122 is a value within the range of [3 to 12] in the normal state. If there is, it is determined whether or not the random value for determination per ordinary symbol read in step S5122 is [3]. In the case of winning, a winning symbol is set as a display result (step S5125), and the process proceeds to step S5130A.

In step S5124, when the read random number for normal symbol determination is not within the winning range, the CPU 56 sets a symbol as a display result (step S5126), and proceeds to step S5130A.

In step S4130A, if the first KT flag is set, CPU 56 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y in step S5130, S5130B). If the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol change time (N in step S5130, S5130C).

Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101) (step S5131).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (step S5101). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S5141). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S5141), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S5144).

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (Y in step S5141), the CPU 56 corresponds to 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer. A value is set (step S5142). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S5102) (step S5143).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop process (step S5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3701). Then, CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3702), the process ends.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S3702), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol (in step S5124). (Step S3703). Note that whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol is determined by, for example, setting the normal symbol per symbol determination flag when it is determined to be a winning symbol in step S5124 and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can do.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a missing symbol (N in step S3703), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100) ( Specifically, it is updated to “0” (step S3708).

In step S3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step S3703), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (step S3704). That is, if the state is the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the normal electric accessory is released (step S3706). If the first KT flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the normal electric accessory release (step S3705). .

Next, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically “5”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step S5102A) (step S5164).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step S5102A). In the normal electric accessory release pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by −1 (step S3801). Then, CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3802), the process is terminated.

When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the time before the normal electric accessory release has elapsed (Y in step S3802), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (step S3803). If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step S3805). If the first KT flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step S3804).

As described above, in the present embodiment, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory release time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory release time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing this, the first KT state is in a state where it is easier to start and win the second start winning opening 14 than in the normal state or the second KT state. Accordingly, the first KT state is configured such that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 22 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 15 than in the normal state or the second KT state.

Note that the control method for facilitating the start winning in the second start winning opening 14 when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is released more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). Control may be performed so that the number of times of opening 15 is set to 1 while the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is set to 2 in the first KT state. By doing so, in the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened, it is possible to make it easier to start and win the second start winning opening 14.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, compared to the case of the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 described above, and the variable winning ball device 15 It may be executed in combination with control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to the open state (step S3806). Specifically, the solenoid 16 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103) (step S3807).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory actuating process (step S5103). In the normal electric actor operation process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3901). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3902). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3901), the process is terminated as it is.

If the normal symbol process timer times out in step S3902 (Y in step S3902), the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to be closed (step S3911). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 16 is stopped and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100) (step S3912).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (step S701). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 201 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 201 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs the first decorative symbol process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display portion 9a is executed. . Further, the second decorative symbol process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process, a process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 9b is executed. . Further, background symbol process processing for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed (step S706). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S707). In addition, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a random number such as a notice determination random number is executed (step S708). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 16 and 17) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

43 to 45 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 201 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 201 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618A).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 201 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been normally received. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 executes a confirmation command reception process (step S620A).

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 201 receives the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 ends the instruction notification (step S3804). The instruction notification is an effect of notifying how to hit the game ball, and is a first instruction notification that prompts the player to launch the game ball substantially to the right side of the game area 7 and a second that prompts the game gate 17 to launch. Instruction notification is provided. As the first instruction notification, the first normal instruction notification for displaying an image including the characters “right-handed” on the entire surface of the effect display device 9 and “right-handed” on a part (upper right portion) of the effect display device 9. The first reduction instruction notification for displaying an image including the characters “” is provided, and as the second instruction notification, an image including the characters “Aim for the gate” is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 9. 2 A normal instruction notification and a second reduction instruction notification for displaying an image including the characters “Aim at the gate” on a part (upper right portion) of the effect display device 9 are provided.

In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the first instruction notification is started, and the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is not detected until 10 seconds after the first instruction notification is started. In such a case, the second instruction notification image is superimposed on the first instruction notification image.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 resets an instruction notification timer for measuring a period until the instruction notification is switched from the first instruction notification to the second instruction notification (step S3805).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 201 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S624A). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S624A is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start specifying command (step S625), the effect control CPU 201 sets a small hit start specifying command reception flag (step S626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end specifying command (step S627), the effect control CPU 201 sets a small hit end specifying command reception flag (step S628).

If the received effect control command is low-accuracy / non-KT background designation (step S630), the effect control CPU 201 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the low probability / non-KT state (for example, , A blue display color background screen) (step S631). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step S632).

If the received effect control command is the low probability / first KT background designation (step S633), the effect control CPU 201 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as the background screen corresponding to the low probability / first KT state (for example, , A green display color background screen) (step S634). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first KT state flag (step S635). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the probability variation state flag indicating the probability variation state and the second KT state flag indicating the second KT state (step S636).

If the received effect control command is high-accuracy / first KT background designation (step S637), the effect control CPU 201 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the high probability / first KT state (for example, , A yellow display color background screen) (step S638). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability variation state flag and the first KT state flag (step S639). Further, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second KT state flag if set (step S640).

If the received effect control command is high-accuracy / second KT background designation (step S641), the effect control CPU 201 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the high probability / second KT state (for example, , A red display color background screen) (step S642). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability variation state flag and the second KT state flag (step S643). In addition, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S644).

If the received effect control command is a grand prize opening prize designation command (step S650), the production control CPU 201 sets 15 in each of the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter (one prize to the big prize opening). (Corresponding to the number of winning prize balls) is added (step S651).

The 1st prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the Renso, and it is a big winning prize in the jackpot game that triggered the launch of the Renso and all the jackpot games that occurred during the Renso. A prize ball based on the winning of the game ball and the prize ball based on the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the probable change state, the first KT state and the second KT state in the recreational zone. It is added at any time. The second prize ball counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the second KT state, and is a big hit game that triggered the start of the second KT state and all the big hit games that occurred during the second KT state. Thus, a winning ball based on the winning of the game ball in the big winning opening and a winning ball based on the winning of the gaming ball in the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the second KT state are added as needed.

Further, if the CPU 201 for effect control is displaying a display of the number of prize balls during the consecutive game showing the number of prize balls during the game in the effect display device 9, it is based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition. If the display of the prize ball number during the Renso is updated and the special rush medium prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls in the second KT state is being displayed on the effect display device 9, the second prize ball counter after addition is displayed. Based on the value of the special rush, the display of the number of winning balls in special rush is updated (step S652).

If the received effect control command is a special prize opening designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 201 sets 10 (1 to the special prize opening 24) to each of the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter. (Equivalent to the number of winning balls per winning) is added (step S654). Also, if the CPU 201 for effect control is displaying the display of the number of prize balls during consecutive games, it updates the display of the number of prize balls during consecutive games based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition and the special rush. If the middle prize ball number display is being displayed, the special rush middle prize ball number display is updated based on the value of the second prize ball number counter after the addition (step S655).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S656). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to display a prize ball addition display (for example, a character display such as “+10”). (Step S657). In addition, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27 (step S658) and lights up the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S659).

On the other hand, if the 2nd KT state flag is not set (it is not the 2nd KT state), it will return to Step S611, without performing processing of Steps S657-S659.

By executing the processing of steps S656 to S659, in this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball has won the special winning opening 24 during the second KT state, display of the winning ball addition display, output of winning sound When the special winning opening lamp 24a is turned on and the game ball is won in the special winning opening 24, if it is not in the second KT state, the display of the winning ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the special winning prize are displayed. The lighting of the mouth lamp 24a is not performed.

Note that it is not always necessary to perform all of the display of the winning ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a, and only one or two of these are executed. May be.

If the received production control command is the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command (step S4301), the production control CPU 201 sets a first demonstration command reception flag indicating that the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command has been received. (Step S4302).

If the received effect control command is the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command (step S4303), the effect control CPU 201 sets a second demo command reception flag indicating that the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command has been received. (Step S4304).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 201 sets a flag according to the received effect control command or executes a process (step S670). Then, control goes to a step S611.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing processing upon receipt of a confirmation command. The effect control CPU 201 determines whether any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, so that the symbol that has been stopped is a big hit symbol. It is determined whether or not (step S4401). When any one of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, that is, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation command. Whether it is a command or not is determined (step S4401A), and if it is the first symbol confirmation designation command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

If the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4401B), and if it is in the KT state (first KT flag and second KT). If any of the flags are set), the process moves to step S4404.

If it is in the normal state, the CPU 201 for effect control determines whether or not a ready-to-be-displayed flag indicating that the big hit preparation display indicating that the big hit is being changed has already been executed is set (step S4402). If it is set, the ready-in-display flag is reset (step S4403), and the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4404, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first normal instruction notification (step S4404), and sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to the instruction notification timer (step S4406).

In step S4402, if the ready display flag indicating that the ready display has been executed is not set, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first reduction instruction notification (step S4405), and proceeds to step S4406. To do. The display during preparation is an effect that is executed when the change of the first special symbol is started during the big hit change of the second special symbol in the normal state. Specifically, the character “preparing for big hit” is displayed. The included image is an effect displayed on the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a still image including the characters “in preparation for jackpot” is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a jackpot game is started as a display in preparation. You may comprise so that the display corresponding to the period until (the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol) may be performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed. Also, when the big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, if it is in the KT state, the first normal instruction notification is performed. When the big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction is notified only when the preparation display is executed in the normal state, and the preparation display is not executed. Performs the first reduction instruction notification.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process (step S706) shown in FIG. First, the effect control CPU 201 performs instruction notification control processing for performing control regarding instruction notification (step S4501), and performs demonstration display control processing (step S4502) for performing control regarding demonstration display.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 performs one of steps S900 to S908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

Background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol variation start condition is satisfied. If the background symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 9c starts the variation. To control. The background symbol variation start condition is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any variation pattern command is received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start process (step S901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S901): Control is performed so that the variation of the left middle right background symbol is started. Further, a background symbol stop symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the background symbol variation time is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902).

Background symbol changing process (step S902): The end of the background symbol changing time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol stop process (step S903). In the background symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 201 may extend the variation time of the background symbol.

Background symbol stop process (step S903): Control is performed to finally stop the change of the background symbol and display the stop symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900), the big hit display process (step S904), or the small hit middle process (step S908). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904), the jackpot display process (step S904) is performed on condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to a value corresponding to. Further, when updating to a value corresponding to the small hitting process (step S908), the value corresponding to the small hitting display process (step S908) is set on condition that the small hit start designation command is received. Update.

Big hit display processing (step S904): Control of big hit display is performed. Then, upon receiving a winning prize opening opening display command (a winning prize opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( Update to a value corresponding to step S905).

In-round processing (step S905): Display control during round is performed. For example, if a display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, the display control of the number of rounds is performed.

Post-round processing (step S906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the big winning opening indicating that the big winning opening is after being opened (closed) is received, the interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S907): Control of the big hit end display after the end of the big hit game is performed. For example, when an ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900).

Small hit processing (step S908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. When the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900).

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the instruction notification control process. In the instruction notification control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first instruction notification is being performed (step S4601). If the first instruction notification is being performed, the instruction notification timer value is subtracted by one (step S4602). ), It is determined whether or not the instruction notification timer times out (step S4603). If time-out has occurred (when 10 seconds have elapsed since the execution of the first instruction notification), the second normal instruction notification is started (Y in step S3503, S4605) if the first normal instruction notification is being executed. If the 1 reduction instruction notification is being executed, the second reduced display notification is started (step S4506).

Thus, in the present embodiment, the second instruction notification is executed 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. Further, when the first normal instruction notification is executed, the second normal instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds, and when the first reduction instruction notification is executed, the second reduction instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds. It becomes.

When executing the second instruction notification, the second instruction notification image may be superimposed on the first instruction notification image, or the first instruction notification image may be deleted and the second instruction notification image may be displayed. It may be displayed.

49 and 50 are flowcharts showing the demonstration display control process. In the demonstration display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demonstration command reception flag is set (step S4701), and if not set, proceeds to step S4706. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4702). If it is not in the normal state, the process proceeds to step S4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the normal state.

In the normal state, the production control CPU 201 sets a first demonstration standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to a time (for example, 30 seconds) until the first demonstration display is started (step S4703). A first demonstration standby flag indicating that the first demonstration display is waiting is set (step S4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step S4705).

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demonstration standby flag is set (step S4706). If the first special symbol variation is started (step S4707). Y), or when the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step S4708), the process proceeds to step S4712. Thus, the first demonstration display is not executed when the first special symbol variation is started or the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the variation of the second special symbol. Specifically, in step S4707, if a variation pattern command indicating variation in the first decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation has started. In step S4708, when the second jackpot start designation command is received, it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol.

When the first demonstration standby flag is set, the first special symbol variation is not started (N in Step S4707), and the game state is not controlled based on the variation in the second special symbol (N in Step S4708). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first demonstration standby timer (step S4709), and when the first demonstration standby timer times out, the first demonstration display is started (step S4711), and the first demonstration standby flag is reset (step S4711). Step S4712).

Thereafter, when the first demonstration display is being performed (Y in step S4713), the production control CPU 201 starts the change of the first special symbol (Y of step S4714) or based on the variation of the second special symbol. If the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state (Y in step S4715), the first demonstration display is terminated (step S4716).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo command reception flag is set (step S4801), and if it is not set, the process shifts to step S4806. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step S4802). If it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step S4805. Specifically, if either the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the state is the KT state.

If it is in the KT state, the production control CPU 201 sets a second demonstration standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to a time (for example, 30 seconds) until the second demonstration display is started (step S4803). A second demonstration standby flag indicating that the second demonstration display is waiting is set (step S4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step S4805).

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demonstration standby flag is set (step S4806), and if it is set, the second special symbol variation is started (step S4807). Y), or when not in the KT state (N of step S4808), the process proceeds to step S4812. Thus, the second demonstration display is not executed when the second special symbol variation is started or the KT state is ended. Specifically, in step S4807, when a variation pattern command indicating variation in the second decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol variation has started. In step S4808, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

If the second demonstration standby flag is set, the second special symbol variation is not started (N in step S4807), and the KT state is not ended (Y in step S4808), the value of the second demonstration standby timer Is subtracted by 1 (step S4809), and when the second demonstration standby timer times out, the second demonstration display is started (step S4811), and the second demonstration standby flag is reset (step S4812).

Thereafter, the CPU 201 for effect control is displaying the second demonstration (Y in Step S4813), whether the variation of the second special symbol is started (Y in Step S4814), or the KT state is ended (Step S4814). N in S4815), the second demonstration display is terminated (step S4816).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start process (step S901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines a stop symbol of the background symbol (step S920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of place), the left middle right background symbol is completely inconsistent or only the left and right background symbols are matched. Reach out-of-reach symbol combinations. When the display result 2 designation command is received (when 16R probability variation big hit is determined), a combination of symbols in which the left middle right background symbols are arranged in odd symbols is determined. In addition, when a display result 3 designation command or a display result 5 designation command is received (when 6R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit is determined), a combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left middle right are even-numbered symbols. To decide. In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit is determined), the same combination as the reach off-shift symbols in which only the left and right background symbols match. To decide. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, “135”) is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used, in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S921). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S922). Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S923). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP 209 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern in the background symbol display unit 9c. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

If the execution of the continuous effect is specified in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation pattern # 17, # 18), step S923 and the background symbol variation processing described later are performed according to the process table selected in step S921. By executing the process of step S944, a continuous effect is executed during the background symbol variation display. When execution of the battle effect is specified in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation pattern # 11, # 12, # 14, # 15, # 18), step S923 is performed according to the process table selected in step S921. And a battle effect is executed during the background symbol variation display by executing the processing of step S944 of the background symbol variation processing described later.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the background symbol variation time timer and starts the background symbol variation time timer (step S924). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902) (step S925).

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the background symbol changing process (step S902) in the background symbol process. In the background symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 201 first decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S940) and decrements the value of the normal symbol variation time timer by 1 (step S941). When the process timer times out (step S942), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S944).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the continuation effect is executed during the background symbol variation display, and whether or not the continuation effect start timing is reached (step S945). Note that whether or not the continuous effect is to be executed can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second variation patterns # 17 and # 18 are designated by the received variation pattern command. Whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol variation time timer set in step S924 of the background symbol variation start process. If it is the start timing of the continuation effect, the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to display the consecutive ball prize display on the basis of the current first prize ball number counter value (step S946). . In this embodiment, the special rush in-game ball number display is displayed when the second KT state is in effect (see step S9010 to be described later), but the start timing of the continuous effect during the second KT state is displayed. Then, by executing the process of step S946, in addition to the special rush in-game ball number display, the in-game game ball number display is also displayed.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT transition effect is executed during the background symbol variation display, and the start timing of the first effect is reached (step S947). Whether or not the first KT transition effect is to be executed can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second variation pattern # 18 is designated by the received variation pattern command. That is, in this embodiment, when the background symbol variation display is executed based on the second variation pattern # 18, is the continuous rendering performed during the background symbol variation display and the second KT state continues? After the suggestion is made, the first KT transition effect is executed, and the second KT state ends and the first KT state transition is performed (however, at this stage, it is still the The 2KT state is not finished, and precisely the second KT state is finished at the start of the jackpot), and then develops into a battle effect. Whether or not it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol variation time timer set in step S924 of the background symbol variation start process.

If it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect, the effect control CPU 201 ends the sound output of the second KT music from the speaker 27 (step S948). In other words, in this embodiment, when controlled to the second KT state, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the big hit game based on the 16R probability variable big hit that became the trigger (steps to be described later) In step S948, the sound output of the music for the second KT is terminated by executing the process of step S948.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 deletes the consecutive ball prize display and the special rush prize ball display on the effect display device 9 (step S949). In this embodiment, the character display such as “in special rush” is displayed in the second KT state, but the character display such as “in special rush” is also erased in step S949.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes a background symbol variation time extension process (step S950). That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, There is a possibility that the variation display of the special symbol may be started, and the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, the background symbol fluctuation time extension process in step S950 is executed, so that when the fluctuation display of the background symbol is executed corresponding to the fluctuation display of one special symbol, the special symbol of the other symbol is changed. When the symbol variation display is started, the variation pattern of the background symbol is replaced or the variation time is extended as necessary.

In step S950, for example, when the CPU 201 for effect control executes the variable display of the background symbol in response to the variable display of one special symbol that is out of place, the variation display of the other special symbol that is a big hit is displayed. When started, processing is performed to replace the background symbol variation pattern and extend the variation time in correspondence with the special symbol of the big hit. Also, for example, when the variation display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variation display of one special symbol that is a big hit, when the variation display of the other special symbol that is out of place is started, The change display of the currently executed background symbol is executed as it is without changing the change pattern or extending the change time. In addition, for example, when the variation display of the other special symbol that is a big hit is started when the variation display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variation display of one special symbol that is a big hit, it has already been described. As described above, in this embodiment, since the change display of the special symbol that was started later is forced out of the way, the background pattern currently being executed is not replaced without changing the background pattern change pattern or extending the change time. The symbol variation display is executed as it is.

In the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 is changing the big hit of the second special symbol, and when the change of the first special symbol is started (Y of step S5000, Y of S5001, Y of S5002), the big hit A display in preparation is executed (step S5003), and a display-in-progress flag is set (step S5004). In step S5000, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the current state is normal. In step S5001, the process of changing the second decorative symbol is executed in the second decorative symbol process (step S705B), and any one of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command for the second decorative symbol is executed. If it is stored, it is determined that the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress. In step S5002, it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol is started when the variation pattern command for the first special symbol is received.

As described above, when starting the change of the first special symbol when the big hit change of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, the change of the first special symbol is forced to be out of force. At this time, the game control microcomputer 560 may send a forced deviation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 to indicate that the variation of the first special symbol is forcibly removed. The microcomputer 200 may execute the big hit preparation display based on the reception of the forcible off designation command. Alternatively, only when the variation display result is determined to be out of force, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a special variation pattern in which the variation display result is not determined other than out of force, and the variation pattern indicating this special variation pattern The command may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the variation pattern command. Good.

If the background symbol variation time timer has timed out (step S951), the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation stop process (step S903) (step S952). ).

53 and 54 are flowcharts showing the background symbol variation stop process (step S903) in the background symbol process. In the background symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 201 first checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S970A). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S974. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S973. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is executed. Without moving to step S974.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S987. In this embodiment, when a small hit symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S986. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, when the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, since the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit game is not yet executed, the stop symbol of the background symbol of step S971 is displayed. The process moves to step S987 without executing the display process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 201 stops the stop symbol (out-of-line symbol, jackpot symbol of the left middle right background symbol being stopped and displayed in the effect display device 9. , Small hit symbol) is controlled (step S971).

When the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S973).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (first jackpot start designation command reception flag, second jackpot start designation command reception flag) is set (step S974). . If any jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S975). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S976). Next, the production control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S978).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not the probability variation state flag, the first KT state flag, or the second KT state flag is set (step S979). If none of the probability variation state flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag is set (that is, the low probability / non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball number counter. (Step S980). That is, since a big hit occurs in the low probability / non-KT state, this is a case where a so-called first hit occurs, and the first prize ball counter is reset.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the current big hit is based on the 16R probability variation big hit (step S981). Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) designating 16R probability variation jackpot is received. If the 16R probability variable big hit is a big hit game that triggers the start of the second KT state, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start the sound output of the second KT music from the speaker 27 ( Step S982).

On the other hand, if it is not the 16R probability variation big hit, if it is set, the CPU 201 for effect control resets the second prize ball number counter (step S983). That is, in this case, if the second KT state is in effect, a big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit occurs and the second KT state ends, so the second prize ball number counter is reset.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904) (step S984).

When the small winning symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S985), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S986).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the small hitting start designation command reception flag is set (step S987). When the small hitting start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hitting start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S988). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set small hitting start command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S989). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table corresponding to the small hit effect (step S990). Next, the production control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S991), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S992).

In addition, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 from the speaker 27 (step S993) and lights the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S994).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (that is, not in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S995 without executing the processes of steps S990 to S994. By executing the determination process of step S989, in this embodiment, the effect during the small hit game is executed only when the small hit game is performed during the second KT state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 A predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening is output, and the special prize opening lamp 24a is turned on.

In this embodiment, a case where a predetermined opening sound is output and the special prize opening lamp 24a is turned on when a small hit is made during the second KT state is shown. I can't. For example, only one of the output of a predetermined opening sound and the lighting display of the special prize opening lamp 24a may be executed. Further, for example, even in the second KT state, it may be configured not to execute either the output of the predetermined opening sound and the lighting display of the special prize opening lamp 24a. Alternatively, it may be configured not to execute the middle hit processing itself.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hitting middle processing (step S908) (step S995).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S971 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S972 and N in step S985), the effect control CPU 201 selects the background symbol. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) (step S996).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S907) in the background symbol process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step S9000). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all rounds of the jackpot game are completed in the post-round processing (see step S906). Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S9001).

When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S9001), the production control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9002), and the production device (production display device 9) according to the contents of the process data n. , The speaker 27 and the like) are controlled (step S9003). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9004), and switches the process data if the process timer has timed out (step S9005). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S9006).

If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S9001), the production control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be ended this time is based on the 6R probability variable big hit or the 2R probability variable big hit (step S9007). ). Whether 6R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit is determined, for example, is a display result designation command (display result 3 designation command) for designating 6R probability variation big hit or a display result designation command (display result 5) for designating 2R probability variation big hit. This can be determined by checking whether or not a specified command is received. If it is 6R probability variable big hit or 2R probability variable big hit (that is, if the high probability state / first KT state is reached after the big hit game is finished), the effect control CPU 201 is in the effect display device 9 if not displayed. Based on the first prize ball number counter, a control for starting display of the prize ball number display during consecutive times is performed (step S9008). In step S9008, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start display of character display such as “during normal rush” on the effect display device 9.

If neither the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is found, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be finished this time is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot (step S9009). Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) designating 16R probability variation jackpot is received. If it is a 16R probability variable big hit (that is, if it is a high probability state / second KT state after the big hit game is finished), the effect display CPU 201 will display the second prize ball on the effect display device 9 if not displayed. Based on the number counter, control for starting the display of the special rush in-game ball number display is performed (step S9010). In step S9010, the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start display of character display such as “during special rush” on the effect display device 9.

In FIG. 55, although illustration is omitted, if the big hit game to be ended this time is based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit (that is, the low probability state / first KT state is reached after the big hit game ends). If so, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying character display such as “chance time”.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) (step S9011).

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the middle hit process (step S908) in the background symbol process. In the small hitting process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S9201). When the small hitting end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hitting end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9202). Then, according to the contents of the process data n, processing for controlling the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) is executed (step S9203). That is, the performance corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

However, as already described, in this embodiment, when the second KT state is not being established, the process table corresponding to the effect during the small hit is not set in the first place (see step S989), so the small hit end designation command is received. Even if it is not, the production corresponding to the small hit game is not executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9206).

When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 ends the presentation corresponding to the small hit game, and step S9207 is performed. Migrate to Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) (step S9207).

FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 are explanatory views showing display examples of instruction notification in the present embodiment. The display example shown in FIG. 57 shows a display example of an instruction notification in the case of a big hit based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol. For example, first, the background symbol corresponding to the first decorative symbol is variably displayed as shown in FIG. 57 (1), and the background symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol as shown in FIG. 57 (2). Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (3), the first normal instruction notification 55A is performed. The first normal instruction notification 55A at this time is performed by displaying an image including the characters “right-handed” and a right arrow. Then, when 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operation gate 17, the second normal instruction notification 55B is performed as shown in FIG. 57 (4).

At this time, the second normal instruction notification 55B includes the characters “Aim at the gate” and an image showing the game ball passing through the operation gate 17 (the square area through which the game ball passes indicates the operation gate 17). , And a square area above it indicates the gate 32).

The display example shown in FIG. 58 shows a display example of an instruction notification when a big hit is made based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (1), the first demo display is performed because the first special symbol is not changed in spite of being in the normal state, and the big hit fluctuation of the second decorative symbol is performed. Has been done. When the change of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), the big hit preparation in-progress display is performed and the preparation in-progress display flag is set, and then in FIG. 58 (3). As shown, the variation of the second special symbol ends with the big hit symbol. At this time, since the ready display flag is set, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (4), and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17. In addition, the second normal instruction notification 56B is performed as shown in FIG. At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A and the second normal instruction notification 56B may be displayed separately in parallel, or only the second normal instruction notification 56B is displayed without displaying the first normal instruction notification 56A. May be.

At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed by displaying an image including the characters “right-handed” and a right arrow, and the second normal instruction notification 56B is activated with the characters “Aim at the gate”. By displaying an image showing a game ball passing through the gate 17 (the square area through which the game ball passes shows the operating gate 17 and the square area above it shows the gate 32). Done.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58 (6), when the change of the second special symbol is completed in the big hit symbol without the change of the first special symbol, the first reduction is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (7). When the instruction notification 56C is performed and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operation gate 17, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (8).

The first reduction instruction notification 56C at this time is performed by displaying only an image indicating the characters “right-handed”. In addition, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed by displaying only an image indicating the characters “Aim at the gate”.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, the big hit preparation is displayed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed. When the operation is not performed, the execution of the big hit preparation display is restricted (not executed).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit variation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, when the variation of the first special symbol is performed, the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification are performed. When the first special symbol is not changed, the first reduction instruction notification and the second reduction instruction notification having lower visibility than the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification are performed.

FIG. 59 is a timing chart when the big hit gaming state is ended and controlled to the first KT state. The timing chart shown in FIG. 59 shows whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled, whether or not the first KT flag is set, whether or not the normal symbol variation is executed, whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened, and whether or not the second special symbol is varied. , And whether or not the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened at each timing.

For example, while controlled in the big hit gaming state (before timing T0 in FIG. 59), the normal symbol variation time is 1.0 second, the normal symbol variation stop time is 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol is hit. In this case, 2.6 seconds is set as the time before the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened, and 0.2 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 while being controlled in the big hit gaming state is 1.0 seconds which is the variation time of the normal symbol, 0.2 seconds which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol, This is 3.8 seconds, which is 2.6 seconds, which is the time before the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened. Note that, while being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the change of the special symbol and the opening control of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 are not performed.

While controlled to the first KT state (after timing T0 in FIG. 59), the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.2 seconds, the normal symbol fluctuation stop time is 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol hits. In this case, 0.1 seconds is set as the time before the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened, and 5.5 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 while being controlled to the big hit gaming state is 0.2 seconds which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, 0.2 seconds which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol, It is 0.5 seconds obtained by adding 0.1 seconds, which is the time before the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened. In addition, the first second symbol change time after the control to the first KT state is 7.0 seconds, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds at the time of the small hit, and the first KT state is 0.8 seconds. 1.0 seconds (assuming that the second reserved memory number ≧ 1) is set as the second special symbol variation time after the second control.

At this time, the variation time (7) of the second special symbol for the first time after being controlled to the first KT state rather than the closing period (3.8 seconds) of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 while being controlled to the big hit gaming state. .0 seconds) is longer. For example, it is assumed that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed for a maximum of 2.6 seconds when the waiting before the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened immediately before the timing T0. If the variation time of the second special symbol for the first time after being controlled to the first KT state is too short, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to the open state while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, It is conceivable that a game ball wins the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 despite being in the first KT state. Therefore, the variation time of the second special symbol is increased so that the special variable winning ball device 22 is not controlled to be opened while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of executing a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball), and a predetermined path among the downflow paths through which the game medium flows down. (In this example, it is provided on the right side of the game area 7), a specific area (in this example, the operation gate 17) through which game media can pass, and a predetermined condition (in this example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) Can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (in this example, a big hit gaming state) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, in the game control microcomputer 560) When the result of step S2501 is Y, the portion in which steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed), which is advantageous to the player and is different from the advantageous state (in this example, a small hit game state) ) (In this example, the part that executes steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560), and in a special state (KT in this example, KT) that is controlled more frequently than the normal state. (In this example, the part for executing steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560) and the predetermined route is established based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A predetermined promotion notification (in this example, a first instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium is executed, and a game to a specific area is performed after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the execution of the predetermined promotion notification. Specific promotion notification (in this example, second instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the medium can be executed (in this example, production Step in patronage microcomputer 200 S4404, S4405, S4604, portions for performing the S4605) was decided. Thereby, the opportunity to control to an advantageous state can be alert | reported appropriately, suppressing the complexity of an effect.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-202287, it is possible to control a state where it is easier to make a small hit than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stop display of a big hit symbol indicating that a big hit is achieved) is established. After that, a gaming machine is described that controls to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) when a game medium passes through a specific area, and the gaming machine appropriately notifies the opportunity to control to the advantageous state However, there is a risk that the production becomes complicated if a notification is made to prompt the player to launch the game medium every time the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify the trigger for controlling to the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

For example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol after the KT state is ended and the normal state is entered, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is long. It is assumed that the player leaves the seat for reasons such as a break without waiting for the end of the fluctuation. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to control not to enter the big hit gaming state during the break by appropriately informing the opportunity to control the big hit gaming state.

Unlike the above-described gaming machines, there is a gaming machine configured to control the big hit gaming state on condition that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the operating gate 17. The player waits until the big hit gaming state is started (until the big winning opening is released) for the purpose of suppressing the useless hitting of the game ball, and then launches the game ball. May be performed. In such a game machine that shifts to the big hit game state on condition that the game ball passes through the operating gate 17, such a player can play the game ball until the big hit game state is started after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. There is a case of trying to wait for launch, in which case the big hit gaming state will not be started. Therefore, by adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify such a player of the opportunity to control the big hit gaming state.

Further, specific examples of the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification are not limited to those described above. Specifically, an effect using an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a light emitting member such as the speaker 27, the game effect lamp 9, or a decoration LED) may be used as the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification. Moreover, it is good also as performing the effect using several effect members as predetermined promotion alerting | reporting and specific promotion alerting | reporting. Further, the effect members used as the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification may be different from each other. For example, the game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in the predetermined promotion notification, and a predetermined screen may be displayed on the effect display device 9 in the specific promotion notification.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal (in this example, big hit signal 1 and big hit signal 2) that can be specified to be controlled in the advantageous state (in this example, game control) In step S2015X and the second special symbol stop process in the microcomputer 560, an advantageous state signal can be externally output based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, The game control microcomputer 560 executes step S2015X before executing step S2501 in the first special symbol stop process and the second special symbol stop process. Thereby, it is possible to notify a game store clerk that an unmanned gaming machine with no player is in an advantageous state, and the initialization of the gaming machine can be promoted.

Although explanation is omitted in this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is established when the gaming machine is turned on, it may be possible to notify that (in this example, game control). The microcomputer 560 waits for the passing of the game ball to the operation gate 17 when the power is turned off before the game ball passes the operation gate 17 after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. (In this example, the special symbol process flag value “8” corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process is backed up), and when the information was backed up at power-on, A predetermined command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200. When the production control microcomputer 200 receives the predetermined command, the first instruction notification, the second instruction notification, Others may be informed of the establishment of a predetermined condition by executing an effect that may be executed only when the power is turned on). Thereby, the opportunity to control to an advantageous state can be alert | reported appropriately.

Although the description is omitted in this embodiment, the specific promotion notification may be executed in a different manner depending on the situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the production control microcomputer 200 is generated). The second instruction notification may be executed in a different manner depending on the type of jackpot to be played and the gaming state). Thereby, the opportunity which controls to an advantageous state can be alert | reported appropriately according to a condition.

Specifically, when a variation is made using a variation pattern dedicated to jackpots, a battle effect is shown where the teammates and enemy characters confront each other as an effect during the variation, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed before the victory or defeat of the confrontation is shown. At the same time, “Aim for the gate” is displayed, and in the subsequent big hit gaming state, the battle effect is continued as a big hit effect (that is, the variation effect and the big hit effect are a series of battle effects). Good. At that time, if it is an advantageous type of big hit (for example, a big hit with a large number of rounds, a big hit with a long open period of the big prize, a big hit that shifts to a probable change state, a big hit that shifts to the KT state), it wins the battle If it is a big hit of an unfavorable type (for example, a big hit with a small number of rounds, a big hit with a short open period of the big prize opening, a big hit that does not shift to the probability variation state, a big hit that does not shift to the KT state) Also good.

Although explanation is omitted in this embodiment, variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example) are executed. It is possible (in this example, the part for executing steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the first decorative symbol) The second display identification information (in this example, the second decoration) corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) is possible. The display result can be derived and displayed (in this example, the part for executing steps S705A and S705B in the production control microcomputer 200), and in the normal state, the display result can be derived and displayed. It is possible to make the variable display of the effect identification information difficult to view and to make the display result of the variable display of the second effect identification information easy to view (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 is in a normal state. While changing the second special symbol, the second decorative symbol may be erased, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed when the second special symbol is stopped. Thereby, attention can be paid to the variable display of the first identification information in the normal state.

Further, in the normal state, the display result of the variation of the second decorative symbol and the display related to the second reserved memory number may be made difficult to visually recognize.

In addition, being difficult to visually recognize is a concept including being invisible and being difficult to visually recognize.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine is capable of executing a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball), and the game medium can pass through a specific area ( In this example, the operation gate 17), variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) can be executed. In addition, the variable display of the other of the first identification information and the second identification information can be executed during the execution of the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information (in this example, the game control micro By executing steps S26A and S26B in the computer 560, the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display can be executed in parallel, and a predetermined condition (in this example, the big hit symbol is Stop display Can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (in this example, a big hit gaming state) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, in the game control microcomputer 560) In the case of Y in step S2501, the portion that executes steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357) is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state. (In this example, the part for executing steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560) can be controlled to a special state (in this example, the KT state) with a higher frequency of control to a predetermined state than the normal state. Yes (in this example, steps S2208A, S2211A in the game control microcomputer 560, 2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B), and based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been established, it is possible to execute a specific promotion notification (in this example, a second instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium to the specific area (In this example, the portion of the production control microcomputer 200 that executes steps S4604 and S4605) and the absence condition corresponding to the absence of the player (in this example, the first state despite being in the normal state) When the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information when the special symbol variation is not satisfied), the specific promotion notification is executed in a predetermined manner (in this example, the first 2) When the absence condition is satisfied, based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information, The specific promotion notification is executed in a special mode having lower visibility than the fixed mode (in this example, the second reduction instruction notification is performed). Thereby, taking into consideration that the absence condition is established, it is possible to appropriately perform the specific promotion notification for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific area.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-202287, it is possible to control a state where it is easier to make a small hit than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stop display of a big hit symbol indicating that a big hit is achieved) is established. After that, there is described a gaming machine that controls to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) when the gaming medium passes through the specific area, but the gaming machine promotes the launch of the gaming medium to the specific area There is a possibility that the specific promotion notification cannot be performed appropriately. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately perform the specific promotion notification that promotes the launch of the game medium to the specific area in consideration of the absence condition.

For example, if the gaming machine performs the second normal instruction notification (notification in the entire display area of the effect display device 9) even when the absence condition is satisfied (when there is no player), the game is finally performed. When the last player who has played the game has already finished the game, the other player is temporarily away from the player and plays the game on the gaming machine. May develop into trouble, and a new player may be discouraged from playing a game on the gaming machine. Therefore, as with the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, by performing specific promotion notification in a manner according to the situation, it is possible to eliminate the sense of distance from the new player, and promote the operation of the gaming machine be able to.

In addition, there is a person who wants to enjoy the advantageous situation (hit game state) generated based on the game by the player who has finished the game, and if such an action is performed, the game is not fair. It becomes. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied (when there is no player), a special aspect with lower visibility than when the absence condition is not satisfied (when there is a player) By executing the specific promotion notification at, it is difficult to recognize that it is a stage before an advantageous situation and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

In the present embodiment, the fact that the change of the first special symbol is not executed in spite of the normal state is defined as the “absence condition” (exactly, the change of the first special symbol is started in the normal state). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the player is not touching the hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5, or any area (the operation gate 17, the gate 32, the first start winning port 13, the second starting winning port 14, the big winning port, The “absence condition” may be that the passage of the game ball to the special winning opening 24) is not detected for a predetermined period. Further, for example, the “absence condition” may be that no start prize is generated until a predetermined period (for example, 2 minutes) elapses after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command.

Moreover, according to this embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied, the absence effect (in this example) indicates that the absence condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the specific promotion notification is performed in a predetermined mode. The first demonstration display) can be executed (in this example, step S4716 in the production control microcomputer 200 is executed). Thereby, a player's game can be promoted appropriately.

Although description is omitted in the present embodiment, it is controlled to a power saving state that reduces power consumption on condition that a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed since the start of the demonstration display. It may be. In the power saving state, the sound output from the speaker 27 is reduced, the brightness of the image display device 5 is decreased, or the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED is decreased. The power is reduced.

Further, according to this embodiment, the execution of the effect is controlled based on the game control means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game and the information transmitted from the game control means. Production control means (in this example, production control microcomputer 200), and the game control means includes first absence information (in this example) indicating whether or not an absence condition is established based on the first identification information. , A first customer waiting demonstration display designation command) and second absence information (in this example, a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command) indicating whether or not an absence condition is established based on the second identification information. It is assumed that transmission is possible (in this example, a part for executing steps S51A and S51B in the game control microcomputer 560). Thereby, the suitable production according to the situation can be executed.

In the present embodiment, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command indicating whether or not the absence condition is established based on the first special symbol and the absence condition is established based on the second special symbol. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command indicating whether or not is provided separately, but is not limited to this, a command indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first special symbol, A common command may be provided as a command indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the second special symbol. For example, when the first special symbol is not changed in the normal state and the first special symbol is not changed (regardless of whether or not the second special symbol is changed or whether or not the second reserved memory is present). When the second special symbol is not changed in the state where the second reserved memory is not stored in the KT state (the presence or absence of the first special symbol change or the first reserved memory is transmitted). The common command may be transmitted regardless of the presence or absence.

Further, according to this embodiment, the game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and the effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on the information transmitted from the game control means, the game control means, Special state control information (in this example, background designation command) indicating whether or not the special state is controlled, and absence information (in this example, first customer waiting demonstration display) indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied (In this example, the part for executing steps S51A, S51B, S60A, and S60B in the game control microcomputer 560) can be transmitted. Based on the state control information and the absence information, it is possible to execute an absence effect indicating that the absence condition is satisfied (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 20). At the step S4502, and the executable portion) that the plying demonstration display on the basis of the background specified command and plying demonstration display instruction command. Thereby, the suitable production according to the situation can be executed.

Moreover, according to this embodiment, the hold memory which can memorize | store the information which shows whether it controls to an advantageous state based on the variable display of 2nd identification information as a hold memory (this example 2nd hold memory). Means (in this example, a second reserved storage buffer), and can perform an advantageous notification effect (in this example, a big hit effect) indicating that the control is in an advantageous state (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200). The step of executing steps S904 to S907 in FIG. 5), during the variable display of the first identification information controlled to the advantageous state, the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold storage indicating the control to the advantageous state is started In this case, the advantageous notification effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is not executed (in this example, when the game control microcomputer 560 is Y in step S64BB) By not performing the processing after step S65B, even if the big hit random number is stored as the second reserved memory, the fluctuation with respect to the second reserved memory is forcibly removed, and the production control microcomputer 200 is (2) Don't execute jackpot effect on identification information). Thereby, the suitable production according to the situation can be executed.

In addition, as described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of executing a game, and includes variable display and second identification information of first identification information (first special symbol in this example). (In this example, variable display of the second special symbol) can be performed, and the first identification information and the second identification information are displayed during the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information. The other variable display can be executed (in this example, by executing steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel. The specific display result (in this example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as one of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Based Can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (in this example, a big hit gaming state) (in this example, the part for executing steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 in the game control microcomputer 560). The player is advantageous and advantageous based on the fact that a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as either one of the variable display of the identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state) (in this example, the portion for executing steps S358 to S360 in the gaming control microcomputer 560), and controlled to a predetermined state rather than the normal state Can be controlled to a special state (in this example, the KT state) with an increased frequency (in this example, a game control micro computer). The data 560 can execute a step S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B, and a notification effect (in this example, a big hit preparation display) that notifies that a predetermined condition is satisfied (this book). In the example, the step of executing step S5003 in the production control microcomputer 200) When the absence condition corresponding to the absence of the player in the normal state is not satisfied, the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the above, the notification effect can be executed (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 executes S5003 when Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, and Y in S5002). Variable of second identification information when absence condition is satisfied The execution of the notification effect is limited based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 executes S5003 when Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, and N in S5002). do not do). Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied in consideration of the absence condition being satisfied.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-202287, it is possible to control a state where it is easier to make a small hit than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stop display of a big hit symbol indicating that a big hit is achieved) is established. After that, a gaming machine is described that controls to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) when a game medium passes through a specific area, but the gaming machine appropriately notifies that a predetermined condition is satisfied. There was a possibility that it could not be done. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied in consideration of the absence condition being satisfied.

“Restrict execution” is executed in a manner that is not executed as in the present embodiment or is difficult to recognize (for example, a notification effect is executed using an image smaller than normal or an image with low density). Or performing a notification effect of outputting sound at a volume lower than normal).

Further, specific examples of the notification effect are not limited to those described above. Specifically, an effect using an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a light emitting member such as the speaker 27, the game effect lamp 9, or a decoration LED) may be used as the notification effect. In addition, an effect using a plurality of effect members may be performed as a notification effect.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and a gaming medium (in this example, A variable starter (in this example) that can be changed between an entry advantageous state (in this example, an open state) in which a game ball can enter (in this example, an open state) and an entry disadvantageous state (in this example, in a closed state) in which a game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. A variable winning ball device 15) and a predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) that is provided downstream of the variable starting device and can change between an entry advantageous state and an entry disadvantage state, The variable starter can be controlled to change into the entry advantageous state or the entry disadvantageous state (in this example, the part for executing step S5103 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) ) Variable table And the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) can be executed based on the fact that the game medium has entered the variable starter (in this example, for game control) A portion of the microcomputer 560 that executes steps S26A and S26B), a hold storage means (in this example, the second hold memory) that can store information relating to variable display of the second identification information as a hold storage (in this example, the second hold memory). Based on the fact that the display result of one of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information is a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol). It is possible to control the predetermined variable device to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state) that changes to the entry advantageous state (in this example, the scan in the game control microcomputer 560). (Parts for executing steps S358 to S360) can be controlled to a special state (in this example, the KT state) that is controlled more frequently than the normal state (in this example, the KT state). As a special state, the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the degree of advantage over the first special state Can be controlled to a high second special state (in this example, high probability / second KT state), and when controlled to the advantageous state, in a longer specific period than when controlled to the first special state The variable starting device can be controlled to change into the entry disadvantageous state (in this example, step S26 in the game control microcomputer 560). By executing C, as shown in FIG. 59, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the big hit gaming state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is set to 0.5 seconds in the first KT state. As a variable display of the first second identification information under the control of the first special state, the variable display of the first period is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means. (In this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the first variation, the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13D or FIG. 14G is used to represent the variation pattern. By deciding, it is possible to change the second special symbol over 7.0 seconds regardless of the number of reserved memories), and as a variable display of the second identification information after the second time under the control of the first special state , When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means in one special state is a predetermined number or more, variable display in the second period shorter than the first period can be executed (in this example, a microcomputer for game control) 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the second and subsequent fluctuations, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 13E or FIG. If so, the variation of the second special symbol can be executed for 1.0 second (controlled by the first KT state and shorter than the first variation time of 7.0 seconds). Thereby, the interest in a special state can be improved.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 includes a variable starter (attacker) that can change between an entry advantageous state in which a game medium can enter and an entry disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or difficult to enter. A gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an entry advantageous state in a state, and is controllable to a special state with an increased frequency of being controlled to a small hit gaming state, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an entry disadvantageous state There is described a gaming machine in which the game ball flowing down on the predetermined variable device is sometimes delayed to make it easier for a game medium to enter the predetermined variable device in the small hit game state, and the degree of advantage in the special state is increased. However, in the gaming machine, the gameability in a special state is monotonous and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in the special state.

For example, in this embodiment, in the case of being controlled to the first KT state, although the frequency of small hits is increased, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is actually increased to increase the inside of the special variable winning ball device 22. The special winning opening 24 is rarely set to win, but in the state immediately after shifting to the low probability / first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22 has a certain amount on the bottom member. Game balls may have accumulated, and if the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is immediately controlled to be in an open state, a considerable number of gaming balls may win the special winning opening 24. . Therefore, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, it accumulates on the bottom surface member of the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22 before shifting to the first KT state. More than expected in the first KT state by allowing the special variable winning ball device 22 to be in an open state after a sufficient amount of time has passed before all the game balls fall to enable the special winning opening 24 to be awarded. This prevents the occurrence of a prize ball.

In addition, thereby, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided, a game ball to a predetermined variable device (special variable winning ball device 22) in some special states (first KT state) Can be prevented from entering. Accordingly, the special state (the first KT state) can be set to a special state with a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to realize different degrees of advantage of the plurality of special states.

Further, according to this embodiment, the variable display of the first second identification information controlled in the first special state is the first that is longer than the specific period regardless of the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means. Variable display for one period can be executed (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the first variation, the variation pattern shown in FIG. 13D or FIG. 14G) By determining the variation pattern using the table, the second special symbol is displayed for 7.0 seconds (a time longer than the closing time 3.8 seconds of the variable winning ball device 15 in the big hit gaming state) regardless of the number of reserved memories. As the variable display of the second identification information for the second and subsequent times under the control of the first special state, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means in the first special state is a predetermined number. If it is above, the variable display in the second period shorter than the specific period can be executed (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the second and subsequent variations, FIG. E) or by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 14 (H), if the second reserved memory number is 1 or more, 1.0 second (of the variable winning ball device 15 in the big hit gaming state) The variation of the second special symbol can be carried out over a period of time shorter than 3.8 seconds). Thereby, the interest in a special state can be improved.

In addition, although explanation is omitted in this embodiment, in the case of being controlled to the second special state, it is suspended regardless of how many times the second identification information is displayed after being controlled to the second special state. The variable display of the second identification information may be executed at different fluctuation times based on the number of reserved storages stored in the storage means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is the second KT state in the second KT state. 2 When changing the special symbol, regardless of the number of changes executed after being controlled to the second KT state, if the second reserved memory number is 1 or more, the second special symbol is changed over 1 second. If the second reserved memory number is 0, the second special symbol may be changed over 3 seconds). Thereby, the interest in a special state can be improved.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the identification information (in this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are variably displayed, and the advantageous state (in this example) advantageous to the player Then, it is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state), and has a special area (gate 32 in this example) through which a game medium (game ball in this example) can pass and an entry advantage into which the game medium can enter A variable starter (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can change between a state (in this example, an open state) and an entry disadvantageous state (in this example, a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter; A predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) provided on the downstream side of the variable starter and capable of changing between an entry advantageous state and an entry disadvantageous state, and the game medium has passed through the special area. Based on the normal identification information (normal symbol in this example) The variable display can be executed (in this example, the part for executing steps S5100 to S5102 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the variable starting device can be changed to the entry advantageous state based on the variable display of the normal identification information. It is possible (in this example, the part for executing step S5103 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the variable display of the identification information can be executed based on the entry of the game medium into the variable starter (in this example, , The part for executing step S26B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the predetermined variable device is entered based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol). It can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state) that changes to an advantageous state (this book Then, it is possible to control to the special state (in this example, the KT state) in which the frequency of the control to the predetermined state is increased (in this example, the game state). The first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the first special state as a special state in steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B in the control microcomputer 560 Can be controlled to the second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example) having a higher degree of advantage than the special region in the first special state when the variable identification information is not variably displayed. The variable starter is controlled so that the game medium that has passed through can enter the variable starter (in this example, the game ball The minimum time required for the player to pass through the gate 32 and reach the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is 0.6 seconds. In the first KT state, the variable winning is 0.5 seconds after the game ball passes through the gate 32. By controlling the ball device 15 to the open state, when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state, the one game ball is variable as it is. It is possible to win the winning ball apparatus 15). Thereby, the interest in a special state can be improved.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 includes a variable starter (attacker) that can change between an entry advantageous state in which a game medium can enter and an entry disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or difficult to enter. A gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an entry advantageous state in a state, and is controllable to a special state with an increased frequency of being controlled to a small hit gaming state, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an entry disadvantageous state There is described a gaming machine in which the game ball flowing down on the predetermined variable device is sometimes delayed to make it easier for a game medium to enter the predetermined variable device in the small hit game state, and the degree of advantage in the special state is increased. However, in the gaming machine, the gameability in a special state is monotonous and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in the special state.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, in the first KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol with a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state where the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and the ordinary symbol is not retained. This is because the device 15 is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture the timing of the second special symbol variation stop timing (when the small symbol hits, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 Until the game ball that has passed through reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, the variable winning ball device 15 is not released, and the special winning opening 24 can be won). On the other hand, in this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is released before the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 by shortening the normal symbol variation time. Since it is set so as to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

In addition, thereby, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided, a game ball to a predetermined variable device (special variable winning ball device 22) in some special states (first KT state) Can be prevented from entering. Accordingly, the special state (the first KT state) can be set to a special state with a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to realize different degrees of advantage of the plurality of special states.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the second special state, the variable starter is controlled to be in an entry disadvantage state for a longer period than in the first special state (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is As shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be closed for 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled in the second KT state as shown in FIG. 15 (2). 3. Control the variable starter so that it is difficult for a game medium that has passed through the special area to enter the variable starter when the variable identification information is not displayed in a normal state. (In this example, the minimum required time from the game ball passing through the gate 32 until reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.6 seconds, and the time for the game ball to flow down on the variable winning ball device 15 Is 0.5 seconds, 2nd KT Since the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be opened when one game ball passes the gate 32 in the second KT state. The one game ball is difficult to win the variable winning ball apparatus 15 as it is). Thereby, it is possible to easily give a profit to the player in the second special state.

In the present embodiment, the second KT state is configured to have a longer normal symbol variation time than the first KT state, so that the second KT state has a variable prize for a longer period than the first KT state. Although the ball device 15 is controlled to be closed, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed in the second KT state over a longer period than the first KT state by other control. May be realized.

For example, by configuring the normal symbol determination time longer in the second KT state than in the first KT state, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed over a period longer in the second KT state than in the first KT state. Control to the state may be realized.

In addition, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit in the second KT state than in the first KT state ( With the configuration in which the normal electric accessory opening time shown in FIG. 38 is long, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be closed in the second KT state over a longer period than the first KT state. May be.

In addition, a combination of adjustment of a plurality of times among the above-described normal symbol variation time, normal symbol determination time, and waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be opened when the normal symbol is a winning combination. By performing the control, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be controlled to be closed in the second KT state over a longer period than the first KT state.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the normal state, the variable starter is controlled to be in the entry disadvantageous state for a period longer than that in the first special state (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is configured as shown in FIG. As shown in (1), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be closed for 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is maintained for 3.8 seconds in the normal state as in the second KT state. The variable starting device is controlled so that it is difficult for a game medium that has passed through the special area to enter the variable starting device when the variable display of the normal identification information is not performed (in this example, a game) The shortest time required for the ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is 0.6 seconds, and the time for the game ball to flow down the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.5 seconds. Yes, variable winning ball in normal condition Since the device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds, when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the normal state, when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be opened, the one game The ball is difficult to win the variable winning ball apparatus 15 as it is). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being launched (right-handed) aiming at the special area in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, the variable winning ball apparatus in the normal state is longer than the first KT state by adopting a configuration in which the normal symbol has a longer variation time than the first KT state. 15 has been realized to be controlled to the closed state, but by other control, it is possible to control the variable winning ball apparatus 15 to the closed state in the normal state over a period longer than the first KT state. May be.

For example, by setting the normal symbol in the normal state longer than the first KT state, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed for a longer period in the normal state than in the first KT state. Control may be realized.

Also, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, the waiting time until the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit in the normal state than in the first KT state (see FIG. 38), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be closed in the normal state over a period longer than that in the first KT state. Also good.

In addition, a combination of the above-described adjustment of a plurality of times of the normal symbol variation time, the normal symbol determination time, and the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be opened when the normal symbol is a winning combination. By performing the above, it may be realized that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be closed over a longer period in the normal state than in the first KT state.

In the present embodiment, the small hit game state cannot be controlled based on the variation of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the small bonus symbol. It is good also as a structure which can be controlled to a small hit game state based on it. In that case, when the variation of the second special symbol is started while the small hit variation of the first special symbol is performed, the second special symbol may be forcibly set to be off.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to be a big hit or a small hit (not a normal loss) except for a case where it is forcibly lost. The present invention is not limited to this, and even when the second special symbol is changed, it may be normal. For example, when the small hit ratio is halved and the small hit ratio is continuous, the second small hit fluctuation without the big hit fluctuation or the deviation fluctuation after the first small hit fluctuation is performed. Special effects that are not executed when the small hits are not continuous (when the next fluctuation of the small hits is a big hit or a loss) (for example, an effect that notifies that the small hits are continuous) May be executed.

In addition, as described above, according to this embodiment, the entry advantageous state (open state in this example) in which a game medium (game ball in this example) can enter and the game medium cannot enter or are difficult to enter. A variable starting device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can be changed to a different entry disadvantageous state (closed state in this example) and an entry advantageous state and an entry disadvantageous state provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device And a predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) that can be changed to any one of the plurality of opening patterns, and the variable starting device can be controlled (see FIG. 15). . Moreover, variable display can be executed based on the game medium entering the variable starter, and the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol) is the predetermined display result. It can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state) that changes the variable device to the entry advantageous state, and can be controlled to a special state (in this example, the KT state) that is frequently controlled to the predetermined state. It is. Also, as the special state, the first special state (in this example, high probability / first KT state) and the second special state (in this example, high probability / second KT state) having a different degree of advantage. ) And can be controlled. The variable starting device can be controlled by the specific opening pattern at different rates depending on whether it is controlled to the first special state or the second special state (in this example, in the first KT state). As shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is held for 0.2 seconds. Open). Therefore, the monotony of the game property in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game when controlling to the special state can be improved.

In this embodiment, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is always opened for 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is always opened for 0.2 seconds in the second KT state. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be configured to be opened for 0.2 seconds with a low probability even in the first KT state, or the variable winning ball apparatus 15 with a low probability of 5 even in the second KT state. It may be configured to open for 5 seconds. It suffices that at least the second KT state is configured such that the ratio of opening the variable winning ball device 15 by a short circuit becomes higher.

In addition, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control in a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, 16R accuracy variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, 6R normal big hit, 2R positive variation big hit, 2R normal big hit), the second special state Has a higher advantage than the first special state (in this example, in the first KT state, it is rare that a game ball wins the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game, whereas in the second KT state Then, a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24 by a small hit game). Further, it is possible to control to the second special state corresponding to the kind of advantageous state (in this example, after the big hit game based on the 16R probability variation big hit, the high probability / the second KT state is shifted). Therefore, by associating the types of advantageous states with the types of special states, attention can be paid to which type of advantageous state is achieved.

Further, different effects may be executed during the jackpot game depending on the type of jackpot. With such a configuration, attention can be paid to which effect is executed during the big hit game.

Further, according to this embodiment, at least a part of the effects is taken over in the period controlled in the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state) and the period controlled in the second special state. (In this example, the sound output of the second KT music starts at the start of the big hit game based on the 16R probability variation big hit, and the sound output of the second KT music continues until the second KT state ends. ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by impressing the player more strongly that it is controlled to the second special state.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the sound output of a music piece is taken over from the big hit game based on the 16R probability variation big hit that becomes the trigger of the second KT state to the subsequent second KT state is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that a moving image is taken over, a round number display is taken over, and a prize ball number display is taken over.

Further, according to this embodiment, provided with a specific variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 20) that is provided on the upstream side of the variable starting device and can change between an entry advantageous state and an entry disadvantageous state, It can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state) in which the specific variable device is changed to the entry advantageous state. In addition, it is determined whether or not the variable starter is controlled to be in the entry advantageous state (in this example, whether or not it is per common figure), and the variable starter is controlled to be in the entry advantageous state at the same rate regardless of the state. (In this example, in the normal symbol process (step S26C), whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether the non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state) Regardless of whether it is a big hit gaming state or not, it is determined whether or not to hit the ordinary figure with the same probability). Therefore, the entry of the game medium to the specific variable device can be prevented from being influenced by the variable starter that can be controlled to the entry advantageous state even during the advantageous state, so that the digestion period of the advantageous state can be shortened. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

Further, according to this embodiment, after controlling to the advantageous state, it can be controlled to the special state (in this example, the probability variation state), and is the same as the first special state (in this example, high probability / first KT state). Controllable to the third special state (low probability / first KT state in this example) where the open pattern is selected by percentage and the variable starter is controlled and variable display pattern is selected by different percentage and variable display is executed It is. Then, when it is not controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state, it can be controlled to the third special state (in this example, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit, the low probability / first KT State). Therefore, when it is not controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to give an opportunity to discourage the player from ending the game.

According to this embodiment, the variable starting device and the predetermined variable device are provided with the delay means (in this example, the restriction piece 118) for delaying the flow of the game medium. Therefore, by providing the delay means, the flow speed of the game medium is delayed, and in the first special state, the rate of entry of the game medium into the variable starter can be further increased, and in the second special state, the predetermined variable device The rate of entry of game media into can be further increased.

Further, according to this embodiment, variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example) can be performed. In addition, the variable display of the other of the first identification information and the second identification information can be performed during the execution of the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information (in this example, the first special symbol is displayed). ) And the second special symbol can be displayed in parallel. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to control to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state), it is possible to determine a variable display time (in this example, a variable time), and the variable of the second identification information When executing the display, it is possible to determine that the predetermined state is controlled at a higher rate than when executing the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Only if you can decide to win) Then, in the case of being controlled to the special state, it is possible to determine a shorter time as the variable display time of the variable display of the second identification information compared to the case of being controlled to the non-special state (in this example, As shown in FIG. 13 (C), the variation time of the second special symbol is 15 minutes or 5 minutes in the non-KT state, as shown in FIGS. 13 (D) to 14 (I). In the KT state, the variation time of the second special symbol is 1.5 seconds to 2 minutes and 20 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machine controlled to the special state.

In this embodiment, the case where the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, you may comprise so that the fluctuation | variation display of a 1st special symbol and the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol may not be performed simultaneously. In this case, for example, the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display may be executed in the winning order of the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14, You may comprise so that the fluctuation display of any special symbol (for example, 2nd special symbol) may be performed preferentially. When the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be out of place. It is desirable that the euphoria is not too high than necessary.

Further, according to this embodiment, a predetermined area (in this example, the operation gate 17) through which a game medium (in this example, a game ball) can pass is provided, and an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) is achieved. It can be controlled. Then, after a specific display result (a jackpot symbol in this example) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area. Therefore, when the player breaks the game after the end of the special state, it is possible to limit the control to the advantageous state during the break of the player. In particular, in this embodiment, since the variation time of the second special symbol is as long as 15 minutes or 5 minutes in the non-KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed immediately after the low probability / first KT state is finished. If the player has entered a break because of the long-term fluctuation display, even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit game will progress during the break It is possible to limit the situation and prevent a situation in which the player's profit is impaired.

In this embodiment, the operation gate 17 is provided separately from the gate 32. However, the gate 32 and the operation gate 17 may be configured as a common gate.

In addition, the operation gate 17 is not necessarily provided, and when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game may be shifted to the big hit game after the symbol fixed display time has passed.

In addition, according to this embodiment, an advantageous state signal (in this example, big hit signal 1 and big hit signal 2) that can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state can be output externally. Further, when a specific display result (in this example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display, an advantageous state signal can be externally output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the game store clerk that the unmanned gaming machine with no player has become advantageous, and the initialization of the gaming machine can be promoted.

It should be noted that the external output of the advantageous state signal (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) is not necessarily essential, and the advantageous state signal may not be output externally.

Further, according to this embodiment, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result (in this example, the big hit symbol), the game medium is placed in the first area (in this example, the big winning opening). (In this example, a game ball) can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state), and the variable display result becomes a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol). Based on this, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state) in which the game medium can enter the second area (in this example, the special prize opening 24). It is possible to control to a special state (in this example, a KT state) with an increased frequency of control to a predetermined state. As the special state, the first special state (in this example, high probability / first KT state) and the first state The second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example) having a higher advantage than the one special state can be controlled. A special signal (in this example, a special prize opening prize signal) can be externally output in response to the game medium entering the second area. For this reason, it is possible to notify the outside of the entry state of the game medium into the second area, and it is possible to manage an appropriate gaming machine outside the gaming machine.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 32, when the jackpot signal 1 is not output, the winning ball rate (number of winning balls obtained per 100 game balls fired, BA) is BA> 100. In this case, there is a possibility that an act of obtaining a prize ball is illegally performed even though the game is not a big hit game, and it can be determined that the hall management computer side is abnormal. However, even in such a case, if the big hit signal 2 is output and the special winning opening winning signal is output, a winning ball may be obtained in the small hit game in the KT state. , Even if BA> 100, it is not determined as abnormal, and appropriate management from outside the gaming machine can be performed.

Further, according to this embodiment, a common special signal can be externally output between the case of being controlled to the first special state and the case of being controlled to the second special state (in this example, FIG. 32). As shown in FIG. 4, regardless of whether the state is the first KT state or the second KT state, a common special winning award winning signal is externally output). Therefore, it is possible to simplify the external output process on the gaming machine side.

33, as a special signal, as a special signal, a first special signal (in this example, a special prize opening prize signal 1) and a second special signal (in this example, different from the first special signal). , The special winning award winning signal 2) can be output externally, and the first special signal can be output externally when the first special state is controlled and the second special state is controlled. 2 Special signals can be output externally (as shown in FIG. 33, the special winning award winning signal 1 is output externally during the first KT state, and the special winning award winning signal 2 is externally output during the second KT state). You may comprise. With such a configuration, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately managed outside the gaming machine.

For example, in the modification shown in FIG. 33, when the big hit signal 1 is not output and the big hit signal 2 is output, if the special winning opening winning signal 1 is output, the winning ball rate in the first KT state It may be calculated as (BA1), and may be calculated as the winning ball rate (BA2) in the second KT state if the special winning opening winning signal 2 is output. In the second KT state, a corresponding winning ball may be obtained in the small hit game. Therefore, even if BA2> 100, it is not determined that there is an abnormality. Is rare, and therefore, if BA1> 100, it may be determined as abnormal. With such a configuration, appropriate management from outside the gaming machine can be performed.

Further, for example, in the example shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the special winning opening winning signal (special winning opening winning signal 1) even though the jackpot signal 2 is not output (that is, not in the KT state). Or a special prize opening prize signal 2) is output, it may be determined to be abnormal and notified to a game store clerk or the like. In addition, even when the output frequency of the special prize opening winning signal is abnormally high, it may be determined as abnormal and notified to a game store clerk or the like.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, the number of terminals provided on the external output terminal slope is limited (in this example, 10 terminals). Only a special winning opening winning signal indicating that it has been detected is configured to be output, and an external output signal is not output particularly when a winning at a large winning opening is detected. Even in such a configuration, the abnormal state of the gaming machine 1 can be detected to some extent by notifying an external device such as a hall management computer even of the winning status of the special winning opening 24.

Note that the external output of the special signal (in this example, the special winning award winning signal) is not necessarily required, and the special signal may not be output externally.

Further, according to this embodiment, the variable display result is different from the advantageous state (the big hit game state in this example) based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol). It can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state), and can be controlled to a special state (in this example, a KT state) with a high frequency of control to the predetermined state. A special area (in this example, a special winning opening 24) into which a game medium (game ball in this example) can enter in a special state, and the first special state (in this example, high probability / 1KT state) and a second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example), which has a higher advantage than the first special state. Further, an entry effect (in this example, display of a prize ball addition display, output of a winning sound, lighting of a special prize opening lamp 24a) can be executed based on the game medium entering the specific area in the second special state. If the game medium enters the specific area in the first special state, the entry effect is not executed (in this example, even if the game ball wins the special winning opening 24 when not in the second KT state, Display of addition display, output of winning sound, and lighting display of special winning opening lamp 24a are not executed). Therefore, by preventing the entry effect from being executed depending on the irregular game medium entering in the first special state (in this example, rarely won the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state), As a result, the game medium can be emphasized in the specific area in the second special state, and the interest in the game can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production when the special state is controlled.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control to the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state), and as the advantageous state, the first advantageous state (in this example, 6R positive variation big hit, 2R positive variable big hit) It is possible to control to 2 advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation big hit). Further, it can be controlled to the first special state after being controlled to the first advantageous state, and can be controlled to the second special state after being controlled to the second advantageous state (in this example, 6R probability variation big hit and 2R The transition to the high probability / first KT state after the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is completed, and the transition to the high probability / second KT state after the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot is completed). 2 Special effects (in this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT) can be executed over the period controlled to the special state. Therefore, the production effect in the second special state can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, as the entry effect, an addition effect corresponding to the addition of the game value (in this example, display of a prize ball addition display), an effect by sound output corresponding to the entry of the game medium At least one of the effects (in this example, the output of the winning sound) and the effects due to the light emission of the light emitter (in this example, the lighting of the special winning opening lamp 24a) is executed. Therefore, the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state can be emphasized, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It is to be noted that an entry effect (in this example, display of prize ball addition display, output of winning sound, lighting display of special winning opening lamp 24a), and execution of special effect (in this example, sound output of music for the second KT). Is not necessarily required, and any one or both of these effects may not be executed.

In this embodiment, on the side of the production control microcomputer 200, the second decorative symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display corresponding to the second special symbol variable display. Although the case where the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the background symbol are executed is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable symbol of the fourth symbol and a small symbol corresponding to the variable symbol of the second special symbol or the variable symbol of the fourth symbol can be executed. Also good. In this case, the variable display of the 4th symbol may be configured to be displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), or may be configured by lamps or LEDs other than the effect display device 9. Also good.

[Modification] A modification of the above-described embodiment will be described below. In this modified example, mainly an example of a display screen (screen layout) displayed on the effect display device 9 in a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (particularly low probability / first KT state) An example of the display control of the hold display corresponding to the second hold memory when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state will be described. In the following description, the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage may be referred to as a first hold display, and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage may be referred to as a second hold display.

The details will be apparent from the following description. In this modification, unlike the above-described embodiment, the effect display device 9 displays a background symbol (first background shown in FIG. 63) according to the special symbol variation display. The symbol display unit 91a and the background symbol displayed on the second background symbol display unit 92a are variably displayed and are smaller than the background symbol (the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display shown in FIG. 63). The small symbols displayed on the part 92b are variably displayed, and depending on the gaming state, the first hold display (first hold display in the first hold display unit 61 shown in FIG. 63) or the second hold display (FIG. 63 (second hold display in the second hold display section 62 shown in FIG. 63) is displayed (that is, the first and second hold displays are not combined and displayed as in the above-described embodiment), and depending on the gaming state , A first specific display (first feature shown in FIG. The first specific display on the display unit 61a) or the second specific display (second specific display on the second specific display unit 62a shown in FIG. 63) is displayed, and the hold number display corresponding to the first hold memory number (FIG. 63). A first reserved memory number display 71) is displayed. Further, in this modified example, portions different from the above-described embodiment will be mainly described, and the other portions will be described as having the same configuration and processing as those of the above-described embodiment unless otherwise specified. Omitted.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the hold storage display control process (step S707) in the modification. In the hold memory display control process, display control of the first hold display, the second hold display, and the hold number display corresponding to the first hold memory number displayed on the effect display device 9 is performed.

In the on-hold storage display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first effective start winning command has been received (step S7071). Note that whether or not the first valid start winning command has been received depends on whether or not a flag corresponding to the type of the received command (production control command) is set in step S670 shown in FIG. Recognizable.

When the first effective start winning command is received (Y in step S7071), the effect control CPU 201 updates the hold number display corresponding to the first hold memory number (step S7072). Specifically, when receiving the first effective start winning command, the production control CPU 201 increments the first reserved memory number by 1, and when receiving the first variation pattern command, subtracts the first reserved memory number by one, One reserved storage number is stored in, for example, a first reserved number storage buffer. Therefore, when the first effective start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 201 updates and displays the hold number display (first hold memory number display 71) indicating the first hold memory number added by 1. It should be noted that the CPU 201 for effect control indicates the number of holdings indicating the number of first holding memory subtracted by 1 when the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the first holding memory is started (when the first variation pattern command is received). The display (first reserved storage number display 71) is updated and displayed.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in a non-KT state (step S7073). If it is not in a non-KT state (N in step S7073), the process ends and is in a non-KT state. In (Y in step S7073), a hold notice determination process is executed (S7074). Whether or not the state is the non-KT state (or the KT state) can be recognized, for example, depending on the type of the background image currently displayed by the processing in steps S631, S634, S638, and S642 shown in FIG.

In the hold notice determination process in step S7074, any one of a plurality of special modes (for example, “blue”, “green”, “red”) different from the normal mode (for example, “white”) is displayed as the first hold display. It is determined whether or not to hold a change notice, and if so, how to change to which special mode (that is, the content of the change). Specifically, when the CPU 201 for effect control receives the first effective start winning command from the game control microcomputer 560, it also receives the first winning determination result command. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560, in the first start port switch passing process, is extracted based on a valid start winning and stored in the first holding storage buffer, the big hit determination random number (random 1), the big hit Based on the random number for type determination (random 2) and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 5), it is determined whether or not it is a big hit and the variation pattern is determined. As a command indicating the determination result, the first winning determination result Send a command. Therefore, the effect control CPU 201 determines the hold notice based on the first winning determination result command received together with the first effective start winning command. For example, when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command is a big hit fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 201 suggests that the big hit expectation is high at a high rate (for example, “red”). Decide to change. Further, for example, when the variation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command is an outlier variation pattern, the effect control CPU 201 determines that the special mode is not changed at a high rate (the normal mode remains). . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect control CPU 201 selects the variation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command that has a high jackpot expectation level (that is, it is easy to select at the time of a big hit and is off. Change pattern that is difficult to be performed) at a high rate, it is decided to change to a special mode (for example, “red”) suggesting that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high, and the change pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command However, when it is a thing with low expectation degree of big hit (that is, a fluctuation pattern which is difficult to be selected at the time of big hit and easy to be selected at the time of loss), it is determined to be a normal mode which does not suggest the big hit expectation degree at a high rate Also good. In addition, the display mode of the first hold display is not changed to the special mode at the time of start winning (that is, at the time of receiving the first valid start winning command), but at other timing (for example, the first hold display is shifted and displayed). Or a predetermined timing during the special symbol variation display) may be determined. Further, in the hold advance notice determination process, the first specific display (first specific display) described later is displayed when the first hold display is deleted and the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold display is started. The display mode of the first specific display on the display unit 61a may be determined in advance.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 increments the first hold display in the first hold display unit 61 by 1 in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S7074 (step S7075).

On the other hand, when the first effective start winning command has not been received (N in step S7071), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second effective start winning command has been received (step S7076). When receiving the second effective start winning command (Y in step S7076), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the KT state is set (step S7077), and has received the second effective start winning command. If not (N in Step S7076), the process proceeds to Step S7083.

The effect control CPU 201 ends the process when it is not in the KT state (N in step S7077), and if it is in the KT state (Y in step S7077), is the remaining 9 fluctuations until the end of the chance time? It is determined whether or not (step S7078). Here, the chance time is a low probability / first KT that is controlled after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit until the special symbol is changed 100 times (that is, up to 100 revolutions after the big hit game is finished). It means a state. Note that the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the chance time varies, for example, after the effect control CPU 201 receives the low probability / first KT background designation command for the first time by the processing of step S633 shown in FIG. It can be recognized by storing the number of times and subtracting it from the specified number of chance times (100 times).

If the remaining nine fluctuations are not less than the end of the chance time (N in step S7078), the effect control CPU 201 executes a hold notice determination process (step S7079). Note that the hold notice determination process in step S7079 is the same as the hold notice determination process described in step S7074, and can be described by replacing “first” in the hold notice determination process in step S7074 with “second”. . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 increments the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 by 1 in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S7079 (step S7080).

If the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S7078), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (step S7081). When the remaining five fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S7081), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process. At this time, if there is a second hold display that has already been displayed, the effect control CPU 201 may control all the second hold displays to be hidden. When the remaining time is not less than 5 fluctuations until the end of the chance time (that is, the remaining 9 fluctuations to 6 fluctuations; N in step S7081), the effect control CPU 201 performs the second hold on the second hold display section 62 in the normal mode. The display is incremented by 1 (step S7082).

When neither the first valid start winning command nor the second starting winning command is received, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined state change has occurred (step S7083). Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 changes from the jackpot gaming state to the KT state as a predetermined state change based on the background designation command or the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560, or It is determined whether or not there is a change from the KT state to the non-KT state. When there is no predetermined state change (N in step S7083), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process, and when there is a predetermined state change (Y in step S7083), according to the state change, The displayed first hold display or second hold display is hidden (step S7084). Specifically, when the gaming state changes from the big hit gaming state to the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 hides the first hold display, and the gaming state changes from the KT state (precisely the first KT state) to the non-KT state. When the state is changed, the second hold display is not displayed. When the gaming state changes from the big hit gaming state to the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 displays a second holding display corresponding to the second holding memory. When the gaming state changes from the KT state (more precisely, the first KT state) to the non-KT state, the first holding display corresponding to the first holding storage is displayed. To do.

Here, a characteristic point in the above-described hold storage display control process will be described below.

When the first valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7071), the hold number display update (step S7072) is executed, whereas when the second valid start winning command is received (in step S7076). In Y), the pending number display update is not executed. From this, it is understood that the number of holds corresponding to the first number of reserved memories is updated and displayed, whereas the number of holds corresponding to the second number of reserved memories is not displayed. In addition, the number of holds corresponding to the first number of reserved memories is updated and displayed regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a KT state or a non-KT state), whereas the number of holds corresponding to the second number of reserved memories It can also be seen that is not displayed regardless of the game state.

Further, when the first valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7071), the first hold display is not increased (the process in step S7075 is not executed) unless the non-KT state (N in step S7073). ) When the second valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7076), the second hold display is not incremented unless the KT state (N in step S7077) (the processing in steps S7080 and S7082 is not executed). . The first hold display is not displayed when the KT state is shifted to after the big hit, and the second hold display is not displayed when the KT state is shifted to the non-KT state (steps S7083 and S7084). Therefore, the first hold display is not displayed in the KT state but is displayed in the non-KT state (normal state), and the second hold display is not displayed in the non-KT state and is displayed in the KT state. I understand that

Further, when the second effective start winning command is received (Y in step S7076), if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time becomes 9 or less, the hold notice is not executed (Y in step S7078 does not execute S7079). . If the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 or less, the second hold display is not increased (S7082 is not executed due to Y in step S7081). Therefore, in the second hold display, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time becomes 9 to 6, the execution of the hold notice is limited (displayed in a normal manner), and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 When the number is less than or equal to the number of times, it is understood that execution of the hold notice is restricted and addition of the second hold display is restricted (hidden) even in the KT state. Thus, different display control is performed according to the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time even in the same gaming state for the second on-hold display. The reason for this will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing background symbol variation start processing (step S901) in the modification. In this background symbol variation start process, the same processes as those described with reference to FIG. 51 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 executes a specific display control process (step S920A). Here, the specific display control process will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the specific display control process (step S920A) in the modification. In this specific display control process, a first specific display (first specific display in the first specific display unit 61a shown in FIG. 63) and a second specific display (second specific display shown in FIG. 63) displayed on the effect display device 9 are displayed. Display control of the 2nd specific display in the part 62a), and a shielding effect. Here, the first specific display is different from the first on-hold display unit 61 from the start to the end of the variable display corresponding to the variable display during the variable display of the first special symbol. 1 It is a display for specifying the execution of the variable display, displayed on the specific display unit 61a. Also, the second specific display is a second different from the second hold display unit 62 from the start to the end of the change display corresponding to the change display during the change display of the second special symbol. This is a display for specifying the execution of the variable display, displayed on the specific display unit 62a. The first specific display (or second specific display) has the same shape and size as the first hold display (or second hold display) displayed on the first hold display unit 61 (or the second hold display unit 62). Is displayed. However, the first specific display and the first hold display (or the second specific display and the second hold display) may have different shapes or different sizes, and may be displayed in completely different manners. May be. For example, it is desirable to display the first specific display and the first hold display (or the second specific display and the second hold display) in a manner in which a part of the shape and color is approximated. Further, the shielding effect refers to an effect that shields the second reserved display and the second specific display with difficulty in visual recognition.

In the specific display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern (that is, the variation pattern command for the first special symbol) (step S9301). If it is the first variation pattern (Y in step S9301), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S9302), and if it is not the non-KT state (N in step S9302). In step S9303, the process ends, and if it is in the non-KT state (Y in step S9302), the specific notice determination process is executed (S9303). Whether or not the state is the non-KT state (or the KT state) can be recognized, for example, depending on the type of the background image currently displayed by the processing in steps S631, S634, S638, and S642 shown in FIG.

In the specific notice determination process in step S9303, any one of a plurality of special modes (for example, “blue”, “green”, “red”) different from the normal mode (for example, “white”) is used for the display mode of the first specific display. It is determined whether a specific notice is to be changed, and if so, how to change to which special mode (that is, the content of the change). Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 determines a specific notice based on the received first variation pattern command. For example, when the first variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern, the effect control CPU 201 determines to change to a special mode (for example, “red”) that indicates that the big hit expectation is high. . Further, for example, when the first variation pattern is a deviation variation pattern, the effect control CPU 201 determines not to change to the special mode (leave the normal mode) at a high rate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the effect control CPU 201, the first variation pattern has a high jackpot expectation degree (that is, a variation pattern that is easy to select at the time of big hit and difficult to select at the time of loss). Sometimes it is decided to change to a special mode (for example, “red”) that suggests that the expectation level of jackpot is high at a high rate, and the first fluctuation pattern has a low expectation level of jackpot (that is, when the jackpot expects It is also possible to determine the normal mode that does not suggest the big hit expectation degree at a high rate. In addition, the display mode of the first specific display is not changed to the special mode at the start of fluctuation (that is, when the first fluctuation pattern command is received), but at another timing (for example, a predetermined timing during the fluctuation display of the special symbol) ) May be changed. Further, in the above-described hold notice determination process (step S7074), when the display mode of the first specific display is determined in advance at the time of starting winning (that is, based on the pre-reading), the first determination determined based on the pre-reading is performed. The display mode of the first specific display in the specific notice determination process may be determined based on the display mode of the one specific display. Specifically, for example, when the display mode of the first specific display is determined to be “green” based on prefetching, a special mode (for example, suggesting that the big hit expectation is higher than “green” (for example, "Red") can be determined, but it is prohibited to determine a mode (for example, "green") that suggests that the degree of expectation of jackpot is lower than that of "green" (that is, the fall of jackpot expectation is prohibited) Yes). For example, when the display mode of the first specific display is determined based on the prefetching, the first specific display mode is displayed in the display mode determined based on the prefetching. The display mode may not be determined.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the first specific display on the first specific display unit 61a in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S9303 (step S9304).

On the other hand, when it is not the first variation pattern (that is, when the variation pattern command is for the second special symbol; N in step S9301), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the KT state ( In step S9305, if the KT state is not reached (N in step S9305), the process is terminated. Is determined (step S9306).

If the remaining nine fluctuations are not less than or equal to the end of the chance time (N in step S9306), the effect control CPU 201 executes specific notice determination processing (step S9307). The specific notice determination process in step S9307 is the same as the specific notice determination process described in step S9303, and can be described by replacing "first" in the specific notice determination process in step S9303 with "second". . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the second specific display on the second specific display unit 62a in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S9307 (step S9308).

If the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S9306), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (step S9309). When the remaining 5 fluctuations are not reached until the end of the chance time (that is, when the remaining 9 fluctuations to 6 fluctuations; N in step S9309), the effect control CPU 201 performs the second specification on the second specification display unit 62a in the normal mode. The display display is set (step S9310).

When the remaining five fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S9309), the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the shielding effect (step S9311). Here, the shielding effect is an effect that makes the visibility of the second reserved display and the second specific display difficult, for example, the transparency of the screen displayed on the front layer of the second reserved display or the second specific display. Is a blackout effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display and the second specific display by gradually decreasing the number of times until the end of the chance time. In addition, the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a, the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b and the first reserved memory number display 71 are displayed in a layer in front of the blackout effect, etc. What is necessary is just to make it visible even if a blackout production is performed.

Although not described in the specific display control process described above, during the chance time, display setting of the remaining number display 81 (see FIG. 63) indicating the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is performed. Specifically, after the big hit game is finished, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled (that is, when the chance time is entered), the number of times indicated by the remaining number display 81 is controlled as the initial number (low probability / first KT state). 100 times) is set and the number of times subtracted by 1 is set every time the special symbol variation display is started, so that the remaining number display 81 is controlled to the low probability / first KT state. Indicates the remaining number of times (chance time).

Here, characteristic points in the above-described specific display control process will be described below.

When the first variation pattern is received (Y in step S9301), if not in the non-KT state (N in step S9302), the display of the first specific display is not set (the process of step S9304 is not executed), When the second variation pattern is received (N in step S9301), if it is not in the KT state (N in step S9305), the display of the second specific display is not set (the processing in steps S9308 and S9310 is not executed). Therefore, the first specific display is not displayed in the KT state but is displayed in the non-KT state (normal state), and the second specific display is not displayed in the non-KT state and is displayed in the KT state. I understand that

Further, when the second variation pattern is received (N in step S9301), the specific notice is not executed when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less (S9307 is not executed due to Y in step S9306). Further, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 or less, the second specific display is not set for display (S9310 is not executed due to Y in step S9309). Therefore, in the second specific display, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time becomes 9 to 6, the execution of the specific notice is limited (displayed in a normal manner), and the remaining number of times until the chance time ends is 5 When the number is less than or equal to the number of times, it is understood that the execution of the specific notice is limited and the display of the second specific display is limited (not displayed) even in the KT state. As described above, different display control is performed according to the remaining number of chance times even in the same gaming state for the second specific display. The reason for this will be described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 61, in the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern (step S920B). When it is the first variation pattern (Y in step S920B), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S920C), and when it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S920C). The first non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern (step S920F). On the other hand, when it is in the non-KT state (Y in step S920C), the CPU 201 for effect control determines the stop symbol of the background symbol and the small symbol (step S920D) and selects one of the first variation effects as the background symbol pattern. Is set (step S920E). Here, the background symbol variation pattern is set according to the variation pattern, and the variation pattern of the background symbol and the small symbol (for example, the reach symbol is temporarily stopped during the variation, or the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo-ream is temporarily stopped. This is an effect pattern that defines a variation mode). The first variation effect is set according to the first variation pattern, and is a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the variation pattern of the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a and the small symbol variation in the first small symbol display unit 91b, The first non-display effect is an effect pattern that is set according to the first variation pattern and does not variably display the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a or the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b. is there.

On the other hand, when it is not the first variation pattern (that is, when the variation pattern command is for the second special symbol; N in step S920B), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the KT state ( In step S920G), if it is not the KT state (N in step S920G), the second non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern (step S920J). On the other hand, when it is in the KT state (Y in step S920G), the CPU 201 for effect control determines the stop symbol of the background symbol and the small symbol (step S920H), and selects one of the second variation effects as the background symbol pattern. Setting is made (step S920I). Here, the second variation effect is set according to the second variation pattern, and a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a and the small symbol variation mode in the second small symbol display unit 92b. The second non-display effect is set according to the second variation pattern, and the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a and the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b are not variably displayed (not displayed). It is a production pattern.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 sets the set background symbol variation pattern (see steps S920E, S920F, S920I, and 920J), the set specific display (see steps S9304, S9308, and S9310), and the set shielding effect (see steps S9204, S9308, and S9310). The process table is selected in accordance with (see step S9311) or the like (step S920K). As a result, various effects of the set contents are output from the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, and the speaker 27) with the change display of the special symbol by the subsequent processing.

Here, characteristic points in the background symbol fluctuation start process described above will be described below.

When the first variation pattern is received (Y in step S920B), if it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S920C), the first non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern, whereby the first background symbol The background symbol is not displayed on the display unit 91a, and the small symbol is not displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b (step S920F). On the other hand, when the second variation pattern is received (N in Step S920B), if it is not the KT state (N in Step S920G), the second non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern. The background symbol is not displayed on the symbol display unit 92a, and the small symbol is not displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b (step S920F). For this reason, in the non-KT state (normal state), when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the background symbol and the small symbol are variably displayed according to the variation display, but the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. It can be seen that the background symbol and the small symbol are not displayed according to the variation display even if it is performed. In addition, in the KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the background symbol and the small symbol are variably displayed according to the variation display, but even if the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the variation It can be seen that the background symbol and the small symbol are not displayed according to the display.

In addition, the background symbol and the small symbol are not variably displayed corresponding to the variation display of different special symbols (for example, the background symbol corresponds to the variation display of the first special symbol and the small symbol is the first symbol). (2) It does not display the variable separately according to the special symbol's variable display). For this reason, the background symbol and the small symbol are displayed in a synchronized manner in synchronization with each other, and an effect without a sense of incongruity is realized, and the subject of the variation display of the small symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) depends on the gaming state. It can be seen that

[Screen Layout] Next, a screen layout (display screen) in the effect display device 9 displayed by the processing shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62 described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 (1) shows an example of a screen layout in a normal state (low probability / non-KT state), and FIG. 63 (2) shows an example of a screen layout in chance time (low probability / first KT state).

As shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has a first hold display portion 61 at the lower left of the display screen. The hold display is displayed. Specifically, in the first hold display section 61, a number of first hold displays corresponding to the maximum number of stored first hold numbers (here, 4) are arranged on the left and right. In addition, the first specific display is displayed in the first specific display unit 61 a provided at the lower center of the display screen and adjacent to the right of the first hold display unit 61. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold memory is started, the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started among the first hold displays displayed on the first hold display unit 61 (one One hold display on the right side is deleted and shifted (moved) to the first specific display portion 61a to be displayed as the first specific display, and the remaining first hold display is shifted to the right one by one ( Moved). In addition, the 1st hold | maintenance display part 61 and the 1st specific display part 61a may be arrange | positioned in any position of the display screen of the production | presentation display apparatus 9, and a 1st hold | maintenance display and a 1st specific display may not be shifted. Instead, the display may be erased once and then re-displayed at another position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has a display of the number of reservations corresponding to the first storage number stored in the left center portion of the display screen. A 1-hold stored number display 71 is displayed. As a mode of displaying the first reserved memory number, the number indicating the first reserved memory number itself may be used, or a number of display lamps corresponding to the first reserved memory number may be lit up. Also good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has the first special symbol change in the first background symbol display portion 91a at the center of the display screen. The background symbol corresponding to the display is variably displayed, and the small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is variably displayed in the first small symbol display portion 91b in the upper right part of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 63 (2), in the chance time (low probability / first KT state), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has a second hold display section 62 in the lower left portion of the display screen. The hold display is displayed. Specifically, in the second hold display section 62, a number of second hold displays corresponding to the maximum storage number (here, 4) of the second hold storage numbers are arranged on the left and right. In addition, the second specific display is displayed on the second specific display unit 62a provided at the lower center of the display screen and adjacent to the right of the second hold display unit 62. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second reserved memory is started, the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to be started among the second reserved displays displayed on the second reserved display unit 62 (one One on-hold display) is deleted and shifted (moved) to the second specific display portion 62a to be displayed as the second specific display, and the remaining second hold display is shifted to the right one by one ( Moved). In addition, the 2nd hold display part 62 and the 2nd specific display part 62a may be arrange | positioned in any position of the display screen of the production display device 9, and the 2nd hold display and the 2nd specific display may not be shifted. Instead, the display may be erased once and then re-displayed at another position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), even in the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has a hold number display corresponding to the first hold memory number in the left center portion of the display screen. A 1-hold stored number display 71 is displayed. On the other hand, the hold number display corresponding to the second hold storage number is not displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), during the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has the second special symbol change in the second background symbol display portion 92a in the center of the display screen. The background symbol corresponding to the display is variably displayed, and the small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is variably displayed in the second small symbol display portion 92b in the upper right part of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 63 (2), during the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays a remaining number display 81 indicating the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time in the lower right corner of the display screen. In the upper left corner of the display screen, a display indicating that it is currently in the chance time (for example, a character display such as “Chance Time”) is displayed, and in the upper part of the display screen during the chance time (in the KT state) A right-handed display for instructing the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed) aiming at the right side of the game area 7 is performed.

Here, although not shown, the screen layout in the high probability / first KT state and the high probability / second KT state will be briefly described. In the high probability / first KT state, a screen layout similar to that in the low probability / first KT state shown in FIG. 63 (2) is displayed. The difference is that a display indicating a high probability / first KT state (for example, a character display such as “in normal rush”) is performed. In the high probability / second KT state, a screen layout similar to that in the low probability / first KT state shown in FIG. 63 (2) is displayed. The difference is that a display indicating that the state is the high probability / second KT state (for example, a character display such as “during special rush”) is performed.

As described above, in the normal state, the effect display device 9 can display the first hold display and the first specific display, and the background symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. And small symbols are displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, in the normal state, the effect display device 9 does not display the second hold display or the second specific display, and even if the second special symbol is variably displayed, the background corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. No symbols or small symbols are displayed. Further, during the chance time (or KT state), the effect display device 9 can display the second hold display and the second specific display, and can respond to the variable display of the second special symbol. The background symbol and small symbol are displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, during the chance time (or KT state), the effect display device 9 does not display the first hold display or the first specific display, and even if the first special symbol is variably displayed, the first special symbol is not displayed. Background symbols and small symbols corresponding to the variable display are not displayed. As described above, in the normal state, the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are not displayed, and the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed. Even if the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for a very long time (for example, 5 minutes or 15 minutes), the player's recognition degree for the variation display of the second special symbol can be reduced, Production control can be performed. In addition, in the KT state such as during the chance time, the occurrence frequency of small hits per unit time is increased as a result of the variation display of the second special symbol having a variation time shorter than that in the normal state. Pay attention to the variable display of the second special symbol that triggers the winning. For this reason, in the KT state, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol are not displayed. By not performing the first specific display, it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the variable display of the first special symbol and to pay more attention to the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and (2), in the normal state, the small symbols are variably displayed in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol in the first small symbol display portion 91b, and during the chance time ( In the KT state), the small symbols are variably displayed in accordance with the variation display of the second special symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b. Accordingly, the background symbol on the first background symbol display unit 91a in the normal state or the background symbol variable display on the second background symbol display unit 92a during the chance time (or KT state) is a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect or the like). ), The player can recognize the change display of the appropriate special symbol according to the gaming state by confirming the small symbol.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and (2), the display indicating the number of the second reserved memory is not displayed regardless of the gaming state. This is due to the following reason. That is, when the display indicating the number of the second reserved memory is performed even though the second reserved display is not displayed in the normal state, there is a possibility that production inconsistency may occur. In addition, during the chance time, when the remaining number of times until the chance time ends is 5 or less, the display of the second hold display is limited (shielded by the shielding effect or controlled to be hidden). ). For this reason, for example, even if the display of the second hold display is restricted during the chance time, there is a possibility that the inconsistency of the effects may occur when the number of the second hold storage is displayed. Therefore, during the chance time, the number of the second hold memory is not displayed from the beginning, so that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time becomes 5 or less and the display of the second hold display is limited. I try to realize a production without a sense of incongruity. For the above reason, the display indicating the number of second reserved memories is not performed regardless of the gaming state, but for example, a KT state different from the chance time (a state in which the KT state is guaranteed until the next big hit) Then, since the second hold display is not limited, the number of the second hold storage may be displayed.

As can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), the first reserved memory number display 71 indicating the number of first reserved memories is displayed regardless of the gaming state. This is due to the following reason. That is, in the non-KT state (normal state), the display of the first hold display is not limited, so that the player's recognizability is ensured by displaying the first hold memory number display 71 in the normal state. Yes. Also, since the variation time of the first special symbol is not long even in the KT state (for example, 10 seconds or less), even if the first reserved memory remains when the KT state is started, it is immediately digested and the KT state Since the right-handed is performed in, a new first reserved memory is rarely generated. For this reason, even if the first reserved memory number display 71 is displayed in the KT state, the number is almost always “0”, and the player is less likely to feel discomfort. Rather, by allowing the player to recognize that the first reserved memory number display 71 indicates “0”, it is possible to recognize that it is a right-handed game (that is, a game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed). It becomes possible to concentrate on the right-handed game. For the above reasons, the first reserved memory number display 71 is displayed regardless of the gaming state, but may be hidden in the KT state.

In the normal state, the 4th symbol is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variation display of the 2nd special symbol, and in the KT state such as during the chance time, it corresponds to the variable display of the 1st special symbol. The fourth symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. Here, the variation display of the fourth symbol is a predetermined display in a partial region of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and smaller than the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b. This is realized by continuing the state of repeatedly turning on and off at a constant time interval in color (for example, blue). The region in which the 4th symbol is variably displayed (the 4th symbol display region) may be a region different from the display screen of the effect display device 9, for example, using a light emitter such as a lamp or LED. It is good also as what implement | achieves a 4 symbol display area. In this way, by performing the variation display of the fourth symbol, when the background symbol or the small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is not displayed in the normal state, or in the variation display of the first special symbol in the KT state. Even when the corresponding background symbol or small symbol is not displayed, the variation state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be confirmed by the fourth symbol. In addition, since the 4th symbol is less visible than the background symbol and the small symbol, in the normal state, the player can reduce the degree of recognition of the variation display of the 2nd special symbol. In the state, it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the player with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, a hold display lamp (not shown) corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display may be provided outside the frame of the effect display device 9, and the hold display lamp may be lit up regardless of the gaming state. . The display control of the hold display lamp may be controlled by the game control microcomputer 560, or may be controlled by the effect control microcomputer 200. Moreover, it is good also as what separately provides the holding | maintenance display lamp by which display control is carried out by both of them. By separately providing the hold display lamp in this way, even when the second hold display is not displayed in the normal state or when the first hold display is not displayed in the KT state, the hold display lamp causes the first hold storage number and the second hold display lamp to be displayed. The number of memories can be confirmed. Further, since the hold display lamp is provided outside the frame of the effect display device 9, the visibility is lower than the hold display in the first hold display unit 61 and the second hold display unit 62. On the other hand, the recognition degree with respect to the second hold display can be reduced, and in the KT state, the recognition degree of the first hold display can be reduced with respect to the player.

In the above-described modification, the first hold display or the second hold display is displayed according to the gaming state, and the first specific display or the second specific display is displayed according to the gaming state. The display positions of the display unit 61 and the second hold display unit 62 are the same (lower left of the display screen), and the display positions of the first specific display unit 61a and the second specific display unit 62a are the same (lower center of the display screen). However, they may be at different positions. Similarly, in the above description, the display positions of the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a are the same (center portion of the display screen), and the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit Although the display positions of 92b are the same (upper right part of the display screen), they may be different positions. Further, for example, even if the display positions of the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a (or the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b) are the same, they are respectively displayed. By changing the display mode of the background symbol (or small symbol) to be displayed, it is possible to distinguish between the one corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the one corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol Also good. For example, when the display positions of the first small symbol display portion 91b and the second small symbol display portion 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), the small symbols can be displayed at the respective display positions. It becomes. In this case, in a normal state, the small symbols may be variably displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b in accordance with the variation display of the second special symbols. However, in this case, it is preferable that the small symbols in the second small symbol display unit 92b have lower visibility than the small symbols in the first small symbol display unit 91b. Similarly, in the KT state such as during the chance time, the small symbols may be variably displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variation display of the first special symbol. However, in this case, it is preferable that the small symbols in the first small symbol display unit 91b have lower visibility than the small symbols in the second small symbol display unit 92b.

[Display Control Example of Second Hold Display During Chance Time] Next, display control of the second hold display and second specific display during the chance time displayed by the processing of the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62 described above. An example will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 64 (1) shows an example of a display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 10 times or more during the chance time. As shown in FIG. 64 (1), at this time, the second hold display is displayed on the second hold display section 62 and the second specific display is displayed on the second specific display section 62a. Further, since the hold notice and the specific notice can be executed, the second hold display can be changed to the special mode, and the specific display can be changed to the special mode. During the chance time, a right-handed display is performed so that the player can make a right-handed.

FIG. 64 (2) shows an example of a display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 to 6 during the chance time. As shown in FIG. 64 (2), at this time, the second hold display is displayed on the second hold display section 62 and the second specific display is displayed on the second specific display section 62a. However, since the execution of the hold notice and the specific notice is prohibited, the second hold display is displayed in the normal mode, and the second specific display is also displayed in the normal mode.

FIG. 64 (3) shows an example of a display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less during the chance time. As shown in FIG. 64 (3), at this time, a shielding effect (blackout effect) that shields the display areas of the second hold display unit 62 and the second specific display unit 62a with difficulty in visual recognition is executed. Thereby, the second hold display on the second hold display unit 62 becomes difficult to visually recognize, and the second specific display on the second specific display unit 62a becomes difficult to view. Note that this blackout effect is gradually blacked out (transparency decreases) as the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time decreases. For this reason, it is difficult to visually recognize the second hold display and the second specific display, and it can be impressively suggested that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is reduced.

Incidentally, as can be seen from the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 or less, the additional display of the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be non-display. Therefore, even if the shielding effect (blackout effect) is not executed, the additional display of the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 is difficult to view (not displayed), and the second display in the second specific display unit 62a. The specific display can be made difficult to view (not displayed). In addition, when the shielding effect (blackout effect) is executed, the additional display of the second hold display and the second specific display are not controlled to be non-displayed, but are displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 64 (2). Also good. Even if it does in this way, since the 2nd reservation display and the 2nd specific display are shielded by the blackout effect displayed on the layer of the upper surface, while making the 2nd reservation display and the 2nd specific display difficult to see, The display control flow of the second hold display and the second specific display can be simplified.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 64 (3), the second hold display and the second specific display are limited to be difficult to view due to the shielding effect, so that the second hold display is shifted and displayed (second hold display). Are also limited in the same way (the effect that the second hold display is shifted and displayed on the second specific display) in the same manner (becomes difficult to see). Even if the shielding effect is not executed, if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 or less, if there is a second hold display already displayed, all the second hold displays are not displayed. The display is controlled, and the effect in which the second hold display is shifted and displayed may be limited to non-display.

In the above description, the second hold display or the second specific display is blocked by the shielding effect (blackout effect) that shields the entire screen. By changing the layout of the display screen, the second hold display or the second specific display may be made difficult to view (or not displayed). Here, “changing the layout of the display screen” is a concept including changing the display position and display size of various display items displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is a concept that includes all displays displayed as effects on the effect display device 9 such as background symbols and hold display. As a change of the display screen layout, for example, the display area of the remaining number display 81 may be expanded. Specifically, by expanding the display area of the remaining number display 81 to the left, the second hold display unit 62 that displays the second hold display and the second specific display unit 62a that displays the second specific display. The display area may be shielded. Moreover, as a change of the display screen layout, for example, the second reserved display and the second specific display may be blocked by extending the second background symbol display unit 92a downward. Further, the shielding effect is not limited to the blackout effect, and may be an effect of shielding the second hold display and the second specific display by using another display effect or a movable body (movable effect object). . In addition, the second hold display and the second specific display may not be completely shielded, and may be difficult to visually recognize due to a decrease in visibility. For example, in the effect display device 9, the display position of the second hold display and the second specific display is changed (for example, changed to the upper right corner), or the display size is changed (for example, reduced display). It is good also as what reduces property.

Further, the blackout effect described above is started on condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 or less, and the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to view. However, the blackout effect is started on the condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is, for example, 10 times or less, and the transparency decreases as the remaining number decreases, and the remaining number of times is 10 times or more. In the case of six times, the second hold display and the second specific display can be visually recognized. On the other hand, when the remaining number reaches 5, the second hold display and the second specific display may be difficult to view. If it does in this way, the display control which becomes difficult to visually recognize the 2nd hold display and the 2nd specific display can be made more uncomfortable. A similar effect can also be applied when an effect other than the blackout effect is used as the shielding effect.

FIG. 64 (4) shows an example of the display effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the change display of the final change of the chance time (100th rotation after the start of the chance time) is finished. As shown in FIG. 64 (4), when the final variation of the chance time is finished, the background symbol corresponding to the result of the variation display of the second special symbol (for example, the stop symbol indicating the disparity (or small hit)) (for example, “3”, “9” and “4”) are stopped, and similarly, small symbols (for example, “3”, “9” and “4”) corresponding to the result of the variable display of the second special symbol are stopped. The background symbol and the small symbol may be different from each other. Then, with the end of the chance time, the right-handed display is finished (hidden), and a left-handed notification that prompts the player to left-hand is executed instead. Although not shown, during the final fluctuation, an end display (for example, a character display “Chance Time End!”) Is displayed to notify that the chance time is over. Based on the value of the prize ball number counter, the prize ball number display in the consecutive villa is displayed. Thereby, the fact that the retreat has ended and all the number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) acquired during that time are notified. At this time, the number of jackpots (number of consecutive resorts) in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the chance time may be notified together.

FIG. 64 (5) shows an example of a display effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) in the normal state immediately after the chance time ends (that is, the 101st rotation after the chance time starts). As shown in FIG. 64 (5), when the gaming state is switched from the first KT state to the normal state, the second holding display on the second holding display unit 62 and the second specifying display on the second specifying display unit 62a are hidden. The second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed even if a new second effective start winning command is controlled (that is, even if a new effective start winning opening 14 is generated). On the other hand, when the player makes a left strike based on the left strike notification shown in FIG. 64 (4), a new first start prize command is generated (that is, an effective prize is awarded to a new first start prize opening). The first specific display is displayed on the first specific display portion 61a, and the background symbol is variably displayed on the first background symbol display portion 91a according to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the first small symbol display is also performed. The small symbols are variably displayed in the part 91b. Thereby, the player recognizes the start of the variable display at the 101st rotation after the end of the chance time. In addition, when the first start winning command is newly generated during the variation display of the first special symbol, the first reserved memory number display 71 is updated and displayed by updating the first reserved memory number. The first hold display in the hold display section 61 is additionally displayed.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 64, the reason why the display control of the second hold display and the second specific display is different depending on the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 63, in this modification, the variation time of the second special symbol is very long (for example, 5 minutes or 15 minutes) in the normal state (non-KT state), and the normal state Since left-handed is recommended, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be non-displayed in order not to recognize that the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. For this reason, when the control is performed in the normal state after the chance time is over, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed as described above with reference to FIG. Accordingly, if the second hold display is displayed when the change display of the final change of the chance time (the 100th rotation after the start of the chance time) is finished, the second hold display is displayed when the normal state is switched. Is suddenly controlled so that the player may feel uncomfortable. Also, for example, if there is a second hold display that has changed to a special mode at the end of the final change of the chance time, this will be dismissed and the player will be discouraged, or there will be a second hold display However, in the normal state, the effect (background symbol or the like) is not displayed, which may cause inconsistency in the effect. However, as described above, in this modified example, the second hold display or the second specific display is displayed before the final change of the chance time ends (that is, after the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 5). Since the display is controlled so as to be difficult to view, the player's degree of recognition with respect to the second hold display and the second specific display is reduced, and the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed when the normal game state is entered. Even if it is controlled, it is possible not to give a sense of incongruity. In addition, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to visually recognize, but the background symbols and small symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are visually recognized. Since display control is possible, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the variable display of the second special symbol is performed during the chance time.

By the way, in the above-described modified example, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to visually recognize on the condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 or less. The reason for the number of times being 5 or less is as follows. That is, in the above-described modified example, since the maximum number of stored second reserved memories is 4, up to four second reserved displays can be displayed, and the second specific display is also displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, by displaying the second hold display and the second specific display, it is possible to allow the player to recognize the information corresponding to five variations at the maximum. Therefore, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 5 times, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled so as to be difficult to visually recognize. A situation in which the second specific display or the second hold display is not displayed can be prevented. Note that the second hold display or the second specific display is not performed on the condition that the remaining number of times is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) greater than five without being the condition that the remaining number is less than five. It is good also as what controls display so that visual recognition is difficult. Further, the second hold display and the second specific display may be controlled so as to be difficult to visually recognize until the predetermined number of fluctuating displays are performed after the chance time ends (after shifting to the normal state), that is, in the KT state. It is good also as what carries out display control of the 2nd hold display and the 2nd specific display over the period before and behind including the timing which ends, making it difficult to visually recognize.

Further, in the above-described modification example, on the condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 or less, the hold notice of the second hold display and the specific notice of the second specific display are limited (not executed). However, the reason why the remaining number of times is 9 or less is as follows. That is, as described above, when the remaining number of times becomes 5 or less, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to view. Therefore, when the second hold display or the second specific display mode that is controlled to be difficult to view is changed to a special mode, the display is difficult to view while keeping the player feeling expected. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation may be impaired, or that there is a possibility of inconsistency in performance. For this reason, by restricting the hold notice of the second hold display on condition that the remaining number of times becomes 9 or less, the fourth second hold display which is the maximum hold number is shifted as the second specific display after four fluctuations. In this case, even if the remaining number of times is controlled to be difficult to view because the remaining number is 5 times or less, the second specific display in the normal mode is only controlled to be difficult to view. It can be avoided. Regarding the second hold display, it is necessary to limit the hold notice of the second hold display on the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 or less in consideration of the possibility that the display is shifted by a maximum of 4 fluctuations. However, this situation does not apply to the second specific indication. For this reason, regarding the second specific display, the specific notice may be limited on the condition that the remaining number of times that the display becomes difficult to visually recognize is 5 or less. In addition, on the condition that the remaining number is less than a predetermined number (for example, 20 times) greater than 9 without being the condition that the remaining number is 9 or less, the second notice of hold on the second hold display and the second The specific notice of the specific display may be limited.

By the way, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state in which the occurrence frequency per unit time is increased as in the KT state, the player remains when the KT state ends and shifts to a normal state. In order to confirm the result of whether or not to make a big hit based on the second reserved memory, the gaming machine may be intentionally occupied without firing a game ball after the end of the KT state. In such a case, the operation of the gaming machine is reduced in the game store, which is not appropriate. Further, if the player can recognize the second hold display related to the second hold memory remaining after the end of the KT state, if the player holds a long hold (for example, if there are four long-change hold for 15 minutes, all are not displayed). The KT state ends in an unnatural display state in which the second hold display is displayed. Furthermore, although it is not always a big hit based on the remaining second reserved memory, until the fluctuation display based on the second reserved memory is finished and the result of the success / failure is displayed (reserved digestion). A certain amount of time (for example, 15 minutes), the player misses the opportunity to end the game, and if the player continues the game, the player may be disadvantaged. However, as described above, according to the present modification, the second hold display or the second specific display is not displayed after the end of the KT state, and the second hold display is started from the chance time (before the end 5 change). By controlling the second specific display so that it is difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively recognizing that there is the remaining second reserved memory. For this reason, it becomes possible to prevent the player from intentionally occupying the gaming machine, thereby preventing a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine, and to realize a display without a sense of incongruity at the end of the KT state, It is possible to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to finish the game.

In the above-described modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed in the KT state. However, the second hold display and the second specific display are not always displayed regardless of the gaming state (or It may be difficult to view). This is suitable, for example, in the case of a gaming machine having a predetermined ratio of per KT and non-KT as follows. Here, “per KT” means a big hit that can be determined when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and is a big hit that is controlled in the KT state until the next big hit after the big hit game ends. The non-KT hit is a big hit that can be determined when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and is a big hit that is controlled in the normal gaming state immediately after the big hit. In a gaming machine having such per KT and per non-KT, in the KT state after winning per KT, it may be possible to display the second hold display in order to improve the interest of the game. Then, if winning is made per non-KT in such a gaming state, when the second special symbol indicating non-KT is stopped (that is, when the big win is confirmed), the right-hand strike is performed in the KT state. Therefore, there is a high possibility that a maximum of four second hold displays are displayed. However, when winning per non-KT, it is controlled to the normal state after the big hit game, so that the second hold display that was displayed before the big hit is confirmed is controlled to be hidden. Then, before the jackpot is confirmed, for example, the second hold display that has been changed to a special mode is hidden, so that the player is discouraged, or in the normal state even though the second hold display is present ( There is a possibility that the inconsistency of the production may be caused by the fact that the background pattern or the like is not displayed. Therefore, in order to avoid such inconsistencies in performance, it is difficult to visually recognize the second hold display related to the second hold memory stored after the second hold memory indicating the non-KT per-time in the KT state. It is preferable to perform display control (for example, non-display). Therefore, for example, based on the look-ahead at the time of the start winning (second winning determination result command), the second hold display regarding the subsequent start winning (second hold storage) at the timing when the start winning indicating the non-KT win occurs. It is conceivable that display control is performed with difficulty in visual recognition. However, if display control based on such prefetching is performed, it may be confirmed in advance that it is a big hit, so there is a risk of reducing the interest of the game. For this reason, in a gaming machine having such a non-KT per game, the second hold display may not always be displayed (or difficult to view) even in the KT state (regardless of the gaming state). In this way, without making a suggestion in advance in the KT state, the big hold is not displayed, and the second hold display is not displayed even if the winning is made per non-KT. Matching can also be avoided.

Note that, in the gaming machine having the above non-KT win, for example, based on the pre-reading at the time of the start win, at the timing when the start win indicating the non-KT win occurs, the second regarding the subsequent start win (second reserved memory) In addition to the display control of the hold display so that it is difficult to visually recognize, the start winning (second second) is performed at the timing when the start winning that shows a deviation (or small hit) at a predetermined ratio is generated based on the pre-reading at the time of starting winning. The second hold display related to hold storage) may be controlled to be difficult to view for a predetermined period (predetermined number of fluctuations). In this way, even if it is not a big hit, the second hold display may be controlled so that it is difficult to visually recognize for a predetermined period (there is so-called gusset). Since the second hold display is not displayed even when winning per KT, it is possible to avoid inconsistencies in performance when the game state is shifted to the normal gaming state.

In addition, as described above, in a gaming machine having per KT and per non-KT, it is added at the time of non-KT based on display control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the second reserved display regardless of the gaming state and prefetching. Inconsistency of effects can be avoided by performing display control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display for a predetermined period when there is a deviation (or small hit) at a predetermined ratio. These display controls (hereinafter referred to as specific display controls) are not limited to gaming machines having KT and non-KT per game, but are big hits (hereinafter referred to as quasi-non-KT) per KT and non-KT. Can also be applied to gaming machines having a predetermined ratio. Here, “per quasi-non-KT” refers to a big hit that can be determined when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and from a predetermined number of times after the big hit ends (for example, the maximum number of the second reserved storage is four times). This is a big hit when the KT state is controlled only a small number of times (for example, once) and then the normal gaming state is entered. In a gaming machine having such a ratio of quasi-non-KT at a predetermined ratio, the number of times of control in the KT state after the big hit game is the second reserved memory number when winning per quasi-non-KT when controlled in the KT state. Less than the maximum number of. For this reason, if the second hold display is displayed while being controlled in the KT state, the KT state after the quasi-non-KT finishes and the game state is controlled so that the second hold display is not displayed. When the second special symbol indicating the quasi-non-KT hit is stopped (that is, when the big hit is confirmed), a part of up to four second hold indications that may have been displayed (stored later) There is a possibility that the second hold display relating to the hold storage is not displayed. For this reason, even in a gaming machine that replaces (or adds to) non-KT per KT at a predetermined ratio, it is possible to avoid inconsistencies in performance by performing the specific display control described above.

In the above, the KT hit is a big hit that is controlled in the KT state until the next big hit after the big hit game ends. However, a predetermined number of times after the big hit ends (for example, the maximum number of second reserved memories is four times). It may be a big hit that is controlled to the KT state by a larger number of times (for example, 100 times). Even in this case, since there is a possibility of winning per non-KT or quasi-non-KT in the KT state, the above-described specific display control can be similarly applied.

In addition, the above-described modification is applied to a gaming machine (so-called loop machine) that is controlled in a high probability state until the next big hit at a predetermined rate (65%). Alternatively, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine (a so-called ST machine) that is controlled with a high probability until a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are finished after the big hit game. Also, in this case, when controlled in the high probability state, the KT state is controlled at the same time, and when controlled in the KT state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the normal state. Therefore, the occurrence frequency per unit time may be increased. In this case as well, the second hold display or the second specific display is controlled so that it is difficult to visually recognize from the fifth change before the final change controlled in the high probability state, and the second hold display is held from the nine changes before the final change. The specific notice of the notice or the second specific display may be limited.

In addition, when controlled in a high probability state, a gaming machine (so-called falling lottery type gaming machine) that performs lottery (so-called falling lottery type game) for transitioning to a low probability state for each change, or a predetermined number of fluctuation displays In a gaming machine controlled in a high probability state (so-called ST type gaming machine) in a predetermined period (ST period) until the end, when controlled in a high probability state, it is controlled in the second KT state and in a low probability state. When being controlled, it may be controlled in a non-KT state. In such a gaming machine, when a transition is made from a high probability state / second KT state to a low probability state / non-KT state (normal state), the final fluctuation (ie, falling) controlled in the KT state (second KT state) In the lottery type, the second hold display may be controlled to be difficult to view and the second specific display may be controlled to be difficult to view in the variation won in the falling lottery, or in the ST type, the final variation of the ST period.

Further, in the above-described modification example, as described above, even if the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 14 is detected in the normal state (non-KT state), the second hold display and the second specific display are not performed. It is not displayed, and neither the background symbol nor the small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed (that is, the display effect is limited). However, when the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 14 is detected in the normal state, not only the display effect is limited, but also the right strike aiming at the winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is not performed. A notification effect (for example, left-handed notification) may be performed. By doing in this way, by reducing the player's degree of recognition that the second special symbol is an opportunity to be variably displayed with respect to the event of winning the game ball to the second start winning opening 14 in the normal state. Thus, it is possible to relatively increase the player's degree of recognition that the left-handed notification is performed (right-handed is prohibited). For this reason, it becomes possible to reduce the right strike aiming at the illegal small hit.

Further, in the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display portion 91b and the second small symbol display portion 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap with each other), in the normal state when the forced displacement occurs. Even in such a case, the small symbols may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 62b, and the small symbols may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b even in the KT state. For example, in a normal state, a small symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first small symbol display unit 91b in accordance with a variation display of the first special symbol. When the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is forcibly disengaged, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the forcible deviation is stopped in the second small symbol display portion 92b. It may be displayed. Similarly, in the KT state, a small symbol is variably displayed in the second small symbol display unit 92b in accordance with the variation display of the second special symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation, In the case where the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that has been variably displayed at the same time is forcibly disengaged, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the forcible deviation is displayed in the first small symbol display portion 91b. It may be displayed in a stopped state.

Further, in the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display portion 91b and the second small symbol display portion 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), the normal state is in a big hit. Alternatively, the small symbols may be stopped and displayed in the second small symbol display unit 92b. For example, in a normal state, a small symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the first small symbol display unit 91b in accordance with a variable display of the first special symbol. In some cases, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the big hit may be stopped and displayed in the second small symbol display portion 92b. When the variation display of the first special symbol is started while the variation display of the second special symbol indicating the big hit is performed, the small symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed in the second small symbol display portion 92b. The first normal instruction notification 56A is performed later, or the second normal instruction notification 56B is performed, so that it may be positively notified that it is a big hit. Also, at this time, even if the first special symbol change is started, the production related to the first special symbol change is limited (for example, the background symbol or the small symbol change display corresponding to the first special symbol change is not displayed). Instead, an effect (a special effect indicating a big hit) according to the change display of the second special symbol may be performed instead. On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol (big hit variation) is finished without the variation display of the first special symbol being performed, the small symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed in the second small symbol display portion 92b. The first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed, or the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed, so that it may be negatively notified that it is a big hit. In the normal state, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a deviation (or small hit) fluctuation, as described above, the small symbol is not displayed in the second small symbol display 92b (that is, the deviation symbol is displayed). In the case of a small hit, it is not necessary to be notified by a display effect).

In addition, in the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display portion 91b and the second small symbol display portion 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), the KT state is in a big hit. However, the small symbols may be stopped and displayed in the first small symbol display unit 61b. For example, in the KT state, the small symbols are variably displayed in the second small symbol display unit 92b in accordance with the variation display of the second special symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol that has been variably displayed at the same time is a big hit variation. In some cases, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, a small symbol indicating a big hit may be stopped and displayed in the first small symbol display portion 91b. In the KT state, since the player usually makes a right-hand hit, when the first special symbol showing the big hit is displayed, the second special symbol may be displayed. It is almost. In such a case, after the small symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display portion 91b, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed or the second normal instruction notification 56B is performed positively. It may be notified that it is a big hit. At this time, even if the change of the second special symbol is started, the production related to the change of the second special symbol is limited (for example, the change display of the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol is Instead, an effect (a special effect indicating a big hit) according to the variable display of the first special symbol may be performed instead. On the other hand, although it is rare, for example, when the KT state is controlled, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, such as when a game ball is accidentally placed at the first start winning opening 13 and left. When the first special symbol variation display (big hit variation) is finished, the first small symbol display unit 91b stops and displays the small symbol indicating the big hit, and then the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed, or the second By performing the reduction instruction notification 56D, it may be notified that it is a negative big hit. Alternatively, in the KT state, since the player usually makes a right stroke, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed when the game ball passes through the operation gate 17 by the right stroke, or the first It is good also as what alert | reports actively that it is a big hit by performing 2 normal instruction | indication alerting | reporting 56B. In the KT state, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a deviation fluctuation, as described above, the small symbol is not displayed in the first small symbol display portion 91b (that is, in the case of the deviation, the display is not performed). (It may not be notified depending on the production).

Further, in the above-described modification, the hold notice determination process in step S7079 did not mention the difference in the KT state (the first KT state or the second KT state), but whether the state is the first KT state or the second KT state. Accordingly, the hold notice determination process may be executed. Specifically, in the hold notice determination process, the display state of the second hold display is more likely to be changed to a special form in the first KT state than in the second KT state (that is, the hold notice is easily performed). Good. This is due to the following reason. That is, in the first KT state among the KT states, although a small hit is likely to occur, there are very few cases where a game ball wins the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 (that is, it is difficult to obtain a winning ball due to the small hit). On the other hand, in the second KT state among the KT states, a player can easily make a small hit and easily win a game ball in the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 (that is, it is easy to obtain a winning ball by the small hit). It will be easy to give a profit. Thus, in the second KT state, the player expects a small hit (ie, a loss), but does not expect to win a big hit that may end the second KT state (rather, not a big hit for a long period of time). expect). On the other hand, in the first KT state, the player cannot expect a winning ball even if a small hit occurs, and therefore expects a big hit instead of a small hit. For this reason, in the first KT state, the holding notice is made easier than in the second KT state, so that the player expects a big hit in the first KT state, and a small hit is expected in the second KT state. It is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being impaired. For the same reason, in the specific notice determination process in step S9307, the display form of the second specific display is more easily changed to the special form in the first KT state than in the second KT state (that is, the specific notice is performed). Easy). In addition, when the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol has a predetermined percentage of non-small hits other than big hits (normal loss), the second hold display and the second specific display are small hits. A hold notice or a specific notice that changes to a mode in which a certain expectation is expected (for example, a character display of “small”) may be performed.

In the above-described modification, as described with reference to FIG. 60, the production control microcomputer 200 grasps the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time, and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 or less. Then, the execution of the hold notice was restricted. However, it may be determined by the game control microcomputer 560 whether or not to restrict the hold notice. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 grasps the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time by counting the number of fluctuations after controlling to the low probability / first KT state after the big hit game, and ends the chance time. When the remaining number of times until the time is less than 9, a command prohibiting the hold notice may be transmitted as the second winning determination result command transmitted when the second effective start winning occurs. In this way, the production control microcomputer 200 that receives the second winning determination result command does not know the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time, and makes a pending notice based on the second winning determination result command. It is possible to determine whether to execute or prohibit. Further, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 200 can execute the hold notice only when a predetermined hold notice command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. When the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 or less, the pending notice command may not be transmitted even if the second effective start winning is generated. Even in this way, the production control microcomputer 200 can determine whether to execute or prohibit the hold notice based on the hold notice command without grasping the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time. Similarly, whether or not to restrict the specific notice may be determined not by the effect control microcomputer 200 but by the game control microcomputer 560.

As described above, according to this modified example, the identification information is variably displayed and is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit state) advantageous to the player, Variable display execution means (in this example, game control) capable of executing variable display of information (in this example, the first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) in parallel Of the microcomputer 560 for executing steps S26A and S26B) and predetermined state control means (this example) that can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. In the game control microcomputer 560, the steps S358 to S360 are executed), the normal state (in this example, the non-KT state), and the second identification information is allowed more than the normal state. By selecting a short variation time at a high rate as the display execution time (see FIG. 13 in this example), it is possible to control to a special state (in this example, the KT state) that is frequently controlled to a predetermined state. A certain state control means (in this example, a part for executing steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560) and information regarding variable display of the first identification information as the first reserved memory First hold storage means (in this example, a first hold storage buffer) that can be stored, and second hold storage means (in this example, the first hold storage buffer) that can store information related to variable display of the second identification information as second hold storage. 2 hold storage buffers) and a first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage (in this example, the first hold display in the first hold display unit 61) And on-hold display means (in this example, on the production control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying a second on-hold display corresponding to the second on-hold storage (in this example, the second on-hold display in the second on-hold display unit 62). The hold display means includes a second hold display in a specific period including the timing at which the special state ends (in this example, the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time). Can be made difficult to see (refer to FIG. 64 in this example). Thereby, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the special state, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. More specifically, when the special state ends, appropriate display control can be realized for the second hold display. The specific period may be a period including a timing at which the special state (in this example, the KT state) ends, and is not limited to a period from the end of the special state to the end (for example, five fluctuations before the end) It may include a predetermined period (for example, five fluctuations after the end) after the special state ends (after transition to the normal state).

Further, according to this modification, when variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) is performed, the specific display corresponding to the second identification information (in this example, the second specific display) Specific display means capable of displaying the second specific display in the section 62a (in this example, the part for executing steps S9308 and S9310 in the production control microcomputer 200), and the specific period (in this example, the chance time). In a period other than the period of 5 fluctuations or less until the end), the hold display means can display the second hold display and the specific display means can display the specific display. In the specific period, the hold display means (2) It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the hold display (in this example, step S7082 is not executed when Y in step S7081) and the specific display means is special. And difficult view the display (in this example, does not execute the step S9310 if it is Y in Step S9309) It is possible, it was decided. Thereby, when a special state is complete | finished, appropriate display control is realizable also about the specific display corresponding to 2nd identification information.

Further, according to this modified example, a pre-determining means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S65A and S65B) for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the establishment of the start condition. Portion) and a specific determination means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an advantageous state is obtained based on the second reserved memory before the determination by the prior determination means is performed in steps S312, S215, S216. , S322), and the hold display unit displays the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage that is the determination target of the specific determination unit according to the determination result of the specific determination unit. A first mode change effect (in this example, a hold notice) can be executed to change to a special mode, and the specific display unit determines the prior determination according to the determination result of the prior determination unit. A second mode change effect (in this example, a specific advance notice) that changes the specific display corresponding to the second identification information to be determined by the means to the second special mode can be executed, and includes a predetermined period including a specific period ( In this example, during the remaining nine fluctuations until the end of the chance time, the hold display means restricts the execution of the first mode change effect (in this example, if step S7078 is Y, step S7079 is not executed). ) And the specific display means restrict the execution of the second mode change effect (in this example, step S9307 is not executed when Y in step S9306). Thereby, the inconsistency of the production in the specific period when the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage and the specific display corresponding to the second identification information are difficult to visually recognize can be avoided.

Further, according to this modification, the state control means includes, as the special state, the first special state (in this example, the first KT state) and the second special state (in this example) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. In the second KT state, control is possible. Thereby, the monotony of the game property in a special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game when controlling to the special state can be improved.

Further, according to this modified example, in correspondence with variable display of identification information, the variable display of the production symbol (in this example, the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a) Effect control means (in this example, effect control) capable of performing variable display of a reduced symbol (in this example, a small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b or the second small symbol display unit 92b) smaller than the effect symbol The microcomputer 200 includes a portion that executes S920D, S920E, S920H, S920I, and S920K), and the effect control means supports variable display of the first identification information in a normal state (in this example, a non-KT state). An effect symbol (in this example, the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a) is variably displayed, and an effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second symbol) The variable display of the background symbol display unit 92a is not executed (in this example, step S920E is executed when Y in step S920C, and step S920J is executed when N in step S920G). In the special state (in this example, the KT state), the variable display of the production symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display of the production symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is not executed. (In this example, if it is Y in step S920G, step S920I is executed, and if it is N in step S920C, step S920F is executed), depending on whether it is controlled to the normal state or the special state, A reduced symbol corresponding to the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information (in this example, the first small symbol display unit 91b or the second small symbol) Performing variable display of small symbols) in radical 113 92b (in this example, perform one of the steps S920D and S920H depending on whether KT state is a non-KT state), it was decided. As a result, it is possible to realize appropriate display control corresponding to the state of the reduced symbol, and to reduce the degree of recognition of the variable display of the second identification information to the player in the normal state.

According to this modification, the hold display means can display the first hold display but cannot display the second hold display in the normal state (in this example, the non-KT state) (this example). Then, step S7075 is executed when Y in step S7073, and steps S7080 and S7082 are not executed when N in step S7077). Thereby, a player's visibility with respect to the 2nd holding | maintenance display corresponding to 2nd holding | maintenance memory | storage in a normal state can be reduced, and appropriate display control can be implement | achieved about a 2nd holding | maintenance display.

Further, according to this modification, the hold display means displays the first hold memory number corresponding to the number of the first hold memory (in this example, regardless of whether the hold state is controlled in the normal state or the special state) The first hold memory number display 71) is displayed, and the second hold number display corresponding to the number of the second hold memory is not displayed (in this example, when the answer is Y in step S7071, step S7072 is executed, and step S7076 is executed). The process corresponding to step S7072 is not executed even in the case of Y.). Thereby, the player's visibility with respect to the number of the second reserved memories can be reduced while securing the player's recognizability with respect to the number of the first reserved memories. Appropriate display control can be realized for the number of stored storages.

Further, according to this modified example, the game medium (in this example, a game ball) is provided in a predetermined path (in this example, to the right of the game area 7) among the flow-down paths through which the game medium can pass. Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area after the specific area (in this example, the operation gate 17) and a predetermined condition (in this example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) are established, Then, an advantageous state control means that can be controlled to a big hit gaming state (in this example, the portion that executes steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 when Y in step S2501 in the gaming control microcomputer 560), Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, a predetermined promotion notification (in this example, a first instruction notification) that promotes the release of the game medium to the predetermined route is executed, and the execution of the predetermined promotion notification is performed. A promotion notification means (in this example, an effect) that can execute a specific promotion notification (in this example, the second instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium to the specific area after the period (in this example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. Steps S4404, S4405, S4604, and S4605 in the control microcomputer 200) are further provided. Thereby, the opportunity to control to an advantageous state can be alert | reported appropriately, suppressing the complexity of an effect.

In the embodiment and the modification, the low probability / first KT state is configured to end based on a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) of changing display. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the second KT state (in this example, high probability / second KT state) may also be configured to end based on a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of change display. Further, for example, it may be configured to shift from the first KT state to the second KT state based on execution of a predetermined number of fluctuation displays, and conversely, based on execution of a predetermined number of fluctuation displays, the second KT. You may comprise so that it may transfer to a 1st KT state from a state.

In the embodiment and the modification, the case where a plurality of big hit types are provided only for big hits is shown, but a plurality of small hit types may also be provided for small hits. In this case, for example, the special variable winning ball device 22 or the like may be configured to have different opening times depending on the small hit type, or the variable winning ball device to be opened may be different depending on the small hit type. Thus, the advantage may be different depending on the small hit type. In the case where the variable winning ball apparatus to be opened is different, for example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be opened and the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 may be opened depending on the type of small hit. Alternatively, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices for small hits may be provided, and it may be configured such that which special variable winning ball device is opened according to the small hit type.

Further, in this embodiment or modification, the transition is made to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state) mainly in the case of 16R probability variation big hit, and to the high probability / first KT state in the case of 6R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit. In the case of transition to the low probability / first KT state in the case of 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if it is the same jackpot type, it may be configured to have both a case of shifting to the first KT state and a case of shifting to the second KT state. In this case, for example, even when the same 6R probability variation big hit or 6R normal big hit is given, it may be configured to have both the case of shifting to the first KT state and the case of shifting to the second KT state.

In this embodiment and the modification, it is configured to be controlled to the KT state internally, but when controlled to the first KT state, a small hit is likely to occur. The special prize opening 24 rarely occurs, and when viewed from the player, it looks substantially the same as being controlled to a so-called high base state. Therefore, it is possible to realize the same gaming characteristics as a gaming machine controlled to a so-called high base state, not to give the player a sense of incongruity, and to realize a plurality of types of KT states having different advantages. , Can improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, “the ratio is different” means that the ratio is different due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. It is a concept that includes not only the ratio but also the ratio of A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols, “1” to “9”, background symbols (effect symbols), and normal symbols are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed has been shown. However, the variable display is not limited to such a mode. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

In the above-described embodiments and modifications, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. A circuit to be mounted may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

In the above-described embodiment and modification, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200. However, the game control microcomputer 560 is not connected to another board (for example, 4, a sound / lamp board having a function by a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function by a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35. ) May be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 200 performs the display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

In the above-described embodiment and modification, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of wagers are set when a medal is inserted, and the player operates the operation lever. A slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when a combination of stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when a plurality of types of symbols are rotated and the symbols are stopped according to the stop button operation by the player. It is also possible to apply to.

Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, an example using a gaming medium as a gaming machine is taken as an example, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as a game ball and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, there are probable big hits and normal big hits as the big hit types, and the gaming machines that are controlled to the probable state after the big hit game is finished based on the fact that the big hit types are determined as probable big hits. Although shown, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a probable state after completion.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later, the specific configuration thereof is also included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition within a range not departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown in the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the foregoing description and the following descriptions, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) advantageous to the player, and includes first identification information (for example, first identification information). Variable display execution means (for example, steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560) that can execute variable display of one special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (for example, second special symbol) in parallel A predetermined state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S358 to S360) that can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. And a normal state (for example, a non-KT state), and the execution time of the variable display of the second identification information is longer than the normal state. The state control means (for example, for game control) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) that is frequently controlled to a predetermined state by selecting a short variation time (for example, see FIG. 13). Steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B in the microcomputer 560, and a first hold storage unit (for example, a first hold memory) that can store information related to variable display of the first identification information as the first hold memory 1 hold storage buffer), 2nd hold storage means (for example, 2nd hold storage buffer) which can memorize | store the information regarding the variable display of 2nd identification information as 2nd hold memory, and the 1st corresponding to 1st hold memory Hold display (for example, the first hold display in the first hold display section 61) and the second hold table corresponding to the second hold memory (For example, the part that executes step S707 in the production control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying (for example, the second hold display in the second hold display section 62), the hold display means, In the normal state (for example, the non-KT state), the first hold display can be displayed, but the second hold display cannot be displayed (for example, if step S7073 is Y, step S7075 is executed, step S7077). Steps S7080 and S7082 are not executed when N is, and the light emitting unit (LED 9: left frame LED 9b, top frame LED 9a, right frame LED 9c, accessory LED, panel LED, light guide plate, segment display, dot display) Machine) (Pachinko machine 1 etc.) equipped with a device etc., and capable of performing a light emission effect using the light emitting part Means (effect control board 12: CPU 120 for effect control, etc.), and the light emission effect means is a first for causing the light emitting part to emit light in a light emission mode in which a specific color (monochrome: blue, green, red, etc.) is blinked. A specific pattern (light emission pattern table 1211 in FIG. 72: category: LP11 to LP13: light emission patterns LP11-1, LP12-1, LP13-1, etc.) and any one of a plurality of colors including the specific color The light emission effect can be executed by a second specific pattern (light emission pattern table 1211: category LP14: light emission pattern LP14-1 etc. in FIG. 72) that causes the light emitting section to emit light in a light emission mode that changes to the color of the light. The one specific pattern and the second specific pattern have different expectations (such as big hit reliability) for the player, and the specific color (E.g., the switching unit light emission time Δtn is shorter than the blinking unit light emission times Δto1 to Δto3, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the player's visibility with respect to the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage in the normal state can be reduced, and appropriate display control can be realized for the second hold display. . In addition, the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern have different expectation levels for the player, and the light emission period of the specific color is different, thereby enhancing the effect of the light production and improving the game entertainment. Can do.

  According to the said structure, interest can be improved. Moreover, it can be made to pay attention to another effect and a light emission part by disabling the 2nd hold display. Furthermore, the light emitting unit may be caused to emit light in various light emission patterns based on being controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) that is frequently controlled to a predetermined state. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that the state is controlled to the special state by the light emission mode of the light emitting unit.

  In addition, as an example, when a notice by holding display and light emitting means is executed, it can be estimated that the player will be a big hit according to the mode of the holding display and light emitting means, and the interest can be improved. Further, even when the special state is controlled after the big hit, the light emitting unit emits light, so that the player can focus on the light emitting means for a long period after the big hit.

  In addition, you may make it link | relate the expectation degree for the player in a light emission effect, and a 2nd hold display. For example, when the second hold display cannot be displayed in the normal state and the light emission effect with a high expectation is executed, the second hold display is intermittently performed to display the second hold display. Depending on the mode, an effect relating to the degree of expectation is performed (for example, the longer the display time per one in intermittent display, the higher the degree of expectation, the higher the number of display times in intermittent display, the higher the degree of expectation, and (The big hit is fixed when the second hold display is completely displayed). Alternatively, in a gaming machine configured to end when a special state (for example, KT state) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a variable number of times (for example, the 100th time) When a light emission effect with a high degree of expectation is executed, the effect relating to the expectation is also performed according to the display mode of the second hold display (for example, the second hold display is intermittently performed and the second hold display must disappear). If the second hold display disappears, it may not be a big hit and remain in the normal state. If it does in this way, the production | presentation which concerns on an expectation degree can be performed also with the display mode of a 2nd hold display, and an interest will improve.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the gaming interest, the light emitting part (LED 909: left frame LED 909b, top frame LED 909a, right frame LED 909c, accessory LED, board LED, lead LED A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 901) equipped with a light plate, a seg display, a dot display, etc., and capable of performing a light emission effect using the light emitting unit (effect control board 9012: effect control) CPU90120 etc.)
The light emission effecting unit is configured to emit a first specific pattern (light emission pattern table 901211: Category: LP11 to LP13 in FIG. 136) that causes the light emitting unit to emit light in a light emission mode in which specific colors (monochrome: blue, green, red, etc.) are blinked. Light emission patterns LP11-1, LP12-1, LP13-1, and the like) and a second specification that causes the light emitting unit to emit light in a light emission mode in which any one of a plurality of colors including the specific color is changed to another color. The light emission effect can be executed by a pattern (light emission pattern table 901121: category LP14: light emission pattern LP14-1 in FIG. 136), and the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern are expected for the player. Degrees (big hit reliability, etc.) and the light emission periods of the specific colors are different (FIG. 138: switching unit light emission time Δtn) Flashing unit emission time shorter than Δto1~Δto3 etc.), game machine and the like, characterized in that. Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 65 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board. In the following, the front side of FIG. 65 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is viewed from the front side are shown. This will be explained as a standard. Note that the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment is a facing surface that faces a player who plays a game on the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  FIG. 65 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. A pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as a gaming machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. 903. A game area 9010 having a substantially circular shape in front view surrounded by the guide rail 902b is formed in the game board 902. In this game area 9010, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a ball striking device (not shown) and driven. Further, the gaming machine frame 903 is provided with a glass door frame 9050 having a glass window 9050a so as to be rotatable about the left side, and the gaming area 9010 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 9050. When the glass door frame 9050 is closed, the game area 9010 can be seen through the glass window 9050a.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the game board 902 is formed of a synthetic resin material having translucency such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, and a methacrylic resin in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. It is mainly composed of a panel board (not shown) provided with a guide rail 902b and the like, and a spacer member (not shown) attached integrally to the back side of the board board. The game board 902 is configured by a non-translucent member such as a veneer board in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is provided on a board surface board in which obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 902b, etc. are provided on the front game board surface. May be configured.

  A first special symbol display 904A and a second special symbol display 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 65, the lower right position of the game area 9010). Each of the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like, and identifies each of them in a special graphic game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as “special”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, is variably displayed (also referred to as variable display or variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 904A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 904B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. .

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 9010 on the game board 902, an effect display device 905 is provided as a display means. The effect display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 905, the first special symbol display 904A by the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B by the second special symbol display 904B in the special graphic game respectively. In the effect symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display units such as three, for example, the effect symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variation display of the effect symbol is also included in the variation display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged in the display area of the effect display device 905. When the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special game, the effect is displayed in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the effect display device 905. The finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) that is the symbol variation display result is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 905, the special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display 904A or the special special game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display 904B. In synchronism with the game, a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner, and a definite effect symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols is to stop display of identification information such as effect symbols (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and end the variable display. .

  For example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters) are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. It may be any combination of numbers, English letters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. Character images may be, for example, people, animals, other objects, or , A decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure). A corresponding symbol number is attached to each of the effect symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. The production symbols are not limited to eight types, and any number may be used (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured.

  A first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B are provided above the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B. In each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B, the hold memory number (the number of the special figure hold memory) as the number of the variable storage hold memory information corresponding to the special figure game is displayed in an identifiable manner. Memory display is performed.

  Here, the variable display corresponding to the special game is suspended by the game ball passing through the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning port formed by the normal variable ball device 906B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). In other words, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  In the first special symbol display 904A, it is possible to specify the number of reserved memory information (first reserved memory information) generated based on the first start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening. The first special figure reserved memory number is displayed by lighting of the LED (the number of lights). The second hold indicator 9025B is capable of specifying the number of hold storage information (second hold storage information) generated based on the second start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening. 2 The special figure reserved memory number is displayed by turning on the LED (the number of lights).

  A first hold display area 905 </ b> D and a second hold display area 905 </ b> U are set in two places on the left and right in the display area of the effect display device 905. In the first hold display area 905D, the first special figure hold memory number that can specify the number of the first hold memory information generated based on the first start winning is displayed by the number of the sphere (circular) hold images H. Is done. In the second hold display area 905U, the second special figure hold memory number capable of specifying the number of second hold memory information generated based on the second start winning is displayed by the number of images of the sphere (circular) hold image H. Is done.

  In the first hold display area 905D, the hold image H is displayed in such a manner that the hold image increases on the left side every time the first hold storage information is generated, and the variable display based on the first hold storage information is executed. Every time, the hold image H at the right end corresponding to the first hold storage information is erased, and display is performed in which the remaining hold images H are shifted rightward one by one. In the second hold display area 905U, the hold image is displayed in such a manner that the hold image H increases on the right side whenever the second hold storage information is generated, and the variable display based on the second hold storage information is executed. Each time, the hold image H at the left end corresponding to the second hold storage information is erased, and display is performed in which the remaining hold images are shifted leftward one by one.

  The variation corresponding display corresponding to the variation display is shown during execution of the variation display corresponding to the retained display that has been erased (moved or shifted) from each of the first hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U. An active display area AHA for displaying an image (hereinafter referred to as an active image or an active display) AH is formed in the central portion of the hold display area. In the active display area AHA, the hold image H displayed in the first hold display area 905D or the second hold display area 905U has been displayed so far, for example, moved (shifted) to the active display area. The active image AH is displayed in such a manner that it can be identified that it corresponds to the reserved image. The active display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the effect display device 905.

  In the hold display area, the hold storage information may be displayed in a combined display mode without distinguishing the first hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U. Such a summed pending storage display makes it easy to grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition.

  With respect to the hold image H displayed in each of the first hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U, the hold display mode in which the hold display mode is changed before the variable display of the target hold storage information is executed. A change effect may be executed. In the hold display mode change effect, the display mode such as the color or shape of the hold image H is changed.

  For example, the color of the reserved image H can be changed to blue, green, and red. When it is determined that the hold display mode change effect is to be executed at a predetermined rate, and the variable display result based on the hold storage information of the effect is a jackpot display result, the change after the change is made at a ratio of blue <green <red. On the other hand, when the color of the reserved image H is selected and determined, and when the variation display result is an outlier display result, the color of the reserved image H after the change is selected and determined at a ratio of red <green <blue. Thereby, the expectation degree to the big hit based on the color of the hold image H after the change when the hold display mode change effect is executed is set to have a ratio of blue <green <red. Therefore, when the hold display mode change effect is executed, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit based on the color of the hold image after the change.

  Also, for the active image AH, similarly to the hold image H, a display mode change effect is executed, and the display mode such as the color or shape of the hold image H is changed. The display mode change effect of such active display is also determined in a manner in which the degree of expectation for jackpot can be specified at the same selection ratio as the hold display mode change effect, and the display mode such as the color or shape after the change is determined. The Note that the display mode change effect need not be executed for the active display.

  Below the effect display device 905, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B has an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that are changed between a normal open state that is a vertical position and an enlarged open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 9081 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a second starting prize opening is formed as a starting region (second starting region).

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It becomes an expanded open state that is easy to enter.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 907 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big prize opening door is in the OFF state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, and the game ball passes through the big prize opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, when the special prize winning device 907 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special winning prize opening. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 9020 is provided above the second reserved display 9025B. As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Is displayed (variable display) so that it can be variably displayed. Such a normal symbol variation display is referred to as a general game (also referred to as a “normal game”).

  Above the normal symbol display device 9020, a general symbol hold display device 9025C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 9041.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area 9010, there is provided an out port through which a game ball that has not entered any winning port is taken.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and the top frame LED 909a provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the gaming area 9010. A left frame LED 909b and a right frame LED 909c are provided. In this embodiment, the top frame LED 909a is provided above the front frame, the left frame LED 909b is provided on the left side of the front frame, and the right frame LED 909c is provided on the right side of the front frame. Yes. The game board 902 is also provided with board-side LEDs 909d and 909e. In this embodiment, a board-side LED 909 d is provided on the left side of the game board 902, and a board-side LED 909 e is provided on the right side of the game board 902. Note that decorative LEDs are arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the game area 9010 of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Also good.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area 9010 is provided. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor provided in a hitting ball shooting device (not shown).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area 9010, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied to a launching device (not shown). An upper plate (hit ball supply tray) that is held (stored) is provided. A lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided below the gaming machine frame 903.

  A stick controller 9031A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes.

  A controller sensor unit 9035A for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower plate main body or the like below the stick controller 9031A. For example, the controller sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 901. And a pair of transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including a shape photosensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 9031A). Is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to detect the pressing operation from the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 9035B that detects a pressing operation performed by the player on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the normal symbol display 9020 displays that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 provided in the gaming area 9010 is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. 66. The normal symbol indicator is displayed on the basis of the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the previous general symbol game has been completed The usual game by 9020 is started.

  In this normal game, after a normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time which is a normal symbol change time has elapsed, a fixed normal symbol which is a normal symbol change display result is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as a fixed ordinary symbol, the fluctuation display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is “usually lost”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is “per normal figure”, the expansion opening control (tilting control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 906B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by the first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 66, for example, On the basis of the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit gaming state, the special game by the first special symbol display 904A is started. In addition, the second start condition is satisfied because, for example, the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by the second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Later, the special game by the second special symbol display 904B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special game with the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B, after the variable display time as the special symbol variation time has elapsed after the special symbol variation display is started, the special symbol variation display is performed. Determining and displaying a definite special symbol (a special graph display result) as a result. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, “ It will be “losing”. In addition, a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. When the predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) as a result of the predetermined display is stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to control to the small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  After the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, a round that is advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state (advantageous state). Be controlled.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is the lose symbol. . When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, a special symbol indicating the number “2” may be used as the small hit symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 904A may be different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display 904B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” as the special symbols for the special figure game is stopped and displayed as the “big hit” as the specific display result, it is specially variable in the jackpot game state. In a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls is generated in the big winning door of the winning ball apparatus 907 , Open the grand prize opening. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize opening device that opens the grand prize opening during the execution of a round receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 902 and then closes the special prize opening, thereby providing a special variable winning ball apparatus. 907 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “16”, etc.). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Among rounds in the big hit game state, rounds in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) are normally open. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  If the small hit symbol (for example, the number “2”) is stopped and displayed, after the small hit symbol is derived as a confirmed special symbol, the small hit symbol is controlled as a special gaming state. good. Specifically, in the small hit game state, for example, in the same way as in the short-term open big hit game state in which a practically no ball (prize ball) is obtained, the special variable winning ball device 907 is used for the player. What is necessary is just to perform the variable winning operation | movement changed to the advantageous 1st state (open state).

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the effect display device 905, a special game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 904A and In response to the start of one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 904B, the variation display of the effect symbol is started. The period from the start of the variation display of the effect symbol to the end of the variation display due to the stop display of the confirmed effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Then, the variation display state of the effect symbol may be a predetermined reach state.

  Here, the reach state refers to an effect design that has not yet been stopped when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 905 constitute a part of the jackpot combination ("reach fluctuation symbols"). Is also a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the design symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L and 905R, etc.) in advance. The remaining effect symbol display area (for example, “medium” effect) that has not been stopped yet when the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol indicating the alphanumeric character of “7”) constituting the determined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display area 905C, etc.), the presentation symbol is a display state in which the effect symbol fluctuates or the effect symbol is a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R This is a display state that changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol is reduced, or a character image (an effect image imitating a person) different from the effect symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 905. Or change the display mode of the background image, play and display a moving image that is different from the production symbol, or change the variation mode of the production symbol, so that the production operation different from before reaching the reach state is executed May be. Such an effect operation such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the change mode of the effect pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the effect display device 905 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, and the light emitting body such as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e. The lighting operation (flashing operation), the operation of the movable member 90321, and the like may be included in an operation mode different from the operation mode before the reach state.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of being a “hit” (also referred to as “reliability”, “hit reliability”, “expectation”, or “hit expectation”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation display state of the production symbol does not reach the reach state after the variation display of the production symbol is started. In addition, a definite effect design that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variation display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation display state of the production symbol becomes reach after the variation display of the production symbol starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed effect symbol that becomes a predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variation display result is “losing”.

  Corresponding to the fact that the variation display state of the production symbol has reached the reach state when the jackpot symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol that becomes a jackpot symbol as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game Then, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as “non-probable big hit combination”) among a plurality of types of big hit combinations is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the non-probable big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as the confirmed effect symbol without the reach effect being executed.

  The confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination (non-probable variation jackpot combination) is variably displayed in, for example, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the effect display device 905. Among the effect symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, any one of the effect symbols having the even symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The effect symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”).

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the finalized symbol of the normal jackpot combination (non-probable variable jackpot combination) is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. It should be noted that a normal jackpot combination (non-probable variation jackpot combination) may be stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol without executing the reach effect. Based on the fact that the variation display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the game is controlled to the normally open big hit gaming state, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the special symbol change display time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. In the short-time control, so-called electric chew support is performed in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency to the normal variable winning ball device 906B is increased as described later. Here, the normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, when a system reset is performed, after the power is turned on) The same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed is performed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state is finished, and the fluctuation display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  In the special symbol game, among the special symbols that become jackpot symbols, if the probability variation jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the numbers “5” and “7” is stopped and displayed, the change display state of the effect symbol In response to the reach state, after a reach effect similar to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” is executed, a predetermined probability variation big hit combination among a plurality of types of big hit combinations There are cases where the determined effect design is stopped and displayed. Note that the probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol without executing the reach effect. The confirmed effect symbol that is a probable big hit combination is, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the effect display device 905. Among the effect symbols of “8”, effect symbols whose symbol numbers are “5” or “7” are displayed in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Any device that can be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line may be used. The effect symbols having the symbol numbers “5” and “7” constituting the probability variation jackpot combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the effect symbol.

  Regardless of whether the confirmed effect symbol is a normal big hit combination or a probable big hit combination, the variable display mode in which the probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game will have a "big hit" fluctuation display result. This is referred to as a variation display mode of “probability variation” (also referred to as “big hit type”). In this embodiment, among the big hit types of “probable change”, the normal open big hit gaming state is based on the fact that “5” and “7” change display results are “big hit” as the confirmed special symbols. After the completion, probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time reduction control.

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the fluctuation display result (special display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than that in the normal state. The certainty control may be ended when the condition that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled again in the big hit gaming state after the big hit gaming state is ended. As with the time reduction control, the probability variation control is ended when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times the same as the time reduction number or 90 times different from the time reduction number) are executed after the big hit gaming state is finished. May be. In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation falling lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) in the normal game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the normal symbol change in each normal game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control (electricity support control) that is advantageous to the player by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied is performed. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening along with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. In this embodiment, the gaming state to be controlled is not set, but the probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the time reduction control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. . Further, only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of time-shortening control and probability variation control is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the probability that the special-figure game can be executed frequently and the fluctuation display result in each special-figure game will be “big hit” As a result, the player is in an advantageous state. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the game state is not changed after the control to the small hit game state described above, and the game state before the change display result becomes “small hit” is displayed. Control may be continued.

  Various control boards such as a main board 9011 and an effect control board 9012 as shown in FIG. 66 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. Further, a drive control board 9016B and light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F are mounted as control boards connected to the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back of the game board 902 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 9012 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 9011 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and performs the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 9020 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 9020 or the like. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 9011 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, and a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-board control board independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and produces an effect display device 905, speakers 908L and 908R. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e, the movable portion 90302, and the movable member 90321 are mounted. In other words, the effect control board 9012 displays the display operation in the effect display device 905, or all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame provided on the game frame side. Predetermined electrical parts for production such as LED 909c, all or part of lighting / extinguishing operation of board side LEDs 909d, 909e provided on game board 902 side, all or part of operation of movable part 90302 and movable member 90321 The function of determining the control content for executing the production operation is provided.

  The effect control board 9012 is connected to wiring for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 905, wiring for transmitting an audio signal (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 9013, and the like. . In addition, wiring for transmitting various signals to the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the light emitter control board 9016D is also connected via the effect control relay board 9016A.

  The information signal transmitted to the drive control board 9016B is a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for operating the movable portion 90302 or the movable member 90321 by driving the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330. It only has to be included.

  The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016C may include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e.

  If the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016D includes a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as the left frame LED 909b on the left side of the gaming machine frame 903. Good. The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016E may include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as the top frame LEDs 909a above the gaming machine frame 903. That's fine. The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016F includes a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as the right frame LEDs 909c on the right side of the gaming machine frame 903. It only has to be.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016D is relayed only from the effect control relay board 9016A from the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012. Then transmitted. The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016E is transmitted from the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 via the light emitter control board 9016D in addition to the effect control relay board 9016A. Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016F is relayed from the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 to the light emitter control board 9016D and the light emitter control board 9016E in addition to the effect control relay board 9016A. Then transmitted.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted.

  The effect control relay board 9016A is installed in a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 902, and transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the light emitter control board 9016D. Relay various signals. The back pack is attached to the center portion on the back side of the game board 902, and an opening that the effect display device 905 faces may be formed in the center. The back pack may be provided so as to cover the main board 9011, the sound control board 9013, the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the like from the rear. An effect control board box in which the effect control board 9012 is accommodated may be attached to the rear side of the back pack.

  The drive control board 9016B is a control board for drive control provided separately from the effect control board 9012. Based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012, the rotation control of the movable portion 90302 and the movable control board 9016B are controlled. A driver IC or the like for performing movement control of the member 90321 is mounted. An output signal from the drive control board 9016B is transmitted toward the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330.

  The light emitter control board 9016C is mounted on the game board 902, and is a light emitter output control board provided separately from the effect control board 9012. Based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012, the board Various circuits for driving a light emitter for performing lighting control on a plurality of light emitters provided as side LEDs 909d and 909e are mounted.

  The light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are mounted on the gaming machine frame 903, and are light emitter output control boards provided separately from the effect control board 9012. Commands, control data, etc. from the effect control board 9012, etc. Based on the above, various circuits for driving a light emitter for performing lighting control on a plurality of light emitters provided as a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c are mounted.

  In addition to the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F, for example, a board for controlling the lighting of the light emitting unit 90321A provided on the movable member 90321 is also arranged in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the main board 9011 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023. The gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. The main board 9011 includes a first special symbol display 904A, a second special symbol display 904B, a normal symbol display 9020, a first hold indicator 9025A, a second hold indicator 9025B, and an ordinary figure hold indicator 9025C. A wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. In the effect control command, for example, the variation time of the effect symbol, the type of reach effect, and the pseudo-ream (originally one variation corresponding to one reserved memory, multiple times corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories) It is an effect display that makes it appear as if the fluctuations are continuously performed. One start is made to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one start winning prize. Fluctuations that indicate fluctuation modes such as presence / absence of temporary stop and re-variation for a predetermined number of times for all symbol sequences (left, middle, right) within the fluctuation time determined for winning. A variation pattern designation command indicating a pattern, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the effect display device 905, and a voice control output from the speakers 908L and 908R are used. Used to control the lighting control commands used to control the lighting operation of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e, the operation of the movable member 90321, etc. Drive control commands and the like to be included.

  A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. Random Access Memory (RAM) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a game control program and performs a control operation, and updates numeric data indicating random numbers independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 to perform and an input / output port (I / O) 90105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by the CPU 90103 executing a program read from the ROM 90101. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, the CPU 90103 writes various data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 90103 stores various data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  As shown in FIG. 66, an effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, an ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and an effect control CPU 90120 work area. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random values independently of the RAM 90122, the display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 905, and the effect control CPU 90120 A circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component. At this time, the production control CPU 90120 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121, the production control CPU 90120 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90122, and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the production control CPU 90120 enters the RAM 90122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and the presentation control CPU 90120 is an I / O. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 through O90125 is also performed. The electric components related to the execution of the effect control such as the effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 on the effect control board 9012 are also referred to as an effect control microcomputer.

  In this embodiment, the effect display device 905 is arranged on the back side of the game board 902 and can be visually recognized through the opening 902c formed in the game board 902. A frame-shaped center decoration frame 9051 is provided in the opening 902c of the game board 902. Further, an effect unit 90300 is provided between the back of the game board 902 and the effect display device 905, and various motors (first effect motor 90303, first effect motor 90303, A plurality of electronic components such as a second effect motor 90330), a solenoid, a sensor, and a light emitting diode (LED) are connected. In FIG. 66, these electronic components other than the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 are not shown.

  Note that, similarly to the main board 9011, for example, a random number value (also referred to as an effect random number) for determining various types of effects such as a notice effect is set on the side of the effect control board 9012.

  The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 66 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation, in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 90121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. Yes.

  As an example, in the ROM 90121, a CPU 90120 for effect control includes various effect devices (for example, effect display devices 905 and speakers 908L and 908R, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, panel side LEDs 909d and 909e, movable member 90321, An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns used for controlling the effect operation by the effect model etc. is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, an effect control pattern during special figure change, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. It consists of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in effect symbol variation display operation, reach effect, re-lottery effect, etc., or various effect display operations not accompanied by effect symbol variation display Has been. The notice effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed in response to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  In the special-figure variation production control pattern, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns with different production modes in each reach production may be included for each variation pattern that executes the reach production.

  In addition, examples of the notice effect that is executed during the change display of the effect symbol include, for example, a movable notice that the movable member 90321 as a movable body (movable object) is lifted as described later, and the player can use the stick controller 9031A or the push button. Big hits such as an operation notice executed on the condition that 9031B is operated, a step-up notice that a predetermined image is switched step by step, a line notice that a character appears and hits a line, a cut-in notice that a predetermined image is interrupted and displayed Jackpot announcement effect that suggests the possibility of reach, reach notice that suggests whether to become reach, pseudo-continuous notice that informs whether or not to become a quasi-ream, stop-symbol notice that announces a stop symbol, game state probability At the start of variable display or at the beginning of a variable display, such as a latent announcement for notifying whether or not it is in a fluctuating state Comprising a plurality of notice to be executed in the time switch satisfied.

  FIG. 67 (1) shows a configuration example of the drive control board 9016B. As shown in FIG. 67 (1), a motor drive driver 90412 is mounted on the drive control board 9016B. The motor drive driver 90412 receives a control signal from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 9016A. Then, the motor drive driver 90412 performs drive control of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 based on the drive control information indicated by the input control signal.

  FIG. 67 (2) shows a configuration example of a light emitter control board 9016C for performing lighting control of the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e. As shown in FIG. 67 (2), light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C. The luminous body driver 90411a receives a control signal from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 9016A. The light emitter driver 90411a performs lighting control of the panel-side LED 909d based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. Further, a control signal from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is input to the light emitter driver 90411b in a serial signal format via the effect control relay board 9016A and further via the light emitter driver 90411a. . The light emitter driver 90411b performs lighting control of the panel-side LED 909e based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (2), in the light emitter control board 9016C, the control signals transmitted from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 9016C. By being transmitted (in this example, transmitted from the light emitter driver 90411a to the light emitter driver 90411b), it is configured to be transmitted to each light emitter driver.

  FIG. 68 shows a configuration example of the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F for performing lighting control of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. As shown in FIG. 68, a light emitter driver 90413b is mounted on the light emitter control board 9016D. The luminous body driver 90413b receives a control signal from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 9016A. The luminous body driver 90413b performs lighting control of the left frame LED 909b based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. In FIG. 68, the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are connected to each other via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a wire harness.

  As shown in FIG. 68, a light emitter driver 90413a is mounted on the light emitter control board 9016E. A control signal from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is input to the light emitter driver 90413a in the serial signal format via the effect control relay board 9016A and further via the light emitter control board 9016D. The The light emitter driver 90413a performs lighting control of the top frame LED 909a based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  As shown in FIG. 68, a light emitter driver 90413c is mounted on the light emitter control board 9016F. The light emitter driver 90413c receives a control signal from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A, and further via the light emitter control board 9016D and the light emitter control board 9016E. Input in serial signal format. The light emitter driver 90413c performs lighting control of the right frame LED 909c based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  68, in the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the control signals transmitted from the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 are respectively mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F. By sequentially transmitting between the drivers 90413a to 90413c, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are respectively transmitted.

  In this embodiment, the LEDs provided on the game board 902 are comprehensively expressed as board-side LEDs 909d and 909e. Specifically, the board-side LED 909d is located on the left side of the game board 902. A plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided, and a plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided on the right side of the game board 902 as the board side LED 909e. Further, in this embodiment, each LED provided in the game frame is comprehensively expressed as a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c, but specifically, above the game frame. A plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided as the top frame LED 909a, a plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided as the left frame LED 909b on the left side of the game frame, and the right side of the game frame. It is assumed that a plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided as the right frame LED 909c.

  In this embodiment, the lighting control of the motor driver 90412, the light-emitting drivers 90411a and 90411b for controlling the lighting of the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e, and the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c is performed. The light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are realized using the same type of serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)). FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a serial-parallel conversion circuit used as the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG. 69.

  The serial-parallel conversion circuits used as the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c convert an input serial signal format signal into a 24-channel parallel signal format signal. There are two types, one that outputs the signal in the serial signal format and the other that converts the signal in the 12-channel parallel signal format and outputs it. However, the number of circuit elements and terminals is limited. 69 and 70 are representative of the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, and the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is representative of the same configuration and functions. Only the differences will be described. In this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b are realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel converter circuit, and the motor driver 909042 and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel converter circuit. Realized.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the serial / parallel conversion circuit receives a clock signal from the effect control CPU 90120 via the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitter control boards 9016D and 16E. A DATA / I terminal for inputting terminals and data is provided. In addition, a part of the input clock signal and data is branched in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and can be directly output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit. A DATA / O terminal for through output is provided.

  For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the light emitter driver 90413b of the light emitter control board 9016D receives the control signal (clock signal and data) input via the effect control relay board 9016A. Although the light is output to the light emitter driver 90413a of the control board 9016E, the clock signal and the data are respectively transmitted from the CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit realizing the light emitter driver 90413b. Are output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the above. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the light emitter driver 90413a of the light emitter control board 9016E receives control signals (via the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitter control board 9016D). Clock signal and data) are output to the light emitter driver 90413c of the light emitter control board 9016F, and the clock is supplied from the CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit for realizing the light emitter driver 90413a. Signals and data are configured to be output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that implements the light emitter driver 90413c.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the clock signal input from the CLK / I terminal and the other part of the data input from the DATA / I terminal are input to the decoder so that 24 channels from the serial signal format can be obtained. Are decoded into parallel signal format signals. Then, after being stored once in each register provided in the register block, pulse width modulation (PWM) is performed using an internal clock signal (in this example, an internal clock signal of 6 MHz) by an internal oscillation clock circuit. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the case of a 12-channel circuit, it is converted into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11. The output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are supplied to a light emitter such as an LED or to an operation motor.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with terminals AD0 to AD4 for inputting decode addresses (AD0 to AD5 in a 12-channel circuit). By setting each to H (high) or L (low), it is possible to set an address for each serial-parallel conversion circuit. Address data is also included in the data input from DATA / I, and the serial-parallel converter circuit decodes only data that matches the address set in the address information included in the input data into signals in parallel signal format. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23.

  In the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since five terminals AD0 to AD4 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 32 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 32 serial-parallel conversions are possible. Circuits can be connected. In the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since six terminals AD0 to AD5 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 64 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 64 serial-parallel conversions are possible. Circuits can be connected.

  The S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the slew rate of the through output of the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal. . When the S terminal is set to L (low), the clock signal and data through output is set to a normal slew rate output, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the clock signal and data through output has a low slew rate. Set to output.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for describing the slew rate setting of the clock signal and data through output. As shown in FIG. 71 (1), when the S terminal is set to L (low) and set to normal slew rate output, the rising and falling slopes of the clock signal and data waveforms (voltage change per unit time) Amount) is somewhat large. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (2), when the S terminal is set to H (high) and set to a low slew rate output, the clock signal and The rising and falling slopes of the data waveform become gentle.

  In general, in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate, it is better to keep the slew rate low, and it is better to set the output to the low slew rate shown in FIG. 71 (2). On the other hand, in order to ensure resistance to noise, it is better that the slope of the waveform rises or falls, and it is better to set the output of the normal slew rate shown in FIG.

  Note that the setting of the S terminal is not only to set the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the waveform of the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal, but also to the clock signal and DATA input from the CLK / I terminal. A function of compensating the output waveform for data input from the / I terminal is provided. That is, generally, the clock signal and data output from the CPU 90120 for effect control etc. are output as a rectangular wave at the output stage, but reach the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. When the transmission loss due to the wiring until this time is large, a clock signal or data having a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave may be input. In this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion circuit does not simply output the input clock signal or data as it is, but in this way the clock signal or data input in a state of a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave. Has a function of compensating for and outputting a waveform close to the original rectangular wave. In this case, if the output of the normal slew rate is set by the setting of the S terminal, the output signal is compensated for a waveform having a large rising or falling slope, so that the output signal is in a state closer to the original rectangular wave. Can be output, and the influence of external noise can be reduced. However, since the voltage change amount increases momentarily when the rising or falling slope is large, there is a risk that radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate will increase. On the other hand, if the output of the low slew rate is set by setting the S terminal, the waveform is compensated and output with a smaller rising and falling slope. Although it is weak against the influence of noise, the instantaneous voltage change amount can be reduced, and radio wave radiation outside the substrate can be suppressed from increasing.

  In addition, it may be configured to enable or disable the function for compensating the output waveform, and all the functions for compensating the output waveform may be disabled. The function of compensating the output waveform may be realized outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit by providing an amplifier circuit or the like outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit.

  Furthermore, in the above normal slew rate output setting, the output waveform was compensated so that the rising and falling slopes were larger than the rising and falling slopes of the input waveform. As an output setting, the input waveform may be output as it is without compensating the output waveform (that is, the output waveform having a rising edge equivalent to the rising edge of the input waveform as a predetermined mode). In this case, in the low slew rate output setting, it is only necessary to output a waveform whose slope is smaller than the rising edge of the input waveform.

  A T terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting a time-out reset function for signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. Setting the T terminal to L (low) sets the timeout reset function to an invalid state, and setting the terminal to H (high) sets the timeout reset function to an enabled state.

  When the T terminal is set to H (high) and the time-out reset function is enabled, the clock signal and data are input from the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal, and the signal output is output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. After the start, when a predetermined period (1 second in this example) elapses, it is assumed that a time-out has occurred, and the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are automatically reset (output stopped). Accordingly, when the time-out reset function is set to the valid state, when it is desired to continuously supply signals to the LEDs and the operation motor from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, for example, from the effect control CPU 90120 for at least a predetermined period. It is necessary to repeatedly output a control signal every (in this example, 1 second).

  In this embodiment, the production control CPU 90120 performs a process of rewriting the control signal every 10 ms. When the output from each drive output terminal is continued, the production control CPU 90120 is produced every 10 ms. By repeatedly outputting a control signal to the serial-parallel conversion circuit, output from each drive output terminal is continued even if the timeout reset function is set to the valid state.

  A Q / S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting a drive system of signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q / S terminal is set to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs. Further, when the Q / S terminal is set to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be the sync output.

  The Q / I terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting whether to invert the output logic of signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q / I terminal is set to L (low), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be normally output without being inverted. When the Q / I terminal is set to H (high), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted.

  The R terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a current reference setting terminal. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69, the R terminal is connected to each of the drive output terminals A0 to A23 via a constant current circuit, and an external resistor having an arbitrary resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). By connecting resistors, it is possible to set the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 within a predetermined range (for example, 4 mA to 20 mA).

  The VP terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a protective electrostatic protection terminal. A power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal. That is, if a power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal, an overvoltage higher than the power supply voltage can be released. When a plurality of types of power supply voltages are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the power supply voltage having the higher voltage value may be connected to the VP terminal.

  Next, the control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control data format. The basic control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit is composed of a common format shown in FIG. 72 (1) and a basic format shown in FIG. 72 (2).

  As shown in FIG. 72 (1), the common format includes a 9-bit header (HD), a 4-bit device ID (ID), a 5-bit decode address AD0 to AD4 (see FIGS. 69 and 70), and 1 Consists of bit EX data. The EX data is for setting whether the control data format following the common format is a basic format or an extended format described later, and EX = 0 is set in the basic format.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (2), the basic format includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. For example, when transmitting data for performing LED lighting control, lighting control including LED gradation control is performed by setting and transmitting 6-bit data in time series for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. It can be performed.

  As the control data format, an extended format can be used instead of the basic format shown in FIG. Specifically, if EX = 1 is set in the common format shown in FIG. 72 (1), the control data format following the common format becomes the extended format shown in FIG. 72 (3).

  As shown in FIG. 72 (3), the extended format includes binary data of 1 bit for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the extended format, the data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is composed of 1 bit, so that the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit can be reduced. For example, in the case where the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 are driven and controlled using a serial-parallel conversion circuit, the gradation control is performed unlike the case where the lighting control of the light emitter such as the LED is performed. Since there is no need to do so, it is effective to use an extended format as shown in FIG.

  72, the control data format used in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described. However, in the control data format used in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, for example, the common control data format shown in FIG. The difference is that the format includes 6-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD5. Further, for example, the basic format shown in FIG. 72 (2) is different in that the basic format is shorter because it includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels. Further, for example, the extended format shown in FIG. 72 (3) is different in that it is short because it includes binary data of 1 bit for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels.

  Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured so that the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is dispersed to spread the spectrum, thereby preventing radiation noise and suppressing radio wave radiation. . FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. In this embodiment, a 6 MHz clock signal is output from the internal oscillation clock circuit incorporated in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 73, the 6 MHz internal clock signal is converted to a 1 MHz 6-phase clock signal. The drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, group 1 is constituted by four channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3, group 2 is constituted by four channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7, and drive output terminals Q8 to Q8. Group 3 is composed of four channels Q11, group 4 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q12 to Q15, group 5 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q16 to Q19, and drive output terminals Q20 to Q23. Group 6 is composed of four channels. As shown in FIG. 73, the signal output timing is the same between the drive output terminals in the same group (for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in the group 1), but the drive output terminals ( For example, the output timing is distributed between the drive output terminal Q0 of group 1 and the drive output terminal Q4) of group 2.

  73, the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described. However, in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, an internal clock signal of 6 MHz is converted to 1 MHz. The signals are separated into three-phase clock signals, and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are grouped into three groups of four channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

  Next, connection examples in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73 is used as the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b, the motor driver 909042, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c will be described. 74 to 76 are explanatory diagrams for explaining connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Among these, FIG. 74 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b for controlling the lighting of the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e. FIG. 75 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330. FIG. 76 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c.

  First, with reference to FIG. 74, a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b for controlling the lighting of the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b for controlling the lighting of the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e are realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit.

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, the address [02] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90411a (see FIG. 88), and as shown in FIG. 74, the terminals AD0 to AD4 for inputting decode addresses are provided. Of these, AD1 is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD0, AD2 to AD4 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is set to 0010 (B) = [02]. .

  74 shows a decoding address setting mode in the light emitter driver 90411a. However, as will be described later, the address [03] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90411b (see FIG. 88). Of the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD4, AD0 and AD1 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V), AD2 to AD4 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 00001 (B) = [03]. Will be set to.

  In the example shown in FIG. 74, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67 (2), the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b for controlling the lighting of the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e are all mounted on the same light emitter control board 9016C. Since the transmission of the control signal between the drivers is performed on the same light emitter control board 9016C (the transmission across the board is not performed), it is not necessary to worry about the resistance to noise. In view of this, by setting the through output of the clock signal and the data to a low slew rate output, the radio wave radiation from the substrate is rather suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 74, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 74, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 74, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 MA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 74, the power supply voltage VCL (5 V) is connected to the VP terminal, and protection is performed so as to release an overvoltage of 5 V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 74, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are connected to the panel LEDs 909d and 909e. In the example shown in FIG. 74, for the sake of convenience, a diagram in which one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal is shown. However, when a color LED is connected as a light emitter, it is used for RGB. You may comprise so that three terminals may be connected to one color LED, and if a single color LED is used as a light-emitting body, you may comprise so that one terminal may be connected to one single color LED. . Further, for example, a plurality of single color LEDs may be connected in series to one terminal.

  In the example shown in FIG. 74, the case where the light emitters are connected to all of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is shown. However, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0 are changed according to the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q23, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

  Next, an example of connection when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 75, in this embodiment, the motor drive driver 90412 for controlling the drive of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 is realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. The

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, the address [04] is allocated to the motor drive driver 90412 (see FIG. 88), and as shown in FIG. 75, the terminals AD0 to AD5 for inputting decode addresses are provided. Of these, AD2 is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V), AD0, AD1, AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is set to 000100 (B) = [04]. ing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 75, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67 (1), since the control signal is not transmitted between the motor drive driver 90412 and another driver, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). Connection (set to L (low)) may be set so that the through output of the clock signal and data becomes the output of the normal slew rate.

  In the example shown in FIG. 75, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 75, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to become sink outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to H (high). Thus, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 75, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 MA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 75, the power supply voltage VCC (5V) is connected to the VP terminal, and protection is performed so as to release an overvoltage of 5V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 75, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the four channel terminals Q0 to Q3 of the group 1 having the same output timing are connected to the first first effect motor 90303. . Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the second second effect motor 90330. In this embodiment, since the two operation motors, the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330, are controlled, and the terminals Q8 to Q11 of the group 3 are not necessary, the Q8 to The terminal of Q11 is connected to the ground (GND).

  As already described, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is distributed by being grouped into three groups of groups 1-3. If the output timing differs between the signals output to the same operation motor (in this example, the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330), the drive accuracy of the operation motor may not be maintained. There is. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, the signals input to the same operation motor are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group, and the drive accuracy of the operation motor is thus set. It prevents the situation that can not be maintained.

  Conversely, for example, when connecting to the light emitting body such as when connecting to the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e described in FIG. 74, or when connecting to the top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, and right frame LED 909c of FIG. Therefore, since the problem of the driving accuracy as described above does not occur, even if the output timing is different among the signals output to the respective light emitters, it does not cause much trouble. Therefore, when the output signal from the drive output terminal is connected to a light emitter such as an LED, there is no need to worry about the output timing.

  Next, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 76, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. The

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, the address [07] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90413a (see FIG. 89), and as shown in FIG. 76, the terminals AD0 to AD5 for inputting the decode address are provided. Of these, AD0 to AD2 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is set to 000111 (B) = [07]. .

  In FIG. 76, the decoding address setting mode in the light emitter driver 90413a is shown. However, as will be described later, the address [08] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90413b (see FIG. 89). Of the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5, AD3 is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD0 to AD2, AD4, and AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 001000 (B) = [ 08]. As will be described later, since the address [09] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90413c (see FIG. 89), among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5, A0 and AD3 are the power supply voltage VCC. (5V), AD1, AD2, AD4, and AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is set to 00101 (B) = [09].

  In the example shown in FIG. 76, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the S terminal to L (low), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the normal slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for performing lighting control of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F. Since the control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers mounted on different substrates, the influence of noise is large. Thus, the clock signal and data through output is set to a normal slew rate output so as to ensure resistance to noise.

  In the example shown in FIG. 76, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 76, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 76, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 MA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 76, the power supply voltage VDL (12 V) is connected to the VP terminal. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 76, the serial-parallel conversion circuit uses a 12V power supply voltage (VDL) and a 5V power supply voltage (VCL, VCC). The power supply voltage VDL is connected to the V terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 12V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 76, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are connected to a plurality of light emitters as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. In the example shown in FIG. 76, for convenience, one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal, or three light emitters (for example, single color LEDs) that perform the same control are connected in series. However, when a color LED is connected as a light emitter, three terminals for RGB may be connected to one color LED.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 76, the case where the light emitters are connected to all of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is shown, but the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0 are changed according to the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q11, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

  As shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in this embodiment, the T terminals of the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are set to H (high), respectively, and the time-out function is effective. Set to state. In this embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control for lighting control of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e in an effect control process (to be described later) (see step S9055). A signal is output, or a control signal for driving and controlling the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 is output. However, since the time-out function is set to an effective state, the control signal The output signal from each drive output terminal is automatically reset after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) has passed, and lighting control and drive control cannot be continued. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 outputs a control signal repeatedly at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) in, for example, an effect control process (to be described later) (see step S9055). The lighting control of the board side LEDs 909d and 909e, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c is continuously executed, and the drive control of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 is continuously executed. It is controlled to do.

  In this embodiment, the time-out function is set to the valid state as described above, and the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emission are performed every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Since the outputs from the drive output terminals of the body drivers 90413a to 90413c are automatically stopped, for example, after performing drive control of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330, In spite of performing control to stop the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330, the driving of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 does not stop due to signal loss or malfunction. , The first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 will burn. UNA has to be able to prevent a situation.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the case where the T terminal is uniformly set to H (high) and the time-out function is set to the valid state is shown. However, the setting of the valid state and invalid state of the timeout function may be properly used according to the usage. For example, for the motor drive driver, the time-out function is set to an effective state from the viewpoint of preventing burn-in of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330, while the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e, the top frame LED 909a, and the left frame LED 909b. Unlike the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330, there is no problem such as burn-in with respect to the light emitter such as the right frame LED 909c, so the T terminal is set to L (low) and the timeout function is disabled. You may comprise so that it may set to a state.

  In this embodiment, in order to continuously execute the lighting control and drive control, the effect control CPU 90120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example) (specifically, Shows a case where a control signal is rewritten every 10 ms and a control signal is repeatedly output), but is not limited to such a control mode. For example, an output circuit (output IC) is provided separately from the effect control CPU 90120 (may be provided on the effect control board 9012 or on another board such as the effect control relay board 9016A), and the effect control. When the CPU 90120 outputs a control signal once, the output circuit repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) based on the control signal output once. May be.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), and the T terminal is physically set to H (high) on the hardware so that time-out occurs. Although the case where the reset function is set to the valid state is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, by connecting the T terminal to the T terminal setting register and changing the setting value of the register by a setting signal from the effect control CPU 90120, the time-out function is enabled or disabled by software. You may comprise so that it can set.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value (10 kΩ in this example) is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND), and the drive output terminal Q0. The drive current values of all outputs of -Q23, Q0-Q11 are set to 15 MA. Here, since a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) having an internal reference resistance also exists, the serial-parallel conversion circuit having such an internal reference resistance is used as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver. It can be considered that the internal reference resistor is used, but in general, the built-in reference resistor included in the serial-parallel conversion circuit has a fixed driving current value (for example, fixed 20 mA) or a large error (for example, Error ± 30%). Therefore, in this embodiment, by connecting an external resistor between the R terminal and the ground (GND) and using an external reference resistor, an appropriate driving current value (15 MA in this example) is set, An error is also suggested (in this example, an error of ± 3%).

  In addition, as a light emitter driver and a motor drive driver, a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) that can use both an internal reference resistor and an external reference resistor can be used depending on the application. May be. For example, in the case where a plurality of light emitters such as LEDs are densely provided for production, if the light emission is sparse, the production will be disturbed, so that an external reference resistor is used to reduce the error. It may be configured. On the other hand, when controlling the lighting of an LED that is used independently, such as for error notification, there is no such obstacle in production, and the error may be somewhat large, so an internal reference resistor is used. Also good.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the electrical components (in this example, the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the first unit for operating the movable unit 90302 are operated. The control means (in this example, the effect control CPU 90120) for controlling the effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 for operating the movable member 90321, and the control signal by the serial communication system from the control means. Accordingly, output means (in this example, light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, etc.) for outputting specific signals (in this example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving the electrical components. Motor drive driver 90412 and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c). The output means outputs the output state when the input control signal is output to the other output means in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a change manner equal to or higher than that of the input control signal (in this example, a normal output state). The output state can be set to either the output state of the slew rate) or the second output state (in this example, the output state of the low slew rate) in which the waveform rises more slowly than the first output state. (In this example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate). Therefore, the setting can be changed according to the use environment, and the radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed according to the setting, while the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. Specifically, if it is set to a low slew rate output state, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed, and if it is set to a normal slew rate output state, the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 67 (2), a plurality of light output control boards 9016C have a plurality of them. The light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b are mounted, and control signals are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b on the same light emitter control board 9016C). In this case, the output means is set to the second output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 74, the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C have the S terminal H (high) and low slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means are provided in the same substrate, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided on another board connected via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) to the board on which the output means is provided ( In this example, as shown in FIG. 68, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, and the light emission mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals. Are sequentially transmitted between the body drivers 90413a to 90413c). In this case, the output means is set to the first output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 76, S is used in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F. The terminal is set to L (low) and set to the normal slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means is provided on another substrate connected via the wiring member, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the circuit board generally has high noise resistance. Therefore, in the connection relation in the circuit board, priority is given to suppression of radio wave radiation and the output state is set to a low slew rate to obtain a gentle signal waveform. On the other hand, wiring members connected between boards (for example, flexible cables and wire harnesses) have low noise resistance, so in an abandoned relationship between circuit boards, priority is given to noise resistance and rectangular waves are output as normal slew rates. The signal waveform is close to. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase noise resistance of a control signal for preventing malfunction while suppressing radio wave radiation to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V) or the ground (GND), and the S terminal is physically H on the hardware. (High) is set to the low slew rate output state, or L (low) is set to the normal slew rate output state. It cannot be caught. For example, by connecting the S terminal to the S terminal setting register and changing the setting value of the register in accordance with the setting signal from the effect control CPU 90120, a low slew rate output state is achieved by software or the normal slew rate is set. The output state may be set to be set.

  Further, in this embodiment, transmission of a control signal according to a low slew rate output state between output means (in this example, light emitter drivers) mounted on the same board, or output means mounted on different boards In this example, a substrate (in this example, the light emitter control substrates 9016C to 9016F) that performs only one of the transmissions of the control signal according to the normal slew rate output state is provided. It cannot be caught. For example, when a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on one light emitter control board, a control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board. In addition, it may be configured such that a control signal is transmitted to a light emitter driver mounted on another light emitter control board. In this case, for example, even if the light emitter driver is mounted on the same light emitter control board, the one that transmits the control signal between the light emitter drivers is set to the low slew rate output state, and the other light emitters are set. A device that outputs a control signal to the light-emitting driver mounted on the control board may be configured to be set to a normal slew rate output state.

  Also, even when a control signal is transmitted between light emitter drivers mounted on the same light emitter control board, the output state is not necessarily set to a low slew rate. When a control signal output from one mounted light emitter driver is branched on the substrate, the output state may be set to a normal slew rate. FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example in which a control signal output from one light emitter driver mounted on a light emitter control board is branched on the board.

  In the first modification shown in FIG. 77, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output from one light emitter driver 90413d mounted on the light emitter control board 9016G is branched on the board, The control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 90413e on the same light emitter control board 9016G, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 90413f on the same light emitter control board 9016G. As shown in the first modification, even when the control signal is branched and transmitted to the other light emitter drivers 90413e and 90413f even on the same light emitter control board 9016G, the control signal is attenuated by the branch. And is susceptible to noise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, the S terminal may be set to L (low) to be set to a normal slew rate output state to increase the noise resistance of the control signal.

  That is, when a plurality of other output means provided in the same substrate as the output means are connected in parallel to the output means (in this example, as in Modification 1 shown in FIG. 77, the light emitter control board A control signal (through output of a clock signal and data) output from one light emitter driver 90413d mounted on 9016G is branched on the substrate, and one of the branched control signals is a light emitter on the same light emitter control substrate 9016G. When the other branched control signal is transmitted to the driver 90413e and transmitted to the light emitter driver 90413f on the same light emitter control board 9016G), the output means is set to the first output state (in this example, In the light emitter driver 90413d mounted on the light emitter control board 9016G as in the first modification shown in FIG. 77, the S terminal is set to L (low) and the normal through It may be configured as set in the output state of the rate). With this configuration, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

  In the second modification shown in FIG. 77, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one light emitter driver 90413g mounted on the light emitter control board 9016H is branched on the board, The control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 90413h on the same light emitter control board 9016H, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver (not shown) on the external light emitter control board (not shown). The case is shown. As shown in the second modification, even when the other branched control signal is transmitted to the external board, the control signal is attenuated by the branch and easily affected by noise, as in the first modification. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, the S terminal may be set to L (low) to be set to a normal slew rate output state to increase the noise resistance of the control signal. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

  That is, a plurality of other output means provided on each of the first board provided with the output means and the second board connected to the first board via the wiring member are connected in parallel to the output means. (In this example, as in Modification 2 shown in FIG. 77, a control signal (through output of a clock signal and data) output from one light emitter driver 90413g mounted on the light emitter control board 9016H) Is branched on the board, one of the branched control signals is transmitted to the light emitter driver 90413h on the same light emitter control board 9016H, and the other branched control signal is sent to an external light emitter control board (not shown). In the case of transmission to a light emitter driver (not shown), the output means is set to the first output state (in this example, as in the second modification shown in FIG. 77, the light emitter control board 9016H). Mounted on S terminal In the light-emitting element driver 90413g may be configured to L is set to (low) is set to the output state of the conventional slew rate) it was. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output means specifies from the specific signal output units (in this example, the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups by the parallel communication method. A signal (in this example, an output signal from each of the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) is output (in this example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, as shown in FIG. 73, one group In other words, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is divided into three groups of four channels). Then, the output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (in this example, as shown in FIG. 73, the output timing of the output signal from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11 is a group. Everywhere). Therefore, the output timing of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 can be dispersed to spread the spectrum, prevent the generation of radiation noise, and further suppress the radio wave radiation from the substrate. .

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the movable member (in this example, the movable part 90302, the movable member 90321) which performs operation | movement is provided. Further, the driving means for operating the movable member (in this example, the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330) are driven based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output unit of the same group of the output means. (In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, signals input to the same operation motor are connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the output unit stops the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) after inputting the control signal (in this example, the time-out function). (In this example, the time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high), see FIG. 70). For this reason, it is possible to avoid malfunctions due to wiring problems and to control the electrical components stably.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal is provided (in this example, the effect control CPU 90120 is, for example, in effect control process processing (see step S9055)). By repeatedly outputting the control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example), the lighting control of the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c is continuously executed, The drive control of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 is continuously executed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (in this example, the timeout function is set to the invalid state by setting the T terminal to L (low)). The time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high) (see FIG. 70). Therefore, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by sharing parts.

  In this embodiment, serial-parallel conversion circuits 90411a and 90411b in which the clock signal and the data through output of the serial-parallel conversion circuit are connected to other serial-parallel conversion circuits on the same substrate, or for production purposes. With respect to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 90412 to which the motors 90303 and 90330 are connected, the S terminal is set to H (high) and the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output (FIGS. 74 and 75). For the serial-parallel conversion circuits 90413a, 90413b, and 90413c in which the through output of the clock signal and data is connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the substrate, the S terminal is set to L (low) and the clock signal and Data through output is normal Is set to the output rate shows the case (see FIG. 76), not limited to such embodiments. For example, you may comprise so that the through output of all the serial-parallel conversion circuits with which a game machine is provided is set to the output of a normal through rate. Hereinafter, Modification 3 in which the through outputs of all the serial-parallel conversion circuits are set to the normal slew rate output will be described.

  78 and 79 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the third modification. As shown in FIG. 78, in Modification 3, the S terminal is also set to L (low) for serial-parallel conversion circuits 90411a and 90411b whose through outputs are connected to other serial-parallel conversion circuits in the same substrate. Then, the clock signal and data slew output is set to the normal slew rate output. As shown in FIG. 79, in the third modification, the S-terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 90412 to which the production motors 90303 and 90330 are connected is also set to L (low) and the clock signal and the data are passed through. Output is set to normal slew rate output. In Modification 3, the serial-parallel conversion circuits 90413a, 90413b, and 90413c in which the through output is connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the substrate are the same as the connection mode shown in FIG. Is set to the output of the slew rate. Therefore, in Modification 3 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the through outputs are set to normal slew rate outputs for all the serial-parallel conversion circuits included in the gaming machine.

  According to Modification 3 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, all the serial-parallel conversion circuits are unified so that the through output is set to the output of the normal slew rate. Thus, design errors can be suppressed.

  Conversely, for example, the through outputs of all the serial-parallel conversion circuits provided in the gaming machine may be set to a low slew rate output. Hereinafter, Modification 4 in which the through outputs of all the serial-parallel conversion circuits are set to the low slew rate outputs will be described.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the fourth modification. As shown in FIG. 80, in Modification 4, the S terminal is also set to H (high) in the serial-parallel conversion circuits 90413a, 90413b, and 90413c whose through outputs are connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the substrate. Thus, the through output of the clock signal and data is set to a low slew rate output. In Modification 4, serial-parallel conversion circuits 90411a and 90411b in which the through output is connected to other serial-parallel conversion circuits on the same substrate are the same as the connection mode shown in FIG. Set to low slew rate output. In the fourth modification, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 90412 to which the production motors 90303 and 90330 are connected is the same as the connection mode shown in FIG. 75, and the through output is set to a low slew rate output. Therefore, in Modification 3 shown in FIG. 80, the through outputs are set to low slew rate outputs for all the serial-parallel conversion circuits provided in the gaming machine.

  According to the fourth modification shown in FIG. 80, all the serial-parallel conversion circuits are unified so that the through output is set to a low slew rate output. Can be suppressed.

  If all outputs are set to low slew rate output, it may be difficult to ensure noise resistance when through output is performed to a serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the board. In this case, a buffer circuit with a built-in amplifier may be provided between the through output destination. With such a configuration, the through output is amplified by the amplifier built in the buffer circuit, and it is possible to secure a certain level of resistance to noise even if the output is a low slew rate.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the production motors 90303 and 90330 are connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the drive output terminals of the groups having the same output timing are connected (see FIG. 75). However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when a full-color LED is used as the light emitter, the three output terminals (RGB terminals) of the same full-color LED may be configured to connect the drive output terminals of the group having the same output timing. Hereinafter, Modification 5 in which drive output terminals of groups having the same output timing with respect to full-color LEDs are connected will be described.

  FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the fifth modification. As shown in FIG. 81, in Modification 5, one of the three drive terminals Q0 to Q2 among the four channel terminals Q0 to Q3 of the group 1 having the same output timing among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11. The R terminal, G terminal and B terminal of the full color LED of the eye are connected to each other. Also, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the three terminals Q4 to Q6 of the four channel terminals Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the R terminal and the G terminal of the second full color LED. And B terminals are connected to each other. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the three terminals Q8 to Q10 in the four channel terminals Q8 to Q11 of the group 3 having the same output timing are connected to the R terminal and the G terminal of the third full-color LED. And B terminals are connected to each other.

  According to the modified example 5 shown in FIG. 81, regarding the signals input to the same full color LED, the light emission accuracy of the full color LED can be ensured by connecting to the drive output terminal belonging to the same group.

  Since the number of terminals required for connection of the full color LED is three terminals (R terminal, G terminal and B terminal), as shown in FIG. 81, each of the four terminals of group 1, group 2 and group 3 is provided. One of the terminals becomes unnecessary for connection (in the example shown in FIG. 81, the Q3 terminal, the Q7 terminal, and the Q11 terminal). In this case, like the Q3 terminal and the Q7 terminal shown in FIG. 81, terminals unnecessary for the connection of the full color LED may be connected to the ground (GND).

  Further, terminals unnecessary for connection of the full color LED may be used for other purposes. For example, in the case where the movable member for production (production effect) is configured to be operated by driving a solenoid, the connection of the solenoid for the production role can be made with one terminal, so that Q11 shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, a solenoid 90500 for a director may be connected to a terminal unnecessary for connection of a full color LED.

  Also, for example, in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of production-use movable members (production effects), in the case where the production effects provided symmetrically in the game area are operated in some manner synchronously, You may comprise so that the solenoid for production | presentation objects provided symmetrically may be connected to the drive output terminal of the same group. If comprised in that way, the operation | movement system of the movable member operated synchronously, such as a production | presentation character provided symmetrically, can be ensured.

  Further, for example, in the case of providing a director for a director, a predetermined power control IC may be connected between the drive terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit and the lock solenoid for the director. . In this case, the predetermined power control IC is a power switch (so-called high-side switch that outputs power from the output terminal side only when a high-voltage input of a predetermined value or more is input to the input terminal side. -It is connected to the drive terminal of the parallel conversion circuit, and the output side is connected to a lock solenoid for a director, for example, when a plurality of solenoids for directors are provided, The input side of the side switch may be connected to the drive terminal of the same group, and the high-side switch and the lock solenoid for the director may be controlled by a signal from the drive terminal of the same group. Further, for example, terminals unnecessary for connection of full color LEDs in the same group (in this example, Q3 terminal, Q7 terminal and Q11 terminal) The high-side switch connected to, may be or configured to connect the lock solenoid for performance won game on the output side of the high-side switch to.

  For example, when lighting control of a 7-segment LED or a dot display is performed, the input to the 7-segment LED or the dot display is configured to be connected to a drive terminal of the same group. You may comprise so that an output timing may be match | combined.

  In addition, if there are unused terminals in the drive output terminals of the serial-parallel converter circuit, if those unused terminals are left unconnected, surge voltage is input to those unused terminals due to factors such as static electricity. There is a risk of causing problems such as excessive heat generation and damage to internal circuits. Therefore, it is conceivable to provide a protection circuit for surge voltage countermeasures inside the serial-parallel conversion circuit, but this is not preferable in that the manufacturing cost of the serial-parallel conversion circuit increases. Therefore, the unused terminals are configured to be connected to a predetermined reference potential so that the surge voltage is released to the reference potential side of a predetermined power supply board (not shown), and excessive heat generation or internal circuit damage is caused. You may comprise so that generation | occurrence | production of malfunctions, such as, may be suppressed. Hereinafter, Modification 6 in which the unused terminal of the drive output terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the ground (GND) as a reference potential will be described.

  82 to 84 are explanatory diagrams for explaining connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the sixth modification. Among these, FIG. 82 shows a modification of the connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b for controlling the lighting of the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e. In the example shown in FIG. 82, the panel side LEDs are connected to 18 drive output terminals Q0 to Q17 out of 24 drive output terminals Q0 to Q24, but the 6 drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are not used. The unused terminals of the six drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are connected to the ground (GND).

  FIG. 83 shows a modification of the connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the motor drive driver 90412 for controlling the drive of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330. In the example shown in FIG. 83, the effect motors are connected to the eight drive output terminals Q0 to Q7 out of the twelve drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but the four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are not yet connected. The unused terminals of the four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are connected to the ground (GND).

  FIG. 84 shows a modification of the connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. In the example shown in FIG. 84, the LED for each frame is connected to nine drive output terminals Q0 to Q8 out of twelve drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but three drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are connected. The unused terminals of the three drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are connected to the ground (GND).

  According to Modification 6 shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, even if a surge voltage is generated, the surge voltage can be released to the ground (GND) side, and problems such as excessive heat generation and damage to internal circuits occur. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in Modification 6 shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, an external resistor of 3 kΩ is connected to the VP terminal that is a protective electrostatic protection terminal. By configuring the external resistor to be connected to the VP terminal in this way, even if a surge voltage is generated, it is possible to prevent a current exceeding the rated current from flowing through the VP terminal, resulting in excessive heat generation and damage to the internal circuit. The occurrence of problems such as these can be further suppressed.

  Further, in the sixth modification shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, the case where the unused terminal is connected to the ground (GND) as the reference potential has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode and is connected to another fixed potential. You may comprise. Hereinafter, Modification 7 in which the unused terminal of the drive output terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to a fixed potential as a reference potential will be described.

  85 to 87 are explanatory diagrams for explaining connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modification example 7. FIG. Among these, FIG. 85 shows a modified example of the connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b for controlling the lighting of the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e. In the example shown in FIG. 85, the panel side LEDs are connected to 18 drive output terminals Q0 to Q17 out of 24 drive output terminals Q0 to Q24, but 6 drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are not used. The unused terminals of the six drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are connected to VCL (5 V) as a fixed potential (connected to the same power supply voltage as the VP terminal).

  FIG. 86 shows a modification of the connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the motor drive driver 90412 for controlling the drive of the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330. In the example shown in FIG. 86, the effect motors are connected to the eight drive output terminals Q0 to Q7 out of the twelve drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but the four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are not yet connected. The unused terminals of the four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are connected to VCC (5 V) as fixed potentials (connected to the same power supply voltage as the VP terminal).

  FIG. 87 shows a modification of the connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. In the example shown in FIG. 87, the LED for each frame is connected to nine drive output terminals Q0 to Q8 out of twelve drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but three drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are connected. The unused terminals of the three drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are connected to VDL (12V) as fixed potentials (connected to the same power supply voltage as the VP terminal).

  According to the modified example 7 shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, even if a surge voltage is generated, the surge voltage can be released to the fixed potential (VCL (5V), VCC (5V), VDL (12V)) side, respectively. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as excessive heat generation and damage to the internal circuit.

  Also, in the modified example 7 shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, an external resistor of 3 kΩ is connected to the VP terminal that is a protective electrostatic protection terminal. By configuring the external resistor to be connected to the VP terminal in this way, even if a surge voltage is generated, it is possible to prevent a current exceeding the rated current from flowing through the VP terminal, resulting in excessive heat generation and damage to the internal circuit. The occurrence of problems such as these can be further suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, the case where the unused terminals are connected to the same power supply voltage as that of the VP terminals is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, regardless of the power supply voltage connected to the VP terminal, the unused terminal can be uniformly connected to VDL (12 V) so that the surge voltage can be released by connecting to a sufficiently high power supply voltage. Any configuration may be used. Further, for example, a power supply voltage for surge voltage countermeasures may be provided, and the unused terminals may be uniformly connected to the power supply voltage for surge voltage countermeasures.

  In this embodiment, addresses are assigned in advance to the respective light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to 90413c, and the motor drive driver 90412. 88 and 89 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of addresses given to the respective light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to 90413c and the motor drive driver 90412. FIG.

  In this embodiment, in the effect control board 9012, addresses of the respective light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to 90413c and the motor drive driver 90412 shown in FIGS. 88 and 89 are stored in a predetermined address storage area previously provided in the ROM 90121. Is stored in the address management table. Then, as already described, by setting the connection states of the respective light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to 90413c and the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD4 (or AD0 to AD5) of the motor drive driver 90412 in advance, The assigned address is set, and the address managed using the address management table on the effect control board 9012 side matches the address actually set for each driver.

  In this embodiment, when the CPU 90120 for effect control performs light emission control of the top frame LEDs 909a to 909c and the panel-side LEDs 909d and 909e, the ROM 90121 has addresses of the light emitter drivers corresponding to the LEDs to be emitted. The read address is read from a predetermined address storage area, the read address is set in the setting bit of the decode address of the control data format shown in FIG. 72 (see FIG. 72 (1)), and the control data in which the address is set is sent to each light emitter driver By outputting to 90411a, 90411b, and 90413a to 90413c, light emission control of the top frame LEDs 909a to 909c and the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e is performed.

  In addition, when the effect control CPU 90120 performs drive control of the effect motors 90303 and 90330, the address of the motor drive driver 90412 corresponding to the effect motors 90303 and 90330 is a predetermined address storage area provided in the ROM 90121. 72, the read address is set in the setting bit of the decode address of the control data format shown in FIG. 72 (see FIG. 72 (1)), and the control data in which the address is set is output to the motor drive driver 90412. The drive control of the production motors 90303 and 90330 is performed.

  Also, the effect control CPU 90120 is for addresses not set in the address management table shown in FIGS. 88 and 89 (in this example, addresses [00], [01], [05], [06], etc.). Does not output control data (except in the case of malfunction due to data corruption).

  In this embodiment, the addresses [00] and [01] are unused addresses. Address [02] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90411a, and address [03] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90411b. The address [04] is assigned to the motor drive driver 90412.

  Further, addresses [05] and [06] are unused addresses. Address [07] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90413a, address [08] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90413b, and address [09] is assigned to the light emitter driver 90413c.

  Further, as already described, the light emitter driver 90411a whose address is [02] and the light emitter driver 90411b whose address is [03] are configured by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, and receive serial data. The data is converted into parallel data and supplied to the 24 board side LEDs 909d and 909e of the game board 902, respectively.

  Further, as already described, the motor drive driver 90412 whose address is [04] is configured by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, converts serial data into parallel data, and drives the first effect motor 90303. Are output from the four output terminals (Q0 to Q3) as drive signals for driving, and are output from the four output terminals (Q4 to Q7) as drive signals for driving the second effect motor 90330. In this embodiment, the areas of the output terminal numbers 08 to 23 among the areas corresponding to the address [04] of the predetermined address storage area are unused areas.

  Further, as already described, the light emitter driver 90413a whose address is [07], the light emitter driver 90413b whose address is [08], and the light emitter driver 90413c whose address is [09] are 12 channels. The serial data is converted into parallel data and supplied to 12 top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, and right frame LEDs 909c of the game frame, respectively. In this embodiment, the areas of the output terminal numbers 12 to 23 among the areas corresponding to the addresses [07] to [09] in the predetermined address storage area are unused areas.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, in this embodiment, address information is set in a range of a predetermined value exceeding a minimum value among a plurality of values in a predetermined settable range for a plurality of electrical components. . Specifically, in this embodiment, a plurality of electrical components (in this example, panel side LEDs 909d and 909e, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, and first effect for rotating the movable portion 90302) Motor 90303, the second rendering motor 90330 for sliding the movable member 90321), and the minimum value (in this example, the address [ 00]), it is configured to be given from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value (in this example, address [02]) or more, and an address less than the predetermined value from the minimum value. (In this example, addresses [00] to [01]) are configured to be unused addresses.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, in this embodiment, address information is set discontinuously in a predetermined settable range for at least some of the plurality of electrical components. Specifically, in this embodiment, a plurality of electrical components (in this example, panel side LEDs 909d and 909e, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, and first effect for rotating the movable portion 90302) Motor 90303, second effect motor 90330 for sliding movable member 90321), among the addresses that can be given to each light emitter driver and motor drive driver that outputs control data to each light emitter driver and motor drive actually The address assigned to the driver is configured to be discontinuous (in this example, addresses [05] to [06] are unused addresses, and addresses [04] to [07] are used. ] Is discontinuous).

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the address is assigned so as to be discontinuous, or the address is assigned from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value, an unset address is included. Even if control data is sent, as long as the address is not set for any driver, there is no risk of erroneously outputting a signal to any LED, motor, or other electrical component. It is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunction in the control of the electrical components when the data address information is incomplete.

  In general, when there is a change in the number of LEDs or production motors in the development stage of a gaming machine, or when there is a change such as the integration of the board to be used, each driver such as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver On the other hand, it is necessary to reassign the address, and there is a possibility that the development efficiency of the gaming machine is lowered. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the address is assigned so as to be discontinuous, or the address is assigned from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value. Even if a new driver is generated, the address assigned to the driver that is no longer needed is treated as a missing number so that the address is not reassigned. Assigned addresses (for example, addresses [00], [01], [05], [06] shown in FIGS. 88 and 89) can eliminate the need for address reassignment. Costs can be reduced and development efficiency can be improved.

  It should be noted that the manner of assigning addresses to the respective light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to 90413c and the motor drive driver 90412 is not limited to the modes shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, and various modes are conceivable.

  For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the addresses [00] and [01] are assigned as unused addresses to each driver from the address [02] or more, but only the address [00] is not yet used. You may comprise so that it may give to each driver from address [01] or more as a use address. Further, the number of unused addresses may be further increased, and for example, the addresses [00] to [02] may be assigned to the drivers from the address [03] or higher as unused addresses.

  For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the addresses [05] and [06] are unused and the addresses are discontinuous. However, only the address [05] is unused and the addresses are changed. The address may be configured to be discontinuous, or the number of unused addresses may be increased, and for example, the addresses [05] to [07] may be configured to be unused addresses to be discontinuous. .

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit (in this example, a motor drive driver 90412, light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c) and a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit (in this example) , The light emitter drivers 90411a and 90411b) are managed using a single table, but the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit and the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit are separately used. The address may be managed.

  Also, in this embodiment, only the address allocation has been shown in a case where the address is assigned so as to be discontinuous, or the address is assigned from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value. Regarding the output terminal number of the driver, the output terminal number may be set to be discontinuous, or the output terminal number may be set from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value. For example, the light emitter driver 90411a set at the address [02] is configured such that the output terminal numbers [00] and [01] are set as unused terminal numbers and are set to the respective LEDs from the output terminal number [02]. The intermediate output terminal numbers [05] and [06] may be unused terminal numbers, and the output terminal numbers set for each LED may be configured to be discontinuous.

[Operation of pachinko machines]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  CPU90103 which performed such game control main processing will perform the game control timer interruption process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 101, if the interruption request signal from CTC is received and an interruption request | requirement is received. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 101 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, and the second start port to pass through the switch circuit 90110. The status of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 is determined (S9011). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (S9012). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901 is output (S9013). ).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of game random numbers such as random number values MR1 'to MR4' used on the main board 9011 side by software is executed (S9014). Thereafter, the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing (S9015). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit (not shown) is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display 904A or the 2. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the special symbol display 904B and setting of opening / closing operation of the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (S9016). The CPU 90103 executes the normal symbol process, thereby determining the normal symbol variation display mode using the random number MR4 ′ for determining the normal symbol display result, and the display operation in the normal symbol indicator 9020 (for example, the segment LED). Lighting, extinguishing, etc.) is controlled to enable normal symbol variation display, tilting operation setting of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, and the like.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 90103 transmits the control command from the main board 9011 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 by executing the command control process (S9017). As an example of these, in the command control processing, among the output ports included in the I / O 90105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit, After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 9012, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. Then, by turning it off, etc., it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S9015 shown in FIG. 101 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (S9021). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 90103 selects and executes one of the processes of S9022 to S9029 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit.

  In the start winning determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there has been a first start winning or a second starting winning by the first start opening switch 9022A or the second start opening switch 9022B. A random number value MR1 ′ for result determination, a random value MR2 ′ for jackpot type determination, and a random value MR3 ′ for variation pattern determination are extracted, and in the case of the first start winning, the first special figure reservation storage unit In the case of the second start winning prize, it is stored at the top of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit.

  The special symbol normal process of S9022 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol indicator 904A or the second special symbol indicator is displayed based on the presence or absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit or the second special symbol reservation storage unit. A determination is made as to whether or not to start the special game according to 904B. Further, in the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 ′ for determining the special symbol display result, Is determined (predetermined) before is displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the change display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (the jackpot symbol or the like in the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 904A or the second special symbol indicator 904B). One of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process of S9023 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is classified into a plurality of types using numerical data indicating a variation pattern determination random value MR3 ′ based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variation display result is “big hit”. Processing to determine either is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special diagram process flag is updated to “2”.

  By the special symbol normal process of S9022 and the variation pattern setting process of S9023, the variation pattern including the variation display time of the confirmed special symbol, the special symbol, and the effect symbol, which becomes the variation display result of the special symbol, is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing use the special symbol display result determination random number MR1 ′, the jackpot type determination random value MR2 ′, and the variation pattern determination random value MR3 ′. And a process for determining a variation display mode of the effect design.

  The special symbol variation process of S9024 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display unit 904A and the second special symbol display unit 904B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts variation. It includes processing to measure When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process of S9025 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display unit 904A or the second special symbol display unit 904B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol resulting in the variation display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is on. When the big hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit pre-release processing of S9026 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the like, for example, a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state. include. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release process of S9027 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time since the big winning opening is in an open state, a measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in S9028 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the grand prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of times the big winning opening has been reached, or the maximum number of times the big winning opening has been reached has been reached. In some cases, processing for performing a setting for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end processing of S9029 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the big hit ending process, the big hit gaming state is ended by an effect display device 905, speakers 908L and 908R, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, board side LEDs 909d and 909e, movable member 90321, and the like. Various settings to start waiting time until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation to be notified elapses, and to start the probability variation control and the time reduction control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state ( And processing for setting a probability variation flag and a time reduction flag). When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  In the big hit ending process, the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is read to identify whether the big hit type is “non-probable big hit” or “probable big hit”. . If it is determined that the identified big hit type is not “non-probable variation big hit”, setting for starting the probability variation control (setting of the probability variation flag) is performed. In addition, when the specified big hit type is “non-probable variable big hit”, the setting for starting the time reduction control (in advance corresponding to the setting of the time reduction flag and the upper limit value of the special game that can be executed during the time reduction control). A predetermined count initial value (in this embodiment, “100”) is set in the short-time counter.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012. The effect control CPU 90120 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S9051).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a movable member break-in process for performing a break-in operation for moving the movable member 90321 (S9051A). The movable member break-in process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms the operation of a plurality of types of movement patterns of the movable member 90321 in the effect such as the notice effect, or the position detection sensor 90333 detects the initial position of the movable member 90321 (in this embodiment, the first position). Position) or a movable member initialization process for moving the movable member 90321 to the initial position is executed (S9051B).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S9052). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 90120 clears the flag (S9053) and executes the following process.

  The effect control CPU 90120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S9054). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 9011 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an error notification process which is one of the processes for executing the error effect (S9054A). In the error notification process in step S9054A, for example, in response to an error designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100, an error image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 905, and error audio from the speakers 908L and 908R. An error notification or the like is performed by an output operation, an error light emission operation in the LEDs 909a to 909e, or the like.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs effect control process processing (S9055). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 905 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the effect random numbers such as the jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S9056), and then the process proceeds to S9052.

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S9055) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a hold display notice effect determination process for determining the display pattern of the hold memory display together with the presence or absence of the hold display notice effect (S9071), and then the effect display device 905 A hold display update process is executed to update the hold storage display in the first hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U to a display corresponding to the stored content of the start winning reception command buffer (S9072).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 performs any one of S9073 to S9079 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S9073): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (S9074).

  Production symbol variation start processing (S9074): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S9075). In this embodiment, an effect execution setting process for performing LED control described later is also executed in the effect symbol variation start process.

  Production symbol variation processing (S9075): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S9076).

  Production symbol variation stop processing (S9076): Based on the reception of the production control command (design confirmation command) for instructing all symbols to be stopped, the control to stop the variation of the production symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S9077) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S9073).

  Big hit display processing (S9077): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 905 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (S9078).

  Big hit game processing (S9078): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when a special winning opening opening designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 905 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S9079).

  Big hit end effect processing (S9079): In the effect display device 905, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S9073).

[Structure of production unit]
Next, the rendering unit 90300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90A is a front view showing an effect unit, and FIG. 90B is a rear view. FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed obliquely from behind. 93A is a front view showing a state in which the movable part is in the tilted position, and FIG. 93B is a front view showing a state in which the movable part is in the standing position. 94A is a rear view showing the pinion gear, and FIG. 94B is a rear view showing the rack gear. FIGS. 95A and 95B are schematic views showing a state where the movable member is in the first position and FIG. 95B is a state where the movable member is in the second position. 97A is a schematic view showing a state where the pinion gear is engaged with the rack gear, FIG. 97B is a state where the rack gear is moved, and FIG. 97C is a schematic view showing a state where the rack gear is restricted. FIG. 98 is an enlarged view of a main part showing the state of the gears until (A) to (D) are in the restricted state. FIGS. 99A and 99B are schematic views showing a restricted state, FIG. 99B a state in which the pinion gear is changed to a restricted release state by rotating the pinion gear in the first operation direction, and FIG. 100A is a schematic diagram showing a restricted state, FIG. 100B is a schematic view showing a state in which the pinion gear is changed to a restricted release state by rotating the pinion gear in the second operation direction, and FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, the effect unit 90300 is provided between a game board 902 and an effect display device 905 provided on the back side of the game board 902, and a base portion 90301 fixed at a predetermined location. A movable portion 90302 that can be rotated with respect to the base portion 90301, a tilt position where the movable portion 90302 is tilted laterally (see FIG. 93A), and a standing position where the vertical portion stands upright (FIG. 93 ( B)), and a first effect motor 90303 that rotates between them.

  A bearing hole 90310 is formed through the base portion 90301, and a guide groove 90311 having an arc shape centering on the bearing hole 90310 is formed around the bearing hole 90310. At the lower right position of the bearing hole 90310 on the back surface of the base portion 90301, a first effect motor 90303 that rotates the movable portion 90302 is fixed to the back surface, and the drive projecting forward through the base portion 90301. A turntable 90312 is fixed to the tip of a shaft (not shown).

  A shaft member 90313 facing in the front-rear direction is protruded at a predetermined peripheral portion of the turntable 90312, and the lower end of the link member 90314 is pivotally supported by the shaft member 90313 so as to be rotatable. A detection piece 90315 is provided on the opposite side of the periphery of the turntable 9031 from the shaft member 90313, and the detection piece 90315 is detected by a position detection sensor 90316 provided below the turntable 9031. The CPU 90120 for effect control can specify that the movable portion 90302 is located at the tilt position.

  The movable portion 90302 includes a rotating member 90320, a movable member 90321 provided on the front side of the rotating member 90320 so as to be slidable with respect to the rotating member 90320, and a movable member on the back side of the rotating member 90320. 90321 and a rack gear 90322 that moves integrally. The movable member 90321 is reciprocally movable between a first position on the rotating shaft 90325 side and a second position farther from the rotating shaft 90325 than the first position with respect to the rotating member 90320.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a movable effect of moving the movable member 90321 between the first position and the second position when the movable portion 90302 is in the standing position. ing. Further, when the movable member 90321 is in the first position, at least a part thereof is retracted below the display screen of the effect display device 905, and at least a part is superimposed on the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 905 in the second position. (See FIG. 65).

  The rotating member 90320 is a substantially plate-like member extending in the left-right direction, and is inserted on the right side of the front surface from the rear side into the bearing hole 90310 so as to protrude from the left side of the rotating shaft 90325. A first guide shaft 90326 inserted into the guide groove 903111 from the rear side and a second guide shaft 90327 protruding from the upper right side of the rotation shaft 90325 and inserted from the rear side are provided protruding. Yes.

  An upper end of a link member 90314 is pivotally supported at the tip of a second guide shaft 90327 that is inserted through the guide groove 903111 and protrudes to the front side of the base portion 90301. That is, the turntable 9031 and the rotation member 90320 are connected via the link member 90314. A coil spring 90328 is provided on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft 90325 to urge the rotation member 90320 toward the standing position at all times.

  On the left side of the first guide shaft 90326, a linear slide groove 90329 for guiding the movable member 90321 in the left-right direction is extended in the left-right direction. A second effect motor 90330 for sliding the movable member 90321 is fixed above the slide groove 90329 on the front surface of the rotating member 90320, and the drive shaft protrudes rearward through the base portion 90301. A pinion gear 90331 for operating the rack gear 90322 is fixed to the tip of 90330a. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is applied as the second effect motor 90330.

  A hook 90332, which is engaged with the left end of the tension spring 90323 for urging the rack gear 90322, projects rearward on the left rear surface of the rotating member 90320. In addition, a position detection sensor 90333 that detects a detection piece 90334 formed at the right end of the rack gear 90322 is provided on the right rear surface, and the detection piece 90334 is detected by the position detection sensor 90333, thereby providing effect control. The CPU 90120 can specify that the movable member 90321 is located at the first position.

  The movable member 90321 has a disk-shaped light emitting portion 90321A and an attachment portion 90321B extending to the right side from the light emitting portion 90321A. The light emitting portion 90321A is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) (not shown) inside, and can emit light forward. In addition, two bosses 90334a and 90334b project from the rear surface of the mounting portion 90321B, and the bosses 90334a and 90334b are inserted into the slide grooves 90329 and are screwed into the rack gear 901 by screws N1 screwed from the rear side of the rack gear 90322. By fixing 90322, the movable member 90321 arranged on the front side of the rotating member 90320 and the rack gear 90322 arranged on the rear side of the rotating member 90320 are integrated.

  The integrated movable member 90321 and rack gear 90322 are guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the rotating member 90320 by inserting two bosses 90334a and 90334b into the slide groove 90329. Further, on the right side of the rack gear 90322, a hook 90335 is protruded rearward so that the left end is locked to the hook 90332 of the rotating member 90320 and the right end of the tension spring 90323 is locked. That is, one end of the tension spring 90323 is locked to the hook 90332 of the rotating member 90320 and the other end is locked to the hook 90335 of the rack gear 90322, so that the movable member 90321 is always directed to the second position side. Energize.

  In the effect unit 90300 configured as described above, the movable portion 90302 is located at the tilted position as shown in FIG. 93A in the initial driving state. Then, when the turntable 9031 is rotated clockwise around the front view by the first effect motor 90303, the second guide shaft 90327 is pulled downward by the link member 90314, so that the front view is centered on the rotation shaft 90325. It rotates about 90 degrees clockwise and rotates to the standing position shown in FIG. In addition, since the urging force of the coil spring 90328 acts when rotating from the tilt position to the standing position, the load on the first effect motor 90303 is reduced. Further, the first effect motor 90303 is reversely driven to rotate from the standing position to the tilt position.

  Next, the detailed structure of the pinion gear 90331 and the rack gear 90322 will be described. As shown in FIG. 94 (A), the pinion gear 90331 is a rotary gear in which a plurality of drive teeth protrude from a part of the peripheral surface of the disk member. The drive teeth are a plurality of drive teeth 90340A projecting in the rotation direction, and a tooth thickness dimension L2 in a pitch circle having a radius from the drive shaft 90330a to the position where the teeth mesh with each other is greater than the tooth thickness dimension L1 of the drive teeth 90340A. The drive teeth 90340B are large, and the tooth thickness dimension L3 in the pitch circle is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the drive teeth 90340A and 340B (the tooth thickness dimension L1 <L2 <L3). ).

  Further, since the tooth thickness dimensions L1, L2, and L3 of the drive teeth 90340A, 90340B, and 90340C are different from each other in this manner, the distal end surface 90342A of the drive teeth 90340A, the distal end surface 90342B of the drive teeth 90340B, and the distal end surface 90342C of the drive teeth 90340C. The length in the circumferential direction in each is the same as the relationship between the tooth thickness dimensions L1, L2, and L3. That is, the circumferential length of the tip surface 90342B is longer than the circumferential length of the tip surface 90342A, and the circumferential length of the tip surface 90342C is the circumferential direction of the tip surfaces 90342A and 90342B. It is longer than the length dimension of.

  In this embodiment, the front end surfaces 90342A and 90342B are flat surfaces, and a front end surface 90342C constituting a restricting portion described later is a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 90330a.

  The tooth gap dimension L4 between the drive teeth 90340A and the drive teeth 90340A and the tooth gap dimension L5 between the drive teeth 90340A and the drive teeth 90340B are the same (tooth gap dimension L4 = L5), and the drive teeth 90340A. The tooth gap dimension L6 between the drive teeth 90340C and the drive teeth 90340C is longer than the tooth gap dimensions L4 and L5 (L4, L5 <L6). These drive teeth 90340A, 90340B, and 90340C are formed over about 1/3 of the circumferential surface, and the remaining 2/3 of the circumferential surface is a missing portion 90341 in which the drive teeth are missing in the circumferential direction. Yes. That is, the pinion gear 90331 has a meshing portion that has driving teeth and meshes with the rack gear 90322 and a non-meshing portion that does not have driving teeth and does not mesh with the rack gear 90322 on the circumferential surface.

  In this embodiment, in the pinion gear 90331, the clockwise direction in FIG. 94A is the first operating direction that moves the rack gear 90322 from the second position to the first position, that is, in the first direction. The rotation is the second operation direction that moves the rack gear 90322 from the first position to the second position, that is, in the second direction.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (B), the rack gear 90322 is a gear having a plurality of driven teeth protruding from part of the side surface of the rod-shaped member. The driven teeth include a plurality of driven teeth 90350A projecting along the side surface on the pinion gear 90331 side, a driven tooth 90350B having a tooth thickness dimension L12 larger than a tooth thickness dimension L11 of the driven teeth 90350A, and a tooth Thickness L13 has driven teeth 90350C that are longer than tooth thickness dimensions L11 and L12 of driven teeth 90350A and 90350B (tooth thickness dimension L11 <L12 <L13). Moreover, the front end surface of each driven tooth 90350A, 90350B, 90350C is a flat surface.

  The tooth gap dimension L14 between each driven tooth 90350A and the driven tooth 90350A and the tooth gap dimension L15 between the driven tooth 90350A and the driven tooth 90350C are the same (tooth gap dimension L14 = L15), and the driven tooth 90350A. And the driven tooth 90350B are longer than the tooth gap dimensions L14 and L15 (L14, L15 <L16).

  The tooth gap dimensions L14 and L15 in the rack gear 90322 are the dimensions corresponding to the tooth thickness dimension L1 of the drive teeth 90340A, and the tooth gap dimensions L16 are the dimensions corresponding to the tooth thickness dimension L2 of the drive teeth 90340B. . In addition, the tooth gap dimensions L4 and L5 in the pinion gear 90331 are the dimensions corresponding to the tooth thickness dimension L11 of the driven tooth 90350A, and the tooth gap dimensions L6 are the dimensions corresponding to the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 90350C. .

  These driven teeth 90350A, 90350B, 90350C are formed from the lower part in the longitudinal direction of the side surface to the approximate center in the vertical direction, and the upper part from the center is a missing part 90351 in which the driven tooth is missing in the longitudinal direction. That is, the rack gear 90322 has a meshing portion that has driven teeth and meshes with the pinion gear 90331 and a non-meshing portion that does not have driven gears and does not mesh with the pinion gear 90331 on the side surface.

  In this embodiment, rack gear 90322 moves between the upper second position and the lower first position in FIG. That is, the pinion gear 90331 rotates in the first operating direction to move from the second position to the first position, that is, in the first direction, and the pinion gear 90331 rotates in the second operating direction to move from the first position to the second position. It moves to the position, that is, in the second direction.

  Next, operation modes of the pinion gear 90331 and the rack gear 90322 will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, since the movable member 90321 reciprocates between the first position and the second position when the movable portion 90302 is in the standing position, the movable portion 90302 is in the standing position in the following. The description will be made with reference to the vertical and horizontal directions.

  In this embodiment, an example in which the movable member 90321 reciprocates between the first position and the second position when the movable part 90302 is in the standing position will be described. However, the movable part 90302 is in the tilted position. The movable member 90321 may reciprocate between the first position and the second position sometimes or during rotation.

  95 (A) and 95 (B), the movable member 90321 (rack gear 90322) has a first position below the rotating member 90320 where the boss 90334b is located at the lower end of the slide groove 90329, and The boss 90334a can reciprocate in the vertical direction between the upper second position located at the upper end of the slide groove 90329.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (A), the movable member 90321 is urged upward by the tension spring 90323 at the first position, but the pinion gear 90331 and the rack gear 90322 have drive teeth 90340C as described later. When the tooth tip of the follower tooth 90350C of the distal end surface 90342C is in contact with the front end surface 90342C, the state changes to a restricted state (locked state) that restricts the upward movement of the movable member 90321 by the urging force of the tension spring 90323. Even when the motor 90330 is in the OFF state, the movable member 90321 is held at the first position. The details of the restricted state (locked state) will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (B), when the restricted state is released, the movable member 90321 is moved upward by the urging force of the tension spring 90323 and then held at the second position by the tension spring 90323. That is, the urging force by the tension spring 90323 exceeds the load of the movable member 90321.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the pinion gear 90331 rotates in the first operating direction as shown in FIG. 97 (B) in a state where the drive teeth 90340B mesh with the corresponding driven teeth 90350B from above. Thus, the drive teeth 90340A and the corresponding driven teeth 90350A mesh with each other, and the rack gear 90322 moves in the first direction (downward) against the upward biasing force of the tension spring 90323. Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the tip end surface 90342C of the drive tooth 90340C comes into contact with the tooth tip of the driven tooth 90350C, and the rack gear 90322, that is, the movable member 90321 is held in the first position. The

  Here, the details when changing from the restriction release state to the restriction state (lock state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 97A, when the movable member 90321 is in the second position, the pinion gear 90331 rotates in the first operating direction, so that the drive teeth 90340A and 90340B mesh with the driven teeth 90350A and 90350B. Thus, the rack gear 90322 moves in the first direction against the upward biasing force of the tension spring 90323, and the movable member 90321 descends toward the first position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), before the engagement of the drive teeth 90340A adjacent to the drive teeth 90340C among the plurality and the driven teeth 90350A adjacent to the driven teeth 90350C of the plurality is released, the drive teeth 90340C are released. And the driven teeth 90350C are engaged with each other, and the engagement between the drive teeth 90340A and the driven teeth 90350A is released. Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), after the drive teeth 90340C face the missing portion 90351 of the rack gear 90322, the tooth tips of the drive teeth 90340C move from the tooth roots of the tooth surfaces of the driven teeth 90350C toward the tooth tips. I will do it.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (C), when the tooth tip of the drive tooth 90340C is separated from the tooth surface of the driven tooth 90350C by the rotation of the pinion gear 90331, the meshing between the drive tooth 90340C and the driven tooth 90350C is released. That is, the drive tooth 90340C is an adjacent drive tooth adjacent to the missing portion 90341, and the driven tooth 90350C is an adjacent driven tooth adjacent to the missing portion 90351 (the drive tooth 90340C is a rear end of the first direction among the plurality of driven teeth. Since the transmission of the power to move the rack gear 90322 in the first direction is interrupted by the meshing of the subsequent driving tooth and the driven tooth, the rotation of the pinion gear 90331 is stopped. As a result, the tooth tip of the drive tooth 90340C moves away from the tooth surface of the driven tooth 90350C, and the engagement between the drive tooth 90340C and the driven tooth 90350C is released, the rack gear 90322 tries to move in the second direction by the urging force of the tension spring 90323. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (C), when the pinion gear 90331 further rotates, the front end surface 90342C of the drive tooth 90340C intersects the tooth tip line T passing through the tooth tips of the driven teeth 90350A, 90350B, 90350C of the rack gear 90322. To do. At this time, as described above, the transmission of the power for moving the rack gear 90322 in the first direction due to the meshing of the subsequent drive teeth and the driven teeth is interrupted, so that the rack gear 90322 receives the first force by the urging force of the tension spring 90323. In order to move in two directions, the tooth tip of the driven tooth 90350C comes into contact with the tip surface 90342C of the driving tooth 90340C.

  Thus, the contact point S with respect to the drive tooth 90340C in the driven tooth 90350C moves from the tooth surface of the drive tooth 90340C (see FIG. 98A) to the tooth tip of the drive tooth 90340C (see FIG. 98B). ), And moves to the distal end surface 90342C of the drive tooth 90340C (see FIG. 98C). In other words, the drive tooth 90340C is transferred to the distal end surface 90342C so as to slide while being in sliding contact from the tooth surface toward the tooth tip.

  Thereafter, when the tooth tip of the driven tooth 90350C reaches a substantially central position in the circumferential direction on the tip end surface 90342C, the second effect motor 90330 is turned off and the rotation of the pinion gear 90331 is stopped (see FIG. 98D). . In this state, the tip end surface 90342C is inclined to the rack gear 90322 side in the second direction so as to intersect the tooth tip line T, and the rack gear 90322 is directed upward by the urging force of the tension spring 90323. As a result, the tooth tip of the driven tooth 90350C is pressed against the tip end surface 90342C, and a restricted state (locked state) in which the movement of the rack gear 90322 in the second direction is restricted. That is, the drive teeth 90340C and the driven teeth 90350C constitute a restricting means for restricting the movement of the rack gear 90322 in the second direction (upward direction).

  Further, the pinion gear 90331 is a gear that is rotated by the second effect motor 90330, and the tip end surface 90342C that constitutes the restricting portion is configured by a curved surface that follows an arc centered on the drive shaft 90330a of the pinion gear 90331. Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), after the contact point S of the driven tooth 90350C with respect to the drive tooth 90340C moves from the tooth surface of the drive tooth 90340C to the tip surface 90342C, the pinion gear 90331 reaches the position shown in FIG. 98 (D). Does not displace the contact point S between the driven tooth 90350C and the tip end surface 90342C in the second direction of the rack gear 90322, so that the rack gear 90322 moves slightly according to the rotation of the pinion gear 90331, that is, the movable member 90321. Slightly increases the player's feeling of discomfort It can be prevented.

  For example, when the tip surface 90342C constituting the restricting portion is a flat surface, as shown in FIG. 98C, the contact point S of the driven tooth 90350C with the drive tooth 90340C is from the tooth surface of the drive tooth 90340C to the tip surface 90342C. When the pinion gear 90331 rotates to the position shown in FIG. 98D after moving, the contact point S ′ between the driven tooth 90350C and the tip end surface 90342C is displaced in the second direction of the rack gear 90322. Further, when the pinion gear 90331 is rotated in the first operation direction to release the restricted state, the urging force by the tension spring 90323 is increased as compared with the case where the tip end surface 90342C is a curved surface, and therefore for the second effect. The load applied to the motor 90330 is increased. Therefore, it is preferable that the front end surface 90342C is configured by a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 90330a of the pinion gear 90331.

  In this embodiment, since the second effect motor 90330 is a stepping motor, the drive teeth 90340C are stopped at the restriction position shown in FIG. 98D by the number of steps (rotation angle) from the reference position. The rotation of the pinion gear 90331 can be stopped. For example, a sensor or the like that detects that the drive tooth 90340C is in the restriction position shown in FIG. 98 (D) is provided, and the pinion gear 90331 is based on the detection status from the sensor. The rotation may be stopped.

  In addition, for example, stop positions for stopping the rotation of the pinion gear 90331 when changing to the restricted state are set at a plurality of positions within a range where the driven teeth 90350C abut on the distal end surface 90342C, and stopped at different places every predetermined number of times. By doing so, it is possible to avoid local deformation of the tip end surface 90342C due to wear due to repeated stops. In this case, for example, it is conceivable to extend the distal end surface 90342C in the circumferential direction of the missing portion 90341.

  Next, a method for canceling the restricted state will be described. First, in the restricted state shown in FIG. 99 (A), by rotating the pinion gear 90331 in the first operation direction, the drive teeth 90340C move, the tooth tips of the driven teeth 90350C move away from the tip surface 90342C, and the missing portion 90341 When the intersection of the tip surface 90342C and the tooth tip line T is released facing the rack gear 90322, the restriction of the driven tooth 90350C by the tip surface 90342C is released, and the regulation state is changed to the regulation release state.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (B), the rack gear 90322 is raised in the second direction by the tensile force of the tension spring 90323 when the restriction is released, so that the movable member 90321 moves from the first position toward the second position. Move at high speed. In this embodiment, since the first position is the initial driving position, as shown in FIG. 99C, the pinion gear 90331 is rotated in the first operating direction even after the restriction is released. When the drive teeth 90340B reach the position where they are engaged with the driven teeth 90350B, the second effect motor 90330 is turned off to stop the rotation of the pinion gear 90331.

  Therefore, when moving the movable member 90321 from the second position to the first position, the pinion gear 90331 is further rotated in the first operating direction, so that the drive gears 90340B, 90340A and the driven teeth 90350B, 90350A mesh with each other. 90322 can be moved in the first direction. As described above, the movable member 90321 can be moved from the first position to the second position and can be moved from the second position to the first position only by rotating the pinion gear 90331 in the first operation direction. The control load of the effect control CPU 90120 for controlling the second effect motor 90330 can be reduced.

  FIG. 100 shows another example of a method for canceling the restricted state. In the restricted state shown in FIG. 100A, the drive teeth 90340C are moved by rotating the pinion gear 90331 in the second operation direction opposite to the first operation direction, so that the tooth tips of the driven teeth 90350C move from the tip end surface 90342C. The intersection of the tip end surface 90342C and the tooth tip line T is released, but the driven tooth 90350C enters the tooth gap between the driving tooth 90340C and the driving tooth 90340A, and as shown in FIG. 98 (A), the driven Since the tooth surface of the tooth 90350C contacts the tooth surface of the drive tooth 90340C, the movement of the rack gear 90322 in the second direction by the tension spring 90323 is restricted by the contact with the drive tooth 90340C.

  Therefore, the rack gear 90322 can be raised by the rotation of the pinion gear 90331 by further rotating the pinion gear 90331 in the second operation direction. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, when the restricted state is released by rotating the pinion gear 90331 in the first operating direction in the restricted state, the movable member 90321 is moved from the first position at the predetermined speed by the urging force of the tension spring 90323. As shown in FIG. 100, when the restricted state is released by rotating the pinion gear 90331 in the second operation direction in the restricted state, the movable member 90321 is moved from the first position to the second position at an arbitrary speed. It can be moved to a position.

  Specifically, if the pinion gear 90331 is rotated at a low speed, the movable member 90321 can be raised at a low speed, and if the pinion gear 90331 is rotated at a high speed, the movable member 90321 can be raised at a high speed. Moreover, it can be raised in various ways, such as being stopped while being raised, or moved up and down.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to this embodiment, the pinion gear 90331 serving as a drive gear rotated (actuated) by the second effect motor 90330 serving as a drive source is meshed with the pinion gear 90331. A rack gear 90322 as a driven gear. The rack gear 90322 is urged by a tension spring 90323 in a second direction opposite to the first direction moved (operated) by the pinion gear 90331. The pinion gear 90331 90340A, 90340B, 90340C partially missing missing portion 90341, and a tip surface 90342C as a restricting portion provided at the tip of the drive tooth 90340C adjacent to the missing portion 90341 as a drive tooth, 90340C and rack gear 9032 After the engagement between the toothed 90350C in is released, the movement in the second direction of the rack gear 90 322 is restricted by the driven Doha 90350C comes into contact with the distal end surface 90342C.

  That is, when the engagement between the drive teeth 90340C and the driven teeth 90350C is released and the missing portion 90341 faces the rack gear 90322, the driven teeth 90350C of the rack gear 90322 biased in the second direction come into contact with the tip end surface 90342C. Movement in the second direction is restricted. As described above, the movement of the rack gear 90322 in the second direction can be restricted by using the front end surface 90342C provided on the drive teeth 90340C of the pinion gear 90331, so that the rack gear 90322 and the movable member 90321 move in the first direction. The operation of the rack gear 90322 can be stopped with a simple structure of the driving gear and the driven gear without increasing the number of parts by separately providing a regulating means for regulating the above.

  In the above embodiment, the rack gear 90322, which is a driven gear, is biased in the second direction by the tension spring 90323, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and the driven gear is not a spring member. The biasing means may be biased in the second direction. In addition, for example, when the movable portion 90302 is provided upside down, the rack gear 90322 is constantly urged downward (second direction) by the load of the movable member 90321, and thus is urged in the second direction by its own weight. Are also included.

  The pinion gear 90331 is a gear that is rotated by a second effect motor 90330, and the rack gear 90322 is a first position (position shown in FIG. 95A) and a second position different from the first position (FIG. 95 ( C), and the pinion gear 90331 rotates in the first operation direction that operates the rack gear 90322 in the first direction, so that the drive teeth 90340A, 90340B, 90340C and the driven teeth 90350A, After moving from the second position to the first position by meshing with 90350B and 90350C, the missing portion 90341 faces and the meshing between the drive teeth 90340A, 90340B and 90340C and the driven teeth 90350A, 90350B and 90350C is released. It is urged in the second direction by the tension spring 90323 to move to the first position. Operated to the second position.

  As described above, the rack gear 90322 can be reciprocated only by rotating the pinion gear 90331 in the first operation direction, so that the control load of the second effect motor 90330 can be reduced.

  In addition, in a restricted state in which the movement of the rack gear 90322 in the second direction is restricted by the contact of the driven teeth 90350C with the tip end surface 90342C, the pinion gear 90331 is moved in the first direction as shown in FIG. It can be released by operating in the first operating direction to be operated or in the second operating direction opposite to the first operating direction as shown in FIG.

  In this way, if the restricted state is not released even if the pinion gear 90331 is rotated in one of the first operation direction and the second operation direction, the rack gear 90322 is released by operating in the other direction. It becomes easy to avoid that the driven tooth 90350C of the second gear engages with the tip end surface 90342C and cannot move the rack gear 90322.

  Further, in the restricted state, the operation mode of the rack gear 90322 is different when the pinion gear 90331 is rotated in the first operation direction and when the pinion gear 90331 is rotated in the second operation direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), when the pinion gear 90331 is rotated in the first operation direction, the rack gear 90322 is raised by the urging force of the tension spring 90323, and as shown in FIG. 100 (B). When the pinion gear 90331 is rotated in the second operation direction, the rack gear 90322 is raised according to the rotation of the pinion gear 90331, so that the operation mode of the movable member 90321 integrated with the rack gear 90322 can be diversified.

  Further, the tooth thickness dimension L3 of the drive teeth 90340C is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the other drive teeth 90340A and 90340B (for example, the tooth thickness dimension L1 <L2 <L3). By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage or the like due to a load applied to the drive teeth 90340C when the meshing state is changed from the non-meshing state that is not meshed with the driven teeth 90350A, 90350B, 90350C. In addition, since the tooth thickness dimension L3 is widened, the tip end surface 90342C constituting the restricting portion is also widened, so that the driven tooth 90350C is easily restricted.

  The pinion gear 90331 is a gear that is rotated by the second effect motor 90330, and the distal end surface 90342C that constitutes the restricting portion is configured by a curved surface that follows an arc centered on the drive shaft 90330a of the pinion gear 90331. Even if the pinion gear 90331 rotates while the driven tooth 90350C is in contact with the front end surface 90342C, the contact point S between the driven tooth 90350C and the front end surface 90342C is not displaced in the moving direction of the rack gear 90322. As a result, the rack gear 90322 can be prevented from finely moving according to the rotation.

  In addition, the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 90350C meshing with the drive tooth 90340C in the driven tooth is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L11 and L12 of the other driven teeth 90350B and 90350C (tooth thickness dimension L11 <L12). <L13) By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage or the like due to a load applied to the driven teeth 90350C when the meshed state is changed from the non-engaged state that is not meshed with the drive teeth 90340C. Further, it is possible to prevent damage due to a load applied by a force biased in the second direction in a state where the contact portion is in contact with the restriction portion.

[Direction unit cable]
Referring to FIGS. 90, 95, and 96, effect unit 90300 is provided with a cable 90361 that supplies power to the LED of light emitting portion 90321A of movable member 90321.

  96 (A) and 96 (B) schematically show the side surfaces of FIGS. 95 (A) and 95 (B), respectively. In FIG. 96, the distance between the movable member 90321 and the rotating member 90320 and the distance between the rotating member 90320 and the rack gear 90322 are drawn wider for the sake of clarity. It is narrower than.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the cable 90361 is a movable member 90321 from a connector 90363 provided on a relay board from the effect control board 9012 of the base portion 90301, through a pressing member 90364 of a cable 90361 provided on the rotating member 90320. The light emitting unit 90321A is connected to a connector 90362 provided on an LED board on which the LED is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 96A, when the movable member 90321 is waiting in the first position, the portion between the pressing member 90364 and the connector 90362 of the cable 90361 is considerably bent. .

  As shown in FIG. 96 (B), when the movable member 90321 is advanced to the second position, the portion between the pressing member 90364 of the cable 90361 and the connector 90362 is extended and there is not much room. Become.

  For this reason, a force in the direction from the second position to the first position is applied to the movable member 90321 by the cable 90361. When the cable 90361 is extended, the covering material of the cable 90361 is resin. Therefore, when the cable 90361 is cold, the force applied to the movable member 90321 by the cable 90361 is less than when the cable 90361 is cold. Become stronger.

  The tension spring 90323 is pulled by the second effect motor 90330 until the movable member 90321 reaches the second position. For this reason, the second effect motor 90330 can generate a force stronger than the tensile force (biasing force) in the state where the tension spring 90323 is most pulled.

  As described above, the urging force of the tension spring 90323 exceeds the load of the movable member 90321. However, when the urging force of the tension spring 90323 is increased, the output of the second effect motor 90330 that pulls the tension spring 90323 needs to be increased. When a motor with a large output is used, the manufacturing cost increases, and therefore it is preferable that the output of the motor be the minimum necessary.

  As the tension spring 90323 in this embodiment, not only the load of the movable member 90321 but also the force of pulling the movable member 90321 when the cable 90361 is extended and the cost of the second effect motor 90330 are considered. A spring that can obtain the minimum required biasing force is used.

  For this reason, in the unlikely event that a bad quality cable 90361 is used and it becomes hard at a low temperature, it is considered that the urging force of the tension spring 90323 is insufficient when the movable member 90321 is first moved. Normally, cables that are harder than expected at low temperatures are not used.

  However, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 that has been left and cooled at night is started in order to prevent a situation in which the urging force of the tension spring 90323 is insufficient, a later-described diagram is used. As shown in step S90515 of 105, a running-in operation for getting used to the movement of the movable member 90321 is performed. By performing the running-in operation of moving the movable member 90321 from the first position to the second position, the cable 90361 can be flexed and stretched so that the cable 90361 can be used flexibly. As a result, a situation where the urging force of the tension spring 90323 is insufficient can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated, the cable 90361 is used to generate heat (effect display device 905, first effect motor 90303, and second effect motor 90330). Since the cable 90361 is provided in the vicinity, the state where the cable 90361 is highly flexible by heat is maintained.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the movable member break-in process (S9051A) in the effect control main process. Referring to FIG. 105, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the first effect motor 90303 to move the movable portion 90302 to the standing position (S90511).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether an abnormality has been detected in the movement of the movable portion 90302 (S90512). When it is determined that an abnormality has been detected (YES in S90512), the effect control CPU 90120 notifies the abnormality of the movable unit 90302 (S90513). The notification is performed by display on the effect display device 905 and sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not an operation to stop the notification has been performed by a store clerk of the game store (S90514). When it is determined that an abnormality in the movement of the movable unit 90302 has not been detected (NO in S90512), and when it is determined that an operation for stopping the notification has been performed (YES in S90514), the effect control CPU 90120 is movable. The second effect motor 90330 is controlled to move the member 90321 to the first position (S90515). Here, the movable member 90321 may be reciprocated between the second position and the first position.

  Thus, since the movable member is moved by the second effect motor 90330 having a stronger force than the tension spring 90323, the movable member 90321 can be moved more reliably. Thus, the movement of the cable 90361 and the movable member 90321 can be accustomed by changing the cable 90361 from the bent state to the extended state.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not an abnormality is detected in the movement of the movable member 90321 (S90516). When it is determined that an abnormality has been detected (YES in S90516), the effect control CPU 90120 notifies the abnormality of the movable member 90321 (S90517). The notification is performed by display on the effect display device 905 and sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not an operation to stop the notification has been performed by a store clerk of the game store (S90518). When it is determined that an abnormality in the movement of the movable member 90321 has not been detected (NO in S90516), and when it is determined that an operation for stopping the notification is performed (YES in S90518), the effect control CPU 90120 executes Return the process to be performed to the caller of this process.

  Next, control of the LEDs 909a to 909e will be described. The LEDs 909a to 909e can emit light (turn on, blink, etc.) with a plurality of types of light emission patterns corresponding to the effect to be executed. When the control data is set in the control data area provided in the RAM 90122, the effect control CPU 90120 can control the LEDs 909a to 909e to emit light (light on, blink, etc.) in a predetermined light emission pattern. ing.

  The control data set in the control data area is data for performing light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.) control in each of the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F. Specifically, an identifier for uniquely identifying each light emission pattern is assigned, and the control data described above is data indicating this identifier. When control data is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the control data and outputs it to each of the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F. In each of the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F, the LEDs 909a to 909e are turned on by controlling the light emitter drivers 90411a, 90411b, 90413a to 90413c, and the like so as to emit light with the light emission pattern identified by the identifier indicated by the control data. / Driven off. On the other hand, when the control data area is NULL, it is determined that no control data is set in the control data area. The timing at which the control data is set is the timing at which control is started by the control data or the timing before the control is started by the control data. In the following description, when an effect by any one of the LEDs 909a to 909e is described, it may be simply expressed as an LED effect.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating an example of the control data area. The control data area includes at least one control data area and another control data area. Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, five control data areas of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 are included. And each layer respond | corresponds to the sound production which outputs an audio | voice. For example, the “error” effect is an effect in which a screen showing an error is also displayed on the effect display device 905, and corresponds to an effect that outputs an error sound. The sound effect includes an effect (silence effect) that does not produce sound, and there may be an LED effect corresponding to the silence effect. The LED effect corresponding to the silence effect is an effect of causing the LED to emit light, not turning it off.

  Also, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 have priorities set, and layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 (layer 1 is the highest in order of increasing priority). The priority is low, and the layer 5 has the highest priority). Here, “priority is set” specifically means that when the production control CPU 90120 controls the LEDs 909a to 909e, layer 5, layer 4, layer 3, layer 2, and layer 1 in this order. Control for determining whether or not control data is set, and outputting the control data set in the control data area determined to be set to each of the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F. Therefore, priority is given to layer 5, layer 4, layer 3, layer 2, and layer 1 in this order. In addition, the example which implement | achieves the setting of a priority is not restricted to this, For example, you may make it assign the value which shows a priority to each layer. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 first refers to the values assigned to all layers for which control data is set (even if control data is set for a plurality of layers). Thus, the control data set in the layer assigned the highest priority value (for example, the maximum value) is output to each of the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F.

  Thus, since the priority order is set for the layers, only one LED effect is performed in the LED effect and a plurality of LED effects are not performed at the same time, but the sound effect corresponding to the LED effect is simultaneously performed. Sometimes done. For example, if control data for BGM effects is set in the control data area for layer 1 and no control data for other effects is set in the control data area for layers with higher priority than layer 1, BGM BGM is performed as a sound effect together with the LED effect of the effect. In this state, for example, when control data for another effect is set in the control data area of layer 3, the LED effect for the BGM effect ends and the LED effect for another effect is performed in the LED effect. In sound production, BGM and sound production of other productions are performed simultaneously.

  When the control data is set in any one of the control data areas, the effect control CPU 90120 emits (lights up) the LEDs 909a to 909e with a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set. , Blinking, etc.) Specifically, for example, when the gaming state is the low base state, as shown in FIG. 106, when the control data is set in the layer 1, it corresponds to the BGM effect (normal variation, reach variation) of the layer 1 Control is performed so that the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (turn on, blink, etc.) with the light emission pattern. When control data is set for layer 2, control is performed so that LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights, blinks, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the notice B effect of layer 2. When control data is set for layer 3, control is performed so that LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (light on, blink, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the notice A effect of layer 3. Further, when control data is set for layer 4, control is performed so that LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights up, blinks, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the final notification effect of layer 4. When control data is set for layer 5, control is performed so that LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights, blinks, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the error effect of layer 5.

  Further, when the gaming state is the high base state, as shown in FIG. 106, when the control data is set in the layer 1, the LED 909a has a light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (normal variation) in the layer 1. ˜909e are controlled to emit light (light on, blink, etc.). When control data is set for layer 2, control is performed so that LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights up, blinks, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (reach fluctuation) of layer 2. When control data is set for layer 3, control is performed so that LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights up, blinks, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the notice effect (all) of layer 3. Further, when control data is set for layer 4, control is performed so that LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights up, blinks, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the final notification effect of layer 4. When control data is set for layer 5, control is performed so that LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights, blinks, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the error effect of layer 5.

  Further, when the gaming state is the big hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. 106, when the control data is set in the layer 1, the LED 909a to the light emitting pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (big hit) of the layer 1 Control 909e to emit light (light on, blink, etc.). In addition, when control data is set in layer 2, control is performed so that LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights up, blinks, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the notice effect (holding continuous, promotion) of layer 2. To do. When control data is set for layer 3, control is performed so that LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights up, blinks, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the big prize winning prize effect of layer 3. When control data is set for layer 4, control is performed so that LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights up, blinks, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the probability variation winning effect of layer 4. When control data is set for layer 5, control is performed so that LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights, blinks, etc.) with a light emission pattern corresponding to the error effect of layer 5.

  When control data is set in both control data areas, the effect control CPU 90120 emits LEDs 909a to 909e in a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area set with a high priority (lights on, It can be controlled to blink). Specifically, for example, when control data is set in both the layer 2 and layer 3 control data areas, the light emission pattern corresponding to the layer 3 which is the control data area set with a high priority is set. The LEDs 909a to 909e can be controlled to emit light (turn on, blink, etc.). Furthermore, when the control data is set in the control data areas of layer 2, layer 3, and layer 4, the LED 909a has a light emission pattern corresponding to layer 4 that is the control data area set with a high priority. ˜909e can be controlled to emit light (light on, blink, etc.).

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the light emission pattern when the control data is set in one control data area during the first gaming state and one control during the second gaming state different from the first gaming state. The light emission pattern when the control data is set in the data area is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the control data area is provided for each gaming state (low base state, high base state, big hit gaming state). For example, in the low base state, for example, the light emission pattern (the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice A effect) when the control data is set in the control data area of layer 2 is different from the low base state, for example, the high base state The light emission pattern (light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect) when control data is set in the control data area of layer 2 is different.

  The setting in the control data area shown in FIG. 106 is reset every time one game is finished in principle. “One game” means that when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the game starts from the start of the variable display and ends by the stop display of the variable display. In the case, the game from the start to the end of the big hit game state is shown.

  Therefore, when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the control data is set at the start timing of the variable display or the start timing of the effect during the variable display, and is determined for each variable display stop display or each effect. It is reset when the specified time has elapsed. Even when the timing when the time determined for each effect has elapsed does not come, the variable display is reset when stopped.

  In addition, when the gaming state is a big hit gaming state, the control data is set in a special figure waiting process in S90173 or a big hit gaming process in S90176, and when the big hit is finished, the round is finished, or each It is reset at the timing when the time determined for each performance has elapsed.

  Setting of LED effect control data by LEDs 909a to 909e corresponding to effects (e.g., pre-reading notice effects and effects including multiple jackpots) that are performed across a plurality of games are reset upon completion of the game. It will never be done. In addition, the LED effect performed over a plurality of games is a combination of one game that differs depending on the game state described above as one game, and the effect over a plurality of one game is also an LED effect. Good.

  Next, each effect shown in FIG. 106 will be described. As described above, the LED control in this embodiment corresponds to the sound effects in each effect shown in FIG. In the following description, an LED that emits light (lights up, blinks, etc.) is described in each effect. However, when only the described LED emits light (lights up, blinks, etc.), other LEDs also emit light (light up, light up, etc.). May blink).

  In FIG. 106, the error effect corresponds to the error designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100, the error image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 905, and the error sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R. This is an effect in which error notification or the like is performed by an error light emission operation or the like in LEDs 909a to 909e. The error effect in this embodiment is an effect in which all of the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (light on, blink, etc.). As shown in FIG. 106, the effect control CPU 90120 does not depend on the gaming state when the control data is set in the control data area (layer 5) in which the highest priority is set. Control is performed so that light is emitted (lighted, blinked, etc.) with a light emission pattern indicating an error effect.

  The confirmed notification effect is an effect in which LEDs arranged in a V-shape blink, or a V-shaped symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 905. This is an effect (notice) indicating confirmation.

  For example, in the probability variation prize production, a V probability variation type gaming machine in which the state after the big hit is determined by the presence or absence of a probability variation prize opening (or a predetermined area provided in the probability variation prize opening, hereinafter, a probability variation prize opening, etc.). Is an effect that is performed when a prize is placed in a probable winning opening or the like. Generally, when winning at a promising winning prize opening or the like, the state after the big hit is set as a probable change state. When not winning through the probable winning prize opening or the like, the state after the big win is set as a non-probable change state. In this case, an effect is provided that allows the player to aim for winning in the probability variation prize opening and the like, and this effect is referred to as a probability variation challenge effect in this embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in FIG. 1 is not provided with a probability variation prize opening. However, in order to explain an example of LED control, the probability variation prize effect in this embodiment is, for example, in the special variable prize winning ball device 907. The above-mentioned predetermined area is provided, and an LED (for example, an LED provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907) emits light (turns on, blinks, etc.) when winning in the predetermined area. In this embodiment, the probability variation challenge effect is an effect in which an LED (for example, an LED provided in the special variable winning ball device 907) emits light (such as lighting or blinking). This probability variation entrance is also called a probability variation attacker.

  In this embodiment, the notice A effect and the notice B effect are effects in the display area of the effect display device 905 while the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights, blinks, etc.). Character A is an effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device 905, and the notice B effect is an effect in which the character B is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 905. “Notice (all)” indicates a notice A effect and a notice B effect. In addition, among “notice (holding ream, promotion)”, the notice (holding ream) has a big hit hold when there is a big hit hold in the hold held before or during the big hit. It is an effect that gives notice in a big hit. The advance notice (promotion) is the above-described jackpot promotion effect or the round number promotion effect in which the number of jackpot rounds is increased from 8 rounds to 16 rounds, for example. This “notice (holding continuation, promotion)” is an effect in the display area of the effect display device 905 while the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (light on, blink, etc.).

  The grand prize winning prize effect is an effect performed when a prize is awarded to the special variable winning ball apparatus 907. The big winning opening winning effect in this embodiment is an effect in which the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights up, blinks, etc.) every time the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 wins. In this grand prize opening prize production, there is a case where an effect that is particularly conspicuous at the time of so-called over-winning is performed.

  In each effect described above, not only an LED effect but also an effect other than an LED effect (for example, a sound effect by sound, a display effect by an effect display device 905, or an effect in which a sound effect and a display effect are combined). Although it may be performed, in the following description, unless otherwise specified, “effect” indicates only an LED effect in the effect. When showing the whole production including the LED production and the production other than the LED, it is expressed as “production (all)”. Further, when an effect other than LED is indicated, it is expressed as “effect (other than LED)”. For example, “BGM effect” indicates only the LED effect, and “BGM effect (all)” indicates the entire effect including effects other than LED such as sound effect in addition to the LED effect, and “BGM effect (other than LED)”. "Indicates an effect other than the LED, such as a sound effect.

  Moreover, in each effect demonstrated above, the priority of a BGM effect is set to the lowest in any game state on the property of BGM. In the low base state, the notice A effect has a higher priority than the notice B effect, because the notice A effect is an effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the notice B effect. Furthermore, in the low base state, the confirmed notification effect has a higher priority than the notice A effect, because the confirmed notification effect is an effect indicating the big hit confirmation.

  In the high base state, the BGM (reach variation) production has a higher priority than the BGM (normal) production, because the BGM (reach variation) production is a production with a higher expectation of jackpot than the BGM (normal) production. It is. In the high base state, the notice (all) effect has a higher priority than the BGM (reach fluctuation) effect, but this is because the notice (all) effect has a higher expectation of jackpot than the BGM (reach change) effect. It is. In the high base state, the confirmed notification effect has a higher priority than the notice (all) effect, which is because the confirmed notification effect is an effect having a higher degree of expectation than the notice (all) effect.

  In the jackpot game state, the notice (holding ream, promotion) production has a higher priority than the BGM (hit winning) production, but this is an effect that is more important to the player than the BGM (hit winning) production. Because there is. In the big hit gaming state, the grand prize opening prize production has a higher priority than the notice (holding series, promotion) production, but this is performed every time a prize is won. Promotion) effect (other than LED) is generally an effect that is performed in the display area of the effect display device 905 for a relatively longer time than the prize winning prize winning effect. If the priority is set higher, the player can be notified of any effect, but if the priority is set higher than the prize winning effect, the advance notice (holding, promotion) This is because only the rendition (promotion, promotion) effect is performed, and the grand prize opening prize effect is not performed. In addition, as described above, in the big prize opening prize production, the production at the time of over-winning is generally performed, and the over-winning is a profit that is not originally obtained for the player, so the importance of the production is It is also because it is expensive.

  The setting of the control data for each effect is reset when the time determined for each effect elapses, except for the control data for the effect performed across the BGM effect and the plurality of games. In addition, there is an effect (all) that branches into two or more effects (all) as an effect (all) in a general pachinko gaming machine. When branching to such a plurality of effects (all), the control data for the effect corresponding to the branching is reset.

  The control data set in each control data area described above is an example, and is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 106, but is set as appropriate according to the performance of the pachinko gaming machine.

  107 and 108 are time charts showing examples of LED control. First, in the time chart shown in FIG. 107, there is a start prize at time T1 when no error notification is executed, the gaming state is in a low base state, variable display is not performed, and there is no hold. The time chart when the effect design starts to change, the notice B effect occurs at time T2, and the notice A effect occurs at time T3 is shown. The BGM effect (other than LED) is performed from time T1 to the end, the notice B effect (other than LED) is performed from time T2 to the last, and the notice A effect (other than LED) is performed from time T3 to the end. It has been broken. The control target LEDs are LEDs 909a to 909e as an example.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 107, the vertical axis represents LED control corresponding to each layer, and the horizontal axis represents time.

  Further, in FIG. 107, the control data set in the control data area of layer 5 is used as control data for error presentation, and the control data set in the control data area of layer 4 is used for control of definite notification production. The control data set in the control data area of layer 3 is the control data for the notice A effect, and the control data set in the control data area of layer 2 is the control data for the notice B effect. The control data set in the control data area of layer 1 is used as control data for the BGM effect.

  The LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (colored, blinking, etc.) in color A in the error effect, emit light (colored, blinking, etc.) in color B in the final notification effect, and emit light (colored, blinking, etc.) in color C in the notice A effect. In the notice B effect, light is emitted (lighted, blinked, etc.) in color D, and in the BGM effect, light is emitted (lighted, blinked, etc.) in color E.

  In addition, the time chart shown in FIG. 107 shows a display mode indicating the emission colors of the LEDs 909a to 909e. In this display mode, “OFF” indicates that the LEDs 909a to 909e are turned off, and the alphabet indicates that the corresponding color is emitted (lighted, blinked, etc.). The expression “erasure” or alphabet is also used in other time charts to be described.

  Further, in the time chart shown in FIG. 107, it is also shown whether or not an effect (other than LED) corresponding to each layer is executed. For example, since the BGM effect (all) is an effect of executing a sound effect together with an LED effect, the sound effect can be executed even when the priority order is low and the LED effect is not executed.

  Moreover, in the case of FIG. 107, each effect (except LED) can be performed simultaneously. For example, the notice A effect (other than LED) and the notice B effect (other than LED) can be executed simultaneously.

  Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 107 will be described. First, since no control data is set in each control data area, the LEDs 909a to 909e are turned off as shown in the LED display mode.

  There is a start prize at time T1, and control data is set in the control data area of layer 1, so that BGMLED control is turned on. Thereby, as shown in the LED display mode, the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (lights up, blinks, etc.) with the color E.

  Next, at time T2, the control data is set in the control data area of layer 2 having higher priority than layer 1, so that the notice BLED control is turned on and the BGMLED control is turned off. Thereby, as shown in the LED display mode, the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (light on, blink, etc.) with the color D.

  Next, at time T3, control data is set in the control data area of layer 3 having a higher priority than layer 2, so that the notice ALED control is turned on and the notice BLED control is turned off. Thereby, as shown in the LED display mode, the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (light on, blink, etc.) in color C. According to the control shown in FIG. 107, the notice B effect important for the player is prioritized over the BGM effect, and the notice A effect more important than the notice B effect is prioritized. Since the visual effect can be appropriately given, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, in the time chart shown in FIG. 108, in a state where the gaming state is the low base state, the variable display is not performed, and there is no hold, there is a start prize at time T1, and the production design starts to fluctuate. The case where the notice B effect occurs at time T2 and the notice A effect occurs at time T3 is the same as in FIG. 107, but shows a time chart when error notification is being executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 108, since error notification is being executed, an error effect (other than LED) is being executed, and control data is set in the control data area of layer 5, so that the LED display mode As shown in FIG. 4, the LEDs 909a to 909e emit light (light on, blink, etc.) in color A. Since the error notification control data set in the layer 5 has the highest priority, the time T1, time T2, and time T3 become the generation timing of the BGM effect, the notice B effect, and the notice A effect. In addition, the error LED control is continued and the execution of the error effect (other than the LED) is also continued.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the BGM effect (other than LED), the notice B effect (other than LED), and the notice A effect (other than LED) can be executed at the same time even during error notification.

  Further, in FIGS. 107 and 108, as an example, an example of LED control in the case where the gaming state is in the low base state is shown, but the case where the gaming state is in the high base state or the big hit gaming state is also illustrated. LED control is performed in accordance with the priority order of layers indicated by 106.

  109 and 110 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect execution setting process executed in the effect symbol variation start process (step S9074). This flowchart will be described using the control data area shown in FIG. 106 as an example. Further, in the description of this flowchart, “setting the control data of the effect Y in the control data area of the layer N and setting the LED control data of the effect control pattern according to the start timing of the effect Y” is simply “the effect. Y control data is set to layer N ”. For example, the description “setting the control data for the notice effect in layer 2” means that the control data for the notice effect is set in the control data area of layer 2 and the effect control pattern is set according to the start timing of the notice effect. It means “setting LED control data”.

  In the effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 109, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the error LED is being emitted (for example, whether or not the LEDs 909a to 909e are emitting light (lighted, blinking, etc.) in color A). This is performed (step S90901). The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the error notification processing in step S9054A has been executed.

  If the error LED is being emitted (step S90901; Yes), since the error effect has the highest priority, the effect control CPU 90120 proceeds to step S90915 without setting the control data in the lower layer.

  If the error LED is being emitted (step S90901; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (step S90902). When the gaming state is the high base state (step S90902; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern (step S90903). If the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern (step S90903; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets control data for BGM (reach variation) effect in layer 2 (step S90904), and proceeds to step S90906. When the variation pattern is not the reach variation pattern (step S90903; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the control data for the BGM (normal variation) effect in layer 1 (step S90905), and proceeds to step S90906.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a notice determination process for determining whether to execute the notice effect (step S90906). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a variation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates super reach α, β, it is determined using a lottery process based on random numbers. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the notice effect from the decision result of the notice determination process (step S90907). When the notice effect is not executed (step S90907; No), the process proceeds to step S90909. When executing the notice effect (step S90907; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the control data of the notice effect in the layer 3 (step S90908).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a confirmation notification determination process for determining whether to execute the confirmation notification effect (step S90909). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a variation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates a big hit, it is determined using a lottery process based on a random number. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the confirmation notification effect from the determination result of the determination notification determination process (step S90910). When the confirmation notification effect is not executed (step S90910; No), the process proceeds to step S90912. When executing the confirmation notification effect (step S90910; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets control data for the confirmation notification effect in the layer 4 (step S90911). Next, the effect control CPU 90120 selects each effect control pattern determined in each determination process (step S90912). Then, the effect execution setting process ends.

  Returning to the process of step S90902, if the gaming state is the low base state (step S90902; No), the process proceeds to step S90913 of FIG. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern (step S90913). When the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern (step S90913; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the control data for the BGM (reach variation) effect in layer 1 (step S90914), and proceeds to step S90916. When the variation pattern is not the reach variation pattern (step S90913; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 sets control data for BGM (normal variation) effect in layer 1 (step S90915), and proceeds to step S90916.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a notice B determination process for determining whether to execute the notice B effect (step S90916). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a variation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates super reach α, β, it is determined using a lottery process based on random numbers. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether to execute the notice B effect from the decision result of the notice B decision process (step S90917). When the notice B effect is not executed (step S90917; No), the process proceeds to step S90919. When the notice B effect is executed (step S90917; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets control data for the notice B effect in layer 2 (step S90918).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a notice A determination process for determining whether to execute the notice A effect (step S90919). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a variation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates super reach α, β, it is determined using a lottery process based on random numbers. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether to execute the notice A effect from the determination result of the notice A determination process (step S90920). When the notice A effect is not executed (step S90920; No), the process proceeds to step S90922. When executing the notice A effect (step S90920; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets control data for the notice A effect in layer 3 (step S90921).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a confirmation notification determination process for determining whether to execute the confirmation notification effect (step S90922). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a variation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates a big hit, it is determined using a lottery process based on a random number. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the confirmation notification effect from the determination result of the determination notification determination process (step S90923). When the confirmation notification effect is not executed (step S90923; No), the process proceeds to step S90912. When executing the confirmation notification effect (step S90923; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 sets control data for the confirmation notification effect in the layer 4 (step S90924).

  In addition to the control of the LEDs 909a to 909e in the effect symbol variation start process described above, the LEDs 909a to 909e are also controlled in a variation pattern command reception waiting process, an effect symbol variation process, a big hit game process, and the like. For example, in the variation pattern command reception waiting process, when a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 immediately displays the LEDs 909a to 909e in the LED mode in the customer waiting demonstration effect. . On the other hand, when the BGM effect is an effect that repeats a certain pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the LEDs 909a to 909e in the LED mode of the customer waiting demonstration effect several seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Thus, even when the same customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the control contents differ depending on the situation.

  Further, in the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LEDs 909a to 909e based on the start timing set in the effect symbol variation start process, and whether the time determined for each effect elapses, When the variable display ends, the setting of the control data for the effect is reset. Further, in the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 90120 may control the LEDs 909a to 909e in accordance with the player's operation. As an example of the player's operation, for example, there is an operation of pressing the trigger button of the stick controller 9031A. In response to such a pressing operation, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LEDs 909a to 909e in the effect symbol variation processing. In the big hit game processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the control data shown in FIG. 106 in the control data area to control the LEDs 909a to 909e, and the time determined for each effect elapses. Then, the setting of the control data for the effect is reset. Also, in the big hit game processing, the LEDs 909a to 909e may be controlled according to the player's operation, so the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LEDs 909a to 909e according to the pressing operation.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the data setting area (in this example, the control for the control shown in FIG. 106) having a plurality of layers (in this example, layers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 106) in which the priorities are set. Data area). Further, light emission data for performing light emission control of at least light emitters (LEDs 909a to 909e in this example) of the electrical components can be set in each layer of the data setting area. The control means (in this example, the effect control CPU 90120) can perform the light emission control of the light emitter based on the light emission data, and the light emission data is set in a plurality of layers in the data setting area. In addition, the light emission control of the light emitter is performed based on the light emission data set in the higher priority layer. Therefore, it is possible to perform light emission control of the light emitter by simply switching the priority order by switching layers.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of light emission patterns (for example, a BGM effect, a notice effect, a confirmation notification effect, a big prize opening prize effect, a probability change prize effect, an error effect, etc.) are executed. A light emitting device (for example, LEDs 909a to 909e) that can emit light with a color pattern, a blinking pattern, and the like, and a control unit (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) that can control the light emitting device. When the control data is set in the control data area, the light emitting device can be controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, the layer of FIG. 106). 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data area, etc.) and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4 and at least one of the control data areas in the layer 5 is a control data area different from the one control data area, and any one of the control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3), when control data is set in any one of the control data areas of layer 4, layer 4 and layer 5), it corresponds to the control data area in which the control data is set Control the light emitting device to emit light with a light emission pattern (for example, a light emission pattern corresponding to a BGM effect, a notice effect, a final announcement effect, a big prize winning effect, a probability change prize effect, an error effect, etc.) When control data is set in a data area (for example, two control data areas among the control data areas of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5) The light emitting device emits light with a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the priority (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5, etc.) is set higher in order of priority (for example, in order of decreasing priority) In the first gaming state (for example, the low base state of FIG. 106), control is performed in one control data area (for example, the control data area of layer 2 in the low base state of FIG. 106). The light emission pattern when the data for use (for example, the control data for the notice B effect set in the control data area of the layer 2 in the low base state in FIG. 106) is set is different from the first gaming state. Control data (for example, BG set in the control data area of layer 2 in the high base state in FIG. 106) in one control data area during the two gaming state (for example, the high base state in FIG. 106) And light emission pattern when the control data, etc. of the effect) is set are different. Therefore, the lamp effect can be performed in the priority order according to the game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of light emission patterns (for example, a BGM effect, a notice effect, a confirmation notification effect, a big prize opening prize effect, a probability change prize effect, an error effect, etc.) are executed. A light emitting device (for example, LEDs 909a to 909e) that can emit light with a color pattern, a blinking pattern, and the like, and a control unit (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) that can control the light emitting device. When the control data is set in the control data area, the light emitting device can be controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, the layer of FIG. 106). 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data area, etc.) and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4 and at least one of the control data areas in the layer 5 is a control data area different from the one control data area, and any one of the control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3), when control data is set in any one of the control data areas of layer 4, layer 4 and layer 5), it corresponds to the control data area in which the control data is set Control the light emitting device to emit light with a light emission pattern (for example, a light emission pattern corresponding to a BGM effect, a notice effect, a final announcement effect, a big prize winning effect, a probability change prize effect, an error effect, etc.) When control data is set in a data area (for example, two control data areas among the control data areas of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5) The light emitting device emits light with a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the priority (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5, etc.) is set higher in order of priority (for example, in order of decreasing priority) The control data area includes a first data area (for example, a control data area for layer 1) and a second data area (for example, a control data area for layer 2) in order of increasing priority. ), A third data area (for example, a control data area for layer 3) is provided, and control data for controlling the light emitting device to emit light as control data set in the second data area. (For example, control data for controlling the LED provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 to emit light) and extinction control data for controlling the light emitting apparatus to be extinguished. When control data (for example, control data for BGM production) is set in the first data area, the extinction control data is set in the second data area, and the extinction control data is set. Control data (for example, control data for a prize winning prize winning effect, etc.) can be set in the third data area. Therefore, a light emission pattern with a high priority can be made conspicuous, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The description of the effects shown in FIGS. 107 to 110 is an example, and the effects shown in this embodiment may be applied to other than the gaming states shown in FIGS. 107 to 110. Specifically, for example, the gaming state shown in FIG. 107 is a low base state, but it may be applied to a big hit gaming state.

  Moreover, although the effect in the control of the LED 909a to 909e described is a sound effect, the effect is not limited to the sound effect, and may be an effect executed in the effect display device 905, an effect of operating an accessory, or the like. Further, although the number of layers is five, the number of layers may be two or more. Furthermore, although the setting data area is provided for each of the low base state, the high base state, and the big hit gaming state, it is not limited to this, and is provided for each of various states such as the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state. You may do it.

  As the control data set in the control data area described above, the control data output to the lamp control board 9014 is taken as an example, but the address of the data indicating the light emission pattern or 1-bit data indicating on / off, etc. It may be.

  When the address of the data indicating the light emission pattern is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 90120 refers to the address set in the control data area and ramps the control data stored in the address. When the data is output to the control board 9014 and the control data area is NULL, it is determined that the control data is not set.

  When 1-bit data indicating ON / OFF is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 90120 corresponds to the control data area when “1” indicating ON is set in the control data area. When the control data indicating the light emission pattern of the effect to be output is output to the lamp control board 9014 and “0” indicating OFF is set in the control data area, it is determined that the control data is not set. Therefore, when “0” is set, the control data indicating the light emission pattern of the production corresponding to the control data area is not output to the lamp control board 9014. Therefore, the lamp 9 does not emit light with the light emission pattern. It becomes.

  Further, although the embodiment based on the color difference has been described as the light emission pattern of the lamp, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a blinking pattern having a different light emission interval may be used. Furthermore, specific examples of colors A, B, C, D, and E include blue, yellow, green, red, gold, and rainbow, but they may emit light in a plurality of colors.

  Further, in this embodiment, the control means is configured when the control data is set in the control data area (for example, the control data area of layer 5 in FIG. 106) in which the highest priority is set. Is controlled to emit light with a light emission pattern indicating an error regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, an error can be notified appropriately.

  In this embodiment, the first control data (for example, control data for the notice A effect in FIG. 106) for causing the light emitting device to emit light with the first light emission pattern when set in the control data area, There is second control data for causing the light emitting device to emit light in the second light emission pattern when set in the control data area. During one gaming state (for example, the low base state in FIG. 106), One control data (for example, control data for the notice A effect set in layer 3 in FIG. 106) is second control data (for example, control data for the notice B effect set in layer 2 in FIG. 106). The first control data (for example, FIG. 106 (for example, FIG. 106 (B)) in a gaming state (for example, the high base state in FIG. 106 (B)) that is set in the control data area having a higher priority than the one gaming state. B) The control data for the notice A effect set in the ear 2) has a lower priority than the second control data (for example, the control data for the notice B effect set in the layer 3 in FIG. 106B). Is set in the data area. Therefore, the lamp effect can be performed in the priority order according to the game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification of movable part drive mechanism]
Next, a modified example of the movable part driving mechanism will be described. FIGS. 111A to 111D are explanatory diagrams illustrating a situation in which a restriction unit serving as a first modification of the movable part drive mechanism changes to a restricted state. 112 (A) to 112 (D) are explanatory views showing a situation in which the state is changed to the restricted state by the restricting means as the second modification of the movable part driving mechanism. 113 (A) to 113 (D) are explanatory views showing a situation in which the state is changed to the restricted state by the restricting means as the third modification of the movable part driving mechanism. 114A is an explanatory view showing a restricting portion as a fourth modification of the movable portion drive mechanism, and FIG. 114B is an explanatory view showing a restricting portion as the fifth modified example of the movable portion drive mechanism.

  In the embodiment, the pinion gear 90331 is applied as an example of the drive gear, and the rack gear 90322 is applied as an example of the driven gear. However, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the drive gear and the driven gear are not limited thereto. The type of can be changed variously.

  For example, as in Modification 1 shown in FIG. 111, both the drive gear G1 and the driven gear G2 are rotating gears, and as shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to (D), the drive gear G1 is moved in the first operating direction. By rotating, the driven tooth 90410 of the driving tooth 90400 adjacent to the missing portion 90401 of the plurality of driving teeth is brought into contact with the driven tooth 90410 and the movement of the driven gear G2 in the second direction is restricted. can do.

  Thus, a rotating gear may be applied as the driven gear. In the embodiment, the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 90350C that meshes with the drive tooth 90340C as the adjacent drive tooth is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L11 and L12 of the other driven teeth 90350B and 90350C. However, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 90410 that meshes with the drive tooth 90400 as the adjacent drive tooth is greater than the tooth thickness dimension L11, 12 of the other driven teeth. May not be long.

  112, the drive gear G3 is a rack gear, the driven gear G4 is a rotating gear, and the drive gear G3 is moved in the first operating direction as shown in FIGS. 112 (A) to (D). By being moved, the driven tooth 90410 of the driving tooth 90400 adjacent to the missing portion 90401 of the plurality of driving teeth is brought into contact with the driven tooth 90410, and the driven gear G4 is restricted from moving in the second direction. be able to. Thus, a rack gear may be applied as the drive gear.

  In the embodiment, the tooth thickness dimension L3 of the drive teeth 90340C as the adjacent drive teeth having the tip surface 90342C as the restricting portion is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the other drive teeth 90340A and 90340B. However, the movable portion drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the tooth thickness dimension L3 of the drive teeth 90340C is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the other drive teeth 90340A and 90340B. It does not have to be.

  Specifically, as in Modification 3 shown in FIG. 113, the drive gear G5 is a rotating gear, the driven gear G6 is a rack gear, and the drive gear G5 is a first gear as shown in FIGS. By moving in the operating direction, the driven tooth 90410 of the driving tooth 90400 adjacent to the missing portion 90401 of the plurality of driving teeth makes contact with the driven tooth 90410, and the movement of the driven gear G6 in the second direction is restricted. It can be in a regulated state. As described above, the circumferential length of the tip surface 90402 of the driving tooth 90400 as the adjacent driving tooth is not necessarily longer than the circumferential length of the tip surface of the other driving teeth. As shown in FIG. 113 (D), when the tip surface 90402 crosses the tooth tip line T, it is substantially the same as or shorter than the circumferential length of the tip surface of the other drive teeth. Also good.

  In the above-described embodiment, the tip surface 90342C as the restricting portion is a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 90330a. However, the movable portion driving mechanism is not limited to this, for example, Further, it may be constituted by a flat surface, a spherical surface or a concave surface. In addition, as shown in Modification 4 of FIG. 114A, by forming a locking recess 90420 or the like in which the driven tooth 90350C can be locked in a part of the tip surface or in the entire tip surface, the driven tooth 90350C is formed. Even if it slides on the front end surface 90342C, the tooth tip of the driven tooth 90350C is easily engaged with the engaging recess 90420, so that the driven tooth 90350C slides on the front end surface 90342C as the restricting portion to be in a restricted state. It can suppress becoming difficult to change.

  In the above-described embodiment, the tip surface 90342C of the drive tooth 90340C adjacent to the missing portion 90341 is applied as an example of the restricting portion. However, the movable portion driving mechanism is not limited to this, and the restricting portion Is not limited to the one constituted by the tip surface of the drive teeth, and as shown in Modification 5 of FIG. 114 (B), the tip surface 90342C of the drive teeth 90340C and the missing portion from the tip surface 90342C It is good also as a control surface comprised by the extended surface 90430 extended to the 90341 side. That is, the restricting portion is not only formed by the tip surface of the drive tooth, but may be configured at a portion that does not function as the drive tooth, such as an extended surface extending from the tip surface to the missing portion side. Good.

  Further, the length dimension in the operation direction of the regulating surface composed of the tip end surface 90342C and the extending surface 90430 constituting the regulating portion is not limited to those described in the above-described embodiment and modification examples. A regulating surface such as the installation surface 90430 may be extended along the longitudinal direction of the missing portion 90341.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment and the modifications 1-4, the drive gear had the missing part which the drive tooth missing on the back side of the 1st operation direction of the adjacent drive tooth, but a missing part is a drive tooth. For example, a gear in which drive teeth are formed only on the arc of a fan-shaped gear, or a rack gear in which adjacent drive teeth are formed at the rear end of the first operation direction are also missing portions. Will have.

  In addition, the driven gear also has a missing portion in which the driven tooth on the rear side in the first direction is missing. For example, a gear in which the driven tooth is formed only on the arc of the fan-shaped gear or an adjacent drive tooth The rack gear or the like in which the driven teeth that mesh with the rear end portion are formed at the rear end portion in the first direction also has a missing portion.

  In the above embodiment, the rack gear and the pinion gear are applied as the types of the drive gear and the driven gear. However, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and a spur gear, a bevel gear, a helical gear, etc. May be applied.

  In the above embodiment, the pinion gear 90331 fixed to the drive shaft 90330a of the second effect motor 90330 is used as the drive gear, and the rack gear 90322 integrated with the movable member 90321 is used as the driven gear. The partial drive mechanism is not limited to this, and it is only necessary that two gears meshed with each other among the plurality of gears driven by the drive source are the drive gear and the driven gear. For example, a gear that meshes directly or indirectly with the pinion gear 90331 may be a drive gear, and a gear that meshes with the drive gear may be a driven gear. Further, the movable member 90321 may not be provided directly on the rack gear 90322 that is a driven gear. For example, the movable member 90321 may be provided on a part of a power transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the rack gear 90322.

  In the above embodiment, the driving gear and the driven gear are applied as the driving mechanism for moving the movable member 90321 between the first position and the second position with respect to the rotating member 90320. For example, the driving gear and the driven gear of this embodiment may be applied as a driving mechanism for driving the movable portion 90302 between the tilted position and the standing position, or other You may apply as a drive mechanism of a movable production | presentation unit. In addition to those that are applied to the drive mechanism that drives the movable part for production in this way, for example, a drive mechanism that opens and closes the door for the special prize winning ball device 907, etc. You may apply as a drive mechanism of a part.

[Example of production using movable members]
Next, an effect example using the movable member 90321 will be described. FIG. 115 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 905 when the battle reach effect is executed. FIG. 116 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 905 when the story reach effect is executed.

  Battle reach effects and story reach effects are executed by the CPU 90120 for effect control. Battle reach production and story reach production are multiple types of special reach production (supermarkets) that have a higher percentage of selections that result in jackpot display results compared to normal reach production called normal reach. It is a specific super reach production included in the “reach production”. Furthermore, in these super reach productions, the jackpot expectation is set, for example, as a relationship of battle reach production <story reach production. Note that the expectation of jackpot between the battle reach production and the story reach production may be reversed.

  Each of the battle reach effect and the story reach effect is an effect in which the effect display by the image display of the effect display device 905 and the effect operation of the movable member 90321 are combined.

  The battle reach effect shown in FIG. 115 will be described. In the variation display of the effect symbols, the effect symbol change display is started simultaneously in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, “left”, “right” In accordance with a predetermined stop order such as “medium”, the variation display of the effect symbols is sequentially stopped in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905R, and 905C, and finally the effect symbols are stopped in all the effect symbol display areas. Thus, when the display result is derived and displayed, the variable display ends.

  After the effect symbols change display is started all at once, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), when the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L and 905R are stopped, the reach is stopped. It becomes a state. The variation display until the timing of reaching the reach state is executed in a normal variation display effect mode that does not differ between normal reach and super reach. The normal reach and the super reach differ in the production mode after reaching the reach state.

  When the battle reach effect is executed as the reach effect, the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are reduced as shown in FIG. A small symbol display format is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a message image 9053 indicating the characters “battle reach” is displayed in the center of the screen. Thereby, it is notified that the battle reach effect is executed.

  In battle reach production, as shown in FIGS. 115 (C) to 115 (E), a video in which a teammate character 9061 (player's teammate side) and an enemy character 9062 (player's teammate) battle each other (battle). A battle effect that displays an image (effect including the output of the sound effect during the battle and the music sound during the battle) is executed.

  In the battle reach effect, when the variation display result becomes the jackpot display result, a victory effect image display in which the teammate character 9061 wins is displayed as shown in FIG. 115 (E), and further, in FIGS. 115 (D) and 115 (E). As shown in the figure, an image that superimposes the particle effect image 9071 is displayed on the victory effect image, and the movable member 90321 moves to the standing position, and the victory effect that appears in front of the display area of the effect display device 905 is executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the battle reach effect, when the fluctuation display result becomes a display error result, a defeat effect that displays an image in which the teammate character 9061 loses is performed, and a particle effect image 9071 as shown in FIGS. 115 (D) and 115 (E). And the effect using the movable member 90321 is not executed.

  Specifically, in the battle effect, after the display that the teammate character 9061 and the enemy character 9062 appear as shown in FIG. 115 (C), the teammate character 9061 and the enemy character are displayed as shown in FIG. 115 (D). A moving image in which the player battles with 9062 is displayed. For example, FIG. 115 (D) shows a scene in which the teammate character 9061 attacks the enemy character 9062. As shown in FIG. 115 (D), in a battle effect, in a scene where a friendly character 9061 attacks (a scene suggesting victory), a particle effect image as a display effect display in the area at the bottom center of the screen of the effect display device 905. 9071 is made to appear, and a particle effect effect is displayed that is superimposed on the victory effect display. When the teammate character 9061 wins, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), a victory effect is displayed in which an image that can identify that the teammate character 9061 has beaten the enemy character 9062 and the teammate character 9061 has won is displayed. Is done. In the victory effect, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), the movable member 90321 moves to the standing position, so that the movable body operation effect that appears in the central area of the display area of the effect display device 905 is obtained. Is done. The appearing movable member 90321 is caused to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (E), when the movable member 90321 appears due to the movable body operation effect and moves to the standing position, the appearance display number of the particle effect image 9071 to be superimposed is increased around the movable member 90321. Thus, a moving image showing a display mode in which the display range of the particle effect image 9071 is expanded is displayed. The moving image is an effect that is executed using the particle effect image 9071 in order to enhance the effect based on the operation of the movable member 90321, and is called an operation effect effect. By such an operation effect effect, an effect related to the operation mode of the movable member 90321 and the display mode of the particle effect image 9071 is executed. By executing such an effect, it is possible to produce an effect in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display means are linked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), a message image 9055 in which the jackpot display result (same symbol stop) is derived and displayed in the effect symbol that has been displayed in the small symbol format, and the message “Congratulations” is displayed. , It is displayed in the center of the screen as a reach result effect which is an effect indicating the result of the reach state. Thereby, it is notified that the player has won the battle reach effect (having a big hit). Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), the effect symbol for which the jackpot display result is displayed in the small symbol format is returned to the original size and the original position as shown in FIG. A stop symbol effect is displayed in which a message image 9074 with the characters “big hit” is displayed below the effect symbol.

  On the other hand, in the battle reach effect, when the fluctuation display result becomes the display error result, the defeat effect described above is executed, and the display error result is derived and displayed in the effect symbol displayed in the small symbol format. The original size and the original position are restored and displayed.

  Next, the story reach effect shown in FIG. 116 will be described. After the effect symbol variation display is started all at once, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L and 905R are stopped to reach the reach state, and then the reach effect is given. As shown in FIG. 116B, first, the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are reduced as shown in FIG. In a small symbol display format, it is moved and displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a message image 9054A showing the letters “first half of story” is displayed in the center of the screen. Thereby, it is notified that the story reach effect is executed.

  The story reach effect is an effect in which a moving image (story moving image) having a story like a specific story is displayed, for example. In this example, the story reach production has a two-part configuration of a first half and a second half. Story reach production is when the story is not completed and the production ends and the display result is derived and displayed, and when the story continues to the end and the production is completed and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed. There is.

  When the variable display result is an outlier display result, the effect that the story reach effect ends in the first half is executed, and when the variable display result becomes the jackpot display result, the story reach effect continues from the first half to the second half. An effect that continues up to may be executed.

  In addition, the story reach production may be set so that the performance is selected so that the person who has performed until the end has a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the case where the production is finished in the first half . Further, the story reach production may be a one-part configuration that is not divided into a first half and a second half.

  After message image 9054A is displayed, a moving image developed according to the story corresponding to “first half of story” is displayed. When the “first half of the story” is finished and the “second half of the story” is subsequently executed, a message image 9054B indicating the characters “second half of the story” is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. The Thereby, it is notified that the story reach production is continuously executed. Note that in the story reach effect, an image notifying that it is a story reach effect such as the message images 9054A and 9054B may not be displayed.

  After message image 9054B is displayed, a moving image developed in accordance with the story corresponding to “second half of story” is displayed. In the story reach production, when the variable display result is the jackpot display result, the flame effect image 9073 is superimposed on the black image 9072 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 116 (E), the movable member 90321 moves to the upright position, and the story completion effect that appears in front of the display area of the effect display device 905 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the story reach effect, when the variable display result is an outlier display result, a story incomplete effect that can specify that the story is not completed is performed, and a black image 9072 as shown in FIGS. 116 (D) and 116 (E). The effect using the flame effect image 9073 and the movable member 90321 is not executed.

  Specifically, in the story completion effect, as shown in FIG. 116 (D), the entire display area of the effect display device 905 is changed to a black image 9072, and in the area at the lower center of the screen of the effect display device 905, A flame effect image 9073 as an effect display is displayed, and an effect of superimposing and displaying on the black image 9072 is performed. In the story completion effect, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), the movable body operation effect that appears in the central area of the display area of the effect display device 905 by moving the movable member 90321 to the standing position. Is done. The appearing movable member 90321 is caused to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (E), when the movable member 90321 appears due to the movable body operation effect and moves to the standing position, the flame of the flame effect image 9073 to be superimposed is increased around the movable member 90321 and the flame is increased. A moving image showing a display mode in which the display range of the effect image 9073 is expanded is displayed. The moving image is an effect executed using the flame effect image 9073 in order to enhance the effect based on the operation of the movable member 90321, and is called an operation effect effect as in the case of FIG. By such an operation effect effect, an effect related to the operation mode of the movable member 90321 and the display mode of the flame effect image 9073 is executed. By executing such an effect, it is possible to produce an effect in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display means are linked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (F), a message image 9055 in which a big hit display result (same symbol stop) is derived and displayed in the effect symbol that has been displayed in the small symbol format, and the message “Congratulations” is displayed. , It is displayed in the center of the screen as a reach result effect which is an effect indicating the result of the reach state. Thereby, it is notified that the story reach production is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), the effect symbol for which the big hit display result is displayed in the small symbol format is returned to the original size and the original position as shown in FIG. A stop symbol effect is displayed in which a message image 9074 with the characters “big hit” is displayed below the effect symbol.

  In the story reach effect, the effect image is displayed in the same manner as the battle reach effect. However, unlike the battle reach effect, the entire display area of the effect display device 905 is set as a black image, and the effect image is superimposed on the black image. Thus, the effect image can be displayed with further emphasis, and an image display having a higher effect than the battle reach effect can be executed. Thereby, the precious feeling (premiere feeling) of the story reach production in which the expectation degree to the big hit is set higher than the battle reach production can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the story reach production, when the fluctuation display result becomes the out-of-order display result, the above-mentioned story incomplete production is executed, and the out-of-order display result is derived and displayed in the production design displayed in the small design format. Will return to the original size and position and be displayed.

  The movable member 90321 may be configured such that a disk-shaped portion can be rotated by a driving means such as a motor that is driven and controlled by the effect control CPU 90120. In the case where the disk-shaped portion of the movable member 90321 is configured so as to be capable of rotation control, the movable member 90321 moves to the upright position as shown in FIG. 115 (E) or FIG. 116 (E). When it appears in front of the display area of the device 905, or when it appears, the disk-shaped portion may be controlled to rotate. In that case, in accordance with the rotation operation of the movable member 90321, the effect display device 905 displays images for operating the effect images such as the particle effect image 9071 in FIG. 115 (E) and the flame effect image 9073 in FIG. 116 (E). The effect control to be displayed may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the rendering effect obtained by using the movable member 90321 and the effect image.

  In addition, the movable member 90321 is not limited to a rotating operation, and a part or all of the constituent members perform a deformation operation such as opening / closing or contracting by a driving unit such as a solenoid that is driven and controlled by the CPU 90120 for effect control. In such a configuration, in a specific effect scene, the display is performed on the effect display device 905 in accordance with the deformation operation of the movable member located in front of the display area of the effect display device 905. Effect control for displaying an image for operating the effect image to be performed may be executed.

  Next, a control example of effect effects and movable body effects in specific super reach effects such as battle reach effects and story reach effects will be described using timing charts.

  FIG. 117 is a timing chart showing an example of control of effect effects and movable body effects in a specific super reach effect. FIG. 117 (A) shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable object effect in the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. FIG. 117 (B) shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable object effect in the story reach effect as shown in FIG.

  First, with reference to FIG. 117 (A), a control example of effect effects and movable body effects in battle reach effects executed by the effect control CPU 90120 will be described. When the battle reach effect is executed, the effect symbol is displayed in a normal variation display effect mode as shown in FIG. 115 (A) between the start of the change display of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state. Is displayed on the effect display device 905.

  In the effect display device 905, when the reach state occurs, as shown in FIGS. 115B and 115C, a message image 9053 is displayed and a moving image such as a battle effect corresponding to the battle reach effect is displayed. Is done. The timing at which the effect display device 905 changes from the image display of the battle effect to the image display of the victory effect as shown in FIGS. 115D and 115E is a milestone of the first change of the video related to the battle reach effect ( This is the time when the video cut breaks. At the timing (first video change node) of the first video change regarding such a battle reach effect, the particle effect image is displayed on the battle effect image as shown in FIGS. 115 (D) and 115 (E). This is executed in a manner in which a particle effect effect in which an image displaying 9071 is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device 905 and a movable body operation effect that operates the movable member 90321 are linked.

  115 (E) and 115 (F) in the effect display device 905, the timing at which the movable member 90321 moves to the standing position and changes from the image display of the victory effect to the image display of the reach result effect is battle reach. This is a time when the second change of the video related to the production (video cut break). At the timing (second video change node) of the second video change regarding such a battle reach effect, the particle effect image 9071 is superimposed on the victory effect image as shown in FIG. 115 (E). An effect display effect such as an image to be displayed is executed in the effect display device 905.

  When the operation effect effect and the movable body operation effect are completed, the reach result is notified by executing the image display of the reach result effect as shown in FIG. 115 (F) on the effect display device 905. Thereafter, when the reach result effect ends, the effect display device 905 executes a stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 115 (G), thereby performing a display for confirming the stop symbol of the effect symbol and performing a variable display. finish.

  As described above, in the battle reach effect, the effect effect display is performed such that the particle effect image 9071 is superimposed on the black image 9072 at the timing of the change in the video related to the reach effect. Further, in the battle reach effect, an effect in which the movable body effect such as the movable member 90321 and the effect effect display are linked is executed at the timing of the change of the video related to the reach effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 117 (B), a control example of the effect effect and the movable object effect in the story reach effect executed by the effect control CPU 90120 will be described. When the story reach effect is executed, the effect symbol is displayed in the normal variation display effect mode as shown in FIG. 116 (A) between the start of the change display of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state. Is displayed on the effect display device 905.

  In the effect display device 905, when the reach state occurs, message images 9054A and 54B are displayed as shown in FIGS. 116 (B) and 116 (C), and a moving image such as a story moving image corresponding to the story reach effect is displayed. An image is displayed. The timing at which the effect display device 905 changes from the image display of the story effect to the image display of the story completion effect as shown in FIGS. 116 (D) and 116 (E) is the milestone of the first change in the video related to the story reach effect. This is the time when the video cut breaks. At the timing (first video change node) of the first video change relating to such story reach production, a flame effect image is displayed on the black image 9072 as shown in FIGS. 116 (D) and (E). This is executed in such a manner that a flame effect effect in which an image displaying 9073 is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device 905 and a movable body operation effect that operates the movable member 90321 are linked.

  116 (E) and (F) in the effect display device 905, the timing at which the movable member 90321 moves to the standing position and changes from the image display of the story completion effect to the image display of the reach result effect is the story. This is the time when the second change in the video related to the reach production will be a turning point (video cut break). At the timing (second video change node) of the second video change relating to such story reach production, a flame effect image 9073 is superimposed on the black image 9072 as shown in FIG. 116 (E). Operation effect effects such as images to be performed are executed in the effect display device 905.

  When the motion effect effect and the movable body motion effect are completed, the reach result is notified by executing the image display of the reach result effect as shown in FIG. 116 (F) in the effect display device 905. Thereafter, when the reach result effect ends, the effect display device 905 executes the stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 116 (G), thereby performing display for confirming the stop symbol of the effect symbol and the variable display. finish.

  As described above, in the story reach effect, the effect effect display is performed such that the flame effect image 9073 is superimposed on the black image 9072 at the timing of the change of the video related to the reach effect. Further, in the story reach effect, an effect in which the movable body effect such as the movable member 90321 and the effect display are linked is executed at the timing of the change of the video related to the reach effect.

  115 and 117A, and the story reach effect shown in FIGS. 116 and 117B, specifically, the following processing is executed in the effect control CPU 90120. Is realized.

  When the effect control board 9012 receives a change pattern command in which a change pattern of a super reach type for executing a battle reach effect is specified as a change pattern command (a change pattern specifying command). The effect control CPU 90120 performs the image display control of the effect display device 905 for performing the battle reach effect and the operation control of the movable member 90321 as shown in FIGS. 115 and 117A in the effect symbol variation start process (S9074). Effect control data (process data, etc.) for performing the above is selected from a plurality of types of effect control data stored in advance and set (stored) in the RAM 90122. The battle reach effect is partially different between when the fluctuation display result becomes a jackpot display result and when it becomes an outlier display result, so when a fluctuation pattern command or display result designation command that can identify the fluctuation display result is received In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 analyzes the received command content to recognize the change display result, and selects the effect control data corresponding to the change display result. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the display of the effect symbol variation, and uses the effect control data set for executing the battle reach effect in the effect symbol variation processing (S9075), and the movable object effect process and the effect. By executing the effect display processing and the like, the image display control of the effect display device 905 and the operation control of the movable member 90321 are performed, and the battle reach effect as shown in FIGS. 115 and 117A is executed.

  When the variation control command 9012 receives a variation pattern command in which a variation pattern of a super reach type for executing a story reach effect is designated as a variation pattern command (variation pattern designation command). The effect control CPU 90120 performs the image display control of the effect display device 905 that performs the story reach effect and the operation control of the movable member 90321 as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117B in the effect symbol variation start process (S9074). Effect control data (process data, etc.) for performing the above is selected from a plurality of types of effect control data stored in advance and set (stored) in the RAM 90122. Story reach production is partially different depending on whether the fluctuation display result is a jackpot display result or an outlier display result, so when a fluctuation pattern command or display result designation command that can identify the fluctuation display result is received In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 analyzes the received command content to recognize the change display result, and selects the effect control data corresponding to the change display result. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the effect symbol change display, and in the effect symbol changing process (S9075), the effect control data set for executing the story reach effect is used, and the movable object effect process and the effect are performed. By executing the effect display process and the like, the image display control of the effect display device 905 and the operation control of the movable member 90321 are performed, and the story reach effect as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117 (B) is executed.

  When the movable body effect can be executed in a plurality of types of effect display, such as the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. 115 and 117A and the story reach effect shown in FIGS. 116 and 117B. Depending on which type of effect display is performed, an effect effect display in which the effect image is superimposed on the black image, and an effect effect display in which the effect image is superimposed on the effect image Since the effect effect display in a different mode can be displayed, it is possible to enhance the effect that links the operation of the movable body and the effect display of the display means.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 115E and 117A, a specific type of effect display such as a battle reach effect in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 90321 is executed is executed. 115D and 115E, it is possible to execute an effect in which an effect effect display of a specific mode such as the particle effect image 9071 in FIGS. 115D and 115E is superimposed on a specific type of effect display such as a display of a victory effect image. Therefore, it becomes possible to link the effect display of the specific type in which the movable body effect is executed with the effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 905, and the operation of the movable body by the effect display of the specific type And the effect of displaying the effect of the display means can be further enhanced.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 116 (E) and 117 (B), a specific type of effect display such as a story reach effect is executed in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 90321 is executed. 116D and 116E, a specific effect effect display such as the flame effect image 9073 shown in FIGS. 116D and 116E is applied to the predetermined image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 905 such as the black image 9072. Since the effect to be displayed in a superimposed manner can be executed, it is possible to link the predetermined effect of the predetermined type in which the movable body effect is executed with the effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 905. Thus, it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game by emphasizing the movable body effect.

  It should be noted that effects such as the aforementioned battle reach effect and story reach effect that link the movable body and effect effect display may be performed in reach effects other than super reach, or in effects other than reach effects. May be.

  In addition, the example in which the effect of linking (linking) the movable body and the effect display as in the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above is executed at the timing that becomes the turning point of the change of the video related to the effect. Not limited to this, it may be executed at a timing other than the timing that becomes a turning point of the change of the video related to the effect, such as the timing after the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the execution of the effect.

  In addition, as the effect effect display in the effect of linking (linking) the movable body and the effect effect display like the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above, the particle effect image and the flame effect image have been described as an example. Not limited to this, as the effect display, other types of effect display such as an effect image in the form of light emission may be used.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 115 and 116, different types of effect display can be displayed depending on which effect display is performed among the two types of effect display of battle reach effect and story reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display different types of effect display according to which of the three or more types of effect display is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 115 and FIG. 116, different effect display effects are displayed depending on which effect display is performed among a plurality of effect displays such as battle reach effects and story reach effects. An example in which the effect effect display mode is changed depending on whether the black image 9072 is displayed or not is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example of changing the effect effect display mode, any type of effect display displays a black image, but the effect effect display type such as an effect image may be different. In this case, the effect effect display types may be different as long as any of the effect effect display components such as the shape, color, display range, and luminance of the effect effect display image is different.

  In addition, as the effect of linking (linking) the movable body and the effect effect display like the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above, the effect effect display images as shown in FIGS. 115 and 116 are displayed first. Not only the effect of moving the movable body later, but also the effect of executing the image display of the effect effect display and the operation of the movable body at the same timing, and the image of the effect effect display after operating the movable body first An effect of displaying may be used.

  Moreover, as an effect using the black image 9072 as in the story reach effect described above, an example in which the black image 9072 is displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 905 has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, control may be performed to display the black image 9072 in a part of the display area in the effect display device 905 such as an area for displaying the effect image.

  In addition, as an effect of linking a movable body such as the movable member described above and an effect display such as an effect image, the movable body is operated in each of a plurality of types of effect display with different effects display conditions. When performing an effect, an effect may be executed in which an effect image display as a different type of effect display is displayed in association with the operation of the movable body, depending on the state of the effect display for operating the movable body. Good. For example, different types of effect image display may be executed in the following effects display situation. (A) When displaying the effect image display in response to operating the movable body before entering the reach state during the variation display of the effect symbol. (B) When displaying an effect image corresponding to operating the movable body at the time of temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous. (C) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to operating a movable body during execution of normal reach. (D) When displaying the effect image display in response to operating the movable body during the execution of the super reach effect. (E) When an effect image display is displayed in response to operating the movable body at the time of the development of the production during the execution of the super-reach of the development production format in which the production content develops. (F) Corresponding to operating a movable body when a lottery effect (for example, an effect of drawing a lottery whether to be a promising big hit or a non-probable big hit) after notifying that a big hit display result has been obtained To display the effect image display. (G) When displaying an effect image display in response to operating the movable body during the production of the big hit gaming state. (H) When an effect image display is displayed in response to operating a movable body during a customer waiting demonstration display that is executed when no game is being played. It should be noted that at least two of the effect image displays executed in a plurality of types of effect display situations as described above may be different.

[Other production examples using movable members]
Next, another effect example using a movable body such as the movable member 90321 will be described. The effects described below are executed by the CPU 90120 for effect control. FIG. 118 is a timing chart showing an example of control of an effect effect and a movable body combined operation effect in a specific super reach effect.

  As a movable body such as the movable member 90321 described above, a movable movable member that includes a plurality of movable members, is in a separated state in a normal state, and can be controlled to operate in a combined state in a specific state is used. Also good. The unitable movable member may be one in which a plurality of movable members are interlocked by driving means (motor, solenoid, etc.) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of movable members. It may be interlocked by driving means (motor, solenoid, etc.).

  118, the description overlapping that of the control example of FIG. 117 is omitted, and different parts from the control example of FIG. 117 are mainly described. FIG. 118 (A) shows a control example of an effect effect and a movable united effect in a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 115. FIG. 117 (B) shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable body effect in the story reach effect as shown in FIG.

  118 is different from the control example of FIG. 117 in that a movable body combined motion effect is executed instead of the movable body motion effect of FIG. 117.

  In the battle reach effect shown in FIG. 118 (A), instead of the movable member operation effect by the movable member 90321 shown in FIG. 115 (E) in the battle effect as shown in FIG. The movable body uniting effect that operates in the same manner is executed.

  In the story reach production shown in FIG. 118 (B), instead of the movable body operation effect by the movable member 90321 shown in FIG. 116 (E) in the story reach production as shown in FIG. A movable united effect that operates in a state is executed.

  Also, in the story reach effect shown in FIG. 118 (B), immediately before the end of the second half of the story reach effect that is executed after the “story second half” message image 9054B in FIG. In a specific display area of the display device 909, an operation promotion effect for performing an operation promotion display for promoting the operation of the push button 9031B such as “Press the button” is executed. When the push button 9031B is operated by the player within a predetermined period from the start of the operation promotion effect, or when the predetermined period elapses without the operation being performed within the predetermined period, the above-described movable body combination Production is performed.

  It should be noted that the control for executing the movable united effect according to such an operation promotion effect may be executed immediately before the end of the battle reach image display in the battle reach effect of FIG. 118 (A). As described above, the control for executing the movable united effect according to the operation promotion effect may be executed at the first video change turning point in the specific super reach effect. Further, the control for executing the movable united effect according to the operation promotion effect may be executed at other video change nodes such as the second video change node in the specific super reach effect. In addition to the push button 9031B, for example, other operation means such as a stick controller 9031A may be used as the operation means for executing the movable united effect according to the operation of the operation means. Further, not only the operation means but also a movable body combined effect may be executed in response to detection of a specific action of the player by a detection means such as a motion sensor that detects the action of the player. In other words, any production control may be executed as long as the production control performs the movable united production according to the player's action.

  Moreover, the control which performs a movable body unification effect according to such an operation promotion effect does not need to be performed. It is selected whether or not the control for executing the movable united effect according to the operation promotion effect is executed at a predetermined rate by the predetermined lottery process executed by the effect control CPU 90120. Sometimes it may be executed.

  In the case of executing the movable united effect using the movable member as described above, it is possible to obtain the same effect as in the case of executing the movable united effect using the movable member 90321 described above. Furthermore, the fun of the production can be improved by the combined operation.

[Movement of moving body during round]
As described above, when the probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a final special symbol in the special figure game, as a result of changing the production symbol, the finalized effect symbol that becomes the normal big hit combination (non-probable variable big hit combination) is stopped and displayed. You may make it happen. Specifically, when a normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in a special game, the finalized winning symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed at a rate of 100% as a variation display result of the effect symbol. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the probability variation jackpot combination at the first ratio (for example, 60%) is stopped and displayed as the variation display result of the effect symbol. Then, it is configured such that a definite effect symbol that is normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed at a second ratio (for example, 40%).

  In such a configuration, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the probability change control after the big hit gaming state ends when the fixed effect symbol that is a normal big hit combination (non-probable variable big hit combination) is stopped and displayed as the fluctuation display result of the effect symbols. An effect that suggests whether or not to be performed is executed in a jackpot display process (S9077), a big hit game process (S9078), a jackpot end effect process (S9079), or the like. In this embodiment, in the big hit game processing (S9078), when a predetermined round (for example, the fifth round) is being executed, a round suggesting whether or not the probability change control is performed after the big hit gaming state ends. It is assumed that the medium suggestion effect is executed. This predetermined round is a normal open round in which the upper limit time in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is in the first state (open state) advantageous to the player among the rounds in the big hit game state is relatively long. .

  In the suggestion effect during the round, as shown in FIGS. 120B and 120D, the effect effect in which the flame effect image 901010 or the lightning effect image 901020 is superimposed on the black image 901001 and the movable member 90321 are operated. As shown in FIGS. 120F to 120H, the character 901060 performs an action of breaking the rock 901062 with the hammer 901061, and as a result, the rock 901062 is broken. Depending on whether or not, the effect configuration is such that a challenge effect for notifying whether or not probability variation control is performed after the end of the big hit gaming state is executed.

  In the suggestion effect during the round, as shown in FIG. 119, the effect effect and the movable body operation effect are executed in cooperation with one of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2. As an effect effect, as shown in FIG. 120B, a flame effect image 901010 superimposed on a black image 901001 is referred to as a flame effect effect, and as shown in FIG. What displays the lightning effect image 901020 in a superimposed manner is referred to as a lightning effect effect.

  When the big hit type is a probable big hit, that is, when the probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it becomes a successful mode in which the probable change control is notified in the challenge effect (FIG. 120 (g)). Then, it is notified that the probability variation control is performed after the big hit gaming state is finished. When the big hit type is non-probable change big hit, that is, when the normal big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it becomes a failure mode in which the probability change control is not notified in the challenge effect (FIG. 120 (h)). ), It is notified that the probability variation control is not performed (becomes a low probability state) after the big hit gaming state is finished.

  The effect pattern A1 executes the first movable body motion effect and also executes the flame effect effect as the first effect effect, without performing the second movable object motion effect and the second effect effect, and the challenge effect. It is an effect pattern to shift to. The effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect pattern A1 at a rate of 2% when the big hit type is a probable variation big hit, and selects the effect pattern A1 at a rate of 50% when the big hit type is an uncertain variable big hit. .

  The effect pattern A2 executes the first movable body operation effect, executes the flame effect effect as the first effect effect, executes the second movable object operation effect, and performs the flame effect effect as the second effect effect. It is an effect pattern that shifts to a challenge effect after execution. The effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect pattern A2 at a rate of 8% when the big hit type is a probable variation big hit, and selects the effect pattern A2 at a rate of 25% when the big hit type is a non-probable big hit. .

  In the production pattern A3, the first movable body operation production is performed, the flame effect production is performed as the first effect production, the second movable body operation production is performed, and the lightning effect production is performed as the second effect production. It is an effect pattern that shifts to a challenge effect after execution. The effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect pattern A3 at a rate of 25% when the jackpot type is a probable big hit, and selects the effect pattern A3 at a rate of 1% when the jackpot type is an uncertain change big hit. .

  The effect pattern B1 executes the first movable body operation effect and also executes the lightning effect effect as the first effect effect, without executing the second movable object operation effect and the second effect effect, and the challenge effect. It is an effect pattern to shift to. The effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect pattern B1 at a rate of 25% when the big hit type is a probable big hit, and selects the effect pattern B1 at a rate of 16% when the big hit type is an uncertain variable big hit. .

  The production pattern B2 executes the first movable body motion effect, executes the lightning effect production as the first effect production, executes the second movable body motion production, and performs the lightning effect production as the second effect production. It is an effect pattern that shifts to a challenge effect after execution. The effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect pattern B2 at a rate of 40% when the jackpot type is a probable big hit, and selects the effect pattern B2 at a rate of 8% when the jackpot type is an uncertain change big hit. .

  When the movable body operation effect and the effect effect are executed in each of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, in the order of high expectation that the big hit type is a probable big hit, A3, B2, B1, A2 and A1. The degree of expectation here is calculated by, for example, [Proportion for probability variation big hit / (Ratio for probability variation big hit + Ratio for non-probability big hit)] when the production is executed with the production pattern. The effect pattern (A2, A3, B2) in which the movable body action effect and the effect effect are executed twice is expected rather than the effect pattern (A1, B1) in which the moveable object effect effect and the effect effect are executed only once. High degree.

  And when an effect is performed with an effect pattern (A3, B1, or B2) including a lightning effect effect, it is expected more than when an effect is executed with an effect pattern (A1 or A2) that does not include a lightning effect effect. High degree. When the first effect production is a lightning effect production (B1 or B2), the degree of expectation is higher than when the first effect production is a flame effect production (A1, A2, or A3). However, if the first effect production is a flame effect production and the second effect production is a lightning effect production, that is, if it is a production effect, both the first and second effect productions are lightning effects. Expectation is higher than in the case of production.

  Note that there is no so-called down effect pattern in which the first effect effect is a lightning effect effect and the second effect effect is a flame effect effect. By limiting the effects of such decline (prohibiting such effects or making the execution ratio lower than A3), the effect of the effect effects is not reduced.

  Next, an example in which a movable body operation effect and an effect effect are executed with an effect pattern of A1 or A3 will be described using FIG. When the reach result effect described above is completed, a stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 120A is executed in the effect display device 905, whereby a display for confirming the stop symbol of the effect symbol is performed and a variable display is performed. finish. In this example, when a normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol in a special game, a fixed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the production symbol, or in a special game It is assumed that when the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the variation display result of the effect symbol.

  In the example of FIG. 120 (a), an effect symbol whose symbol number is “4” which is not a probability variation symbol is predetermined in each of the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905R, and 905C of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Are stopped on the active line. In addition, a stop symbol effect is performed in which a message image 9074 showing the characters “big hit” is displayed below the effect symbol. The effect control CPU 90120 executes effects according to the execution of each round in accordance with the control to the big hit gaming state. For example, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 905 is performed, and an image 901000 in which characters “Roundxx” (xx indicates the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state) is displayed on the upper right portion of the screen. To do. Then, a suggestion effect during the round is executed as an effect corresponding to the execution of the fifth round.

  In the first movable body operation effect shown in FIG. 120 (b), the effect control CPU 90120 moves the movable member 90321 from the tilted position to the standing position (first standing). Then, at the timing when the movable member 90321 reaches the standing position (timing when the movable member 90321 reaches the standing position), the background image of the image 901000 is changed from the normal background image to the black image 901001, and at the same time, the flame effect image is displayed on the black image 901001. A flame effect effect in which 901010 is displayed in a superimposed manner is executed.

  When the flame effect effect is continued for a predetermined period while the movable member 90321 is in the standing position, the effect control CPU 90120 changes the background image of the image 901000 from the black image 901001 to the normal background image, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the flame effect effect is terminated by deleting the flame effect image 901010. Then, the movable member 90321 is moved from the standing position to the tilted position at the timing when the flame effect effect ends (first tilting).

  When A1 is selected as the effect pattern, after the movable member 90321 moves to the tilt position (after the first tilt), the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the challenge effect. On the other hand, when A3 is selected as the production pattern, after the movable member 90321 moves to the tilt position (after the first tilt), the second movable body operation effect shown in FIG. The control CPU 90120 moves the movable member 90321 again from the tilted position to the standing position (second standing up). Then, at the timing when the movable member 90321 reaches the standing position (the timing when the movable member 90321 is in the standing state), the background image of the image 901000 is changed from the normal background image to the black image 901001, and at the same time, the lightning effect image is displayed on the black image 901001. A lightning effect effect that superimposes 901020 is executed.

  When the lightning effect effect is continued for a predetermined period while the movable member 90321 is in the standing position, the effect control CPU 90120 changes the background image of the image 901000 from the black image 901001 to the normal background image, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the lightning effect effect is terminated by deleting the lightning effect image 901020. Then, at the timing when the lightning effect effect ends, the movable member 90321 is moved again from the standing position to the tilt position (second tilt). Then, after the movable member 90321 moves to the tilt position, the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the challenge effect.

  If A2 is selected as the effect pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the flame effect image 901010 superimposed on the black image 901001 in the second movable body operation effect shown in FIG. 120 (d). The flame effect production is executed again, and the second flame effect production is ended in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (f), in the challenge effect, the effect control CPU 90120 first displays a common effect image regardless of whether the big hit type is a probable big hit or a non-probable big hit.

  This effect image includes an image 901050 in which characters “challenge time” are shown, a message image 1051 in which characters “progressed when a rock breaks” displayed below, and a character 901060. , A hammer 901061 and a rock 901062. As a result, the player is reminded that “the character 901060 is an effect of trying to break the rock 901062 with the hammer 901061”, and “when the rock is broken, the jackpot type is a promising big hit regardless of the stop symbol effect. To the player.

  When the big hit type is a probable big hit, the effect control CPU 90120 displays an image of a successful mode in which the character 901060 succeeds in breaking the rock 901062 with the hammer 901061, as shown in FIG. 120 (g). , A message image 901070 on which the characters “probability promotion!” Are displayed. As a result, the player grasps that although the confirmed effect symbol that is normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed in the stop symbol effect, the probability variable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. .

  When the big hit type is a non-probable big hit, as shown in FIG. 120 (h), the effect control CPU 90120 fails when the character 901060 fails to break the rock 901062 with the hammer 901061 and the hammer 901061 is broken. In addition to displaying the image of the aspect, a message image 901080 with the letters “failure!” Is displayed. As a result, the player grasps that the normal jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game, as the fixed bonus symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed in the stop symbol effect.

  121A to 121C are timing charts showing the execution timing and execution period of the movable body operation effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect when each of the effect patterns A1 to A3 is selected.

  In any case of the effect patterns A1 to A3, when the stop symbol effect is executed in which the effect symbols of the symbol numbers that are not the probability variation symbols are aligned and stopped on the predetermined active line at the timing (1), After the big hit display process (S9077) is executed at timing (2), the process proceeds to the big hit game processing (S9078). In the big hit game processing (S9078), an effect corresponding to each round is executed, and the above-described in-round suggestion effect is executed as an effect corresponding to the fifth round. When the fifth round is started, a flame effect effect is executed when the first standing operation of the movable member 90321 is performed at timing (3), and the first tilting operation of the movable member 90321 is performed at timing (4). The flame effect production ends when is performed.

  Thus, in the execution period of the first movable body operation effect, the effect effect of the common mode is executed in any of the effect patterns A1 to A3. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which effect pattern is in the execution period of the first movable body motion effect.

  In the case of the production pattern A1, the second moving body operation production is not performed thereafter, and the challenge production is performed at the timing (7). In the case of the effect pattern A2, the second flame effect effect is executed when the second standing operation of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (5), and the second tilt of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (6). When the operation is performed, the second flame effect production ends. And it shifts to challenge production at timing (7). In the case of the production pattern A3, the lightning effect production is executed when the second standing operation of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (5), and the second tilting operation of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (6). The lightning effect production ends. And it shifts to challenge production at timing (7).

  In any of the production patterns A1 to A3, in the challenge production, the result is notified at the timing of (8), and it is notified that it becomes a successful mode and becomes a high-accuracy state after the big hit gaming state, Alternatively, a failure state is entered, and a notification is made that a low probability state is reached after the jackpot gaming state ends.

  Thus, when the production pattern A3 is selected, different types of effect production are produced when the first movable body operation effect is executed and when the second movable body operation effect is executed. Since it is configured to be executed, it is possible to diversify the production mode in which the movable body operation production and the effect production cooperate with each other, thereby improving the interest.

  Further, when the production pattern A3 is selected, the degree of expectation, that is, later, compared to the case where the production pattern A1 or A2 in which the flame effect production is executed in the first movable body operation production as in A3 is selected. A high proportion of success is achieved in the executed challenge performance. Therefore, the player decides whether or not the second movable body motion effect is executed, and when the second movable body motion effect is executed, the flame effect effect and the lightning effect effect are accompanied accordingly. Attention will be paid to which one is executed, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the production in which the movable body operation effect and the effect production are linked.

  In addition, the effect pattern in which the lightning effect effect is executed has a higher expectation than the effect pattern in which only the flame effect effect is executed. However, as in the effect pattern A3, the flame effect is generated in the first movable body operation effect. Even if the effect is executed, the flame effect effect is executed in the first movable body operation effect by providing an effect pattern in which the lightning effect effect is executed in the second movable object operation effect. Even so, it can be expected that the lightning effect production will be executed in the second movable body operation production without discouraging the player. Furthermore, even when compared with the effect pattern in which the lightning effect effect is executed in the first movable body operation effect, the effect pattern A3 has a higher expectation, so that the flame effect effect is produced in the first movable object operation effect. When executed, the player's interest can be sustained.

(Modification 1)
During the execution of the effect effect, an operation promotion effect for performing an operation promotion display for promoting the operation of the push button 9031B in a specific display area of the effect display device 909 may be executed. Then, when the push button 9031B is operated by the player within a predetermined period from the start of the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 90120 may change the effect effect mode.

  A specific example is shown in FIG. 122 (a) to 122 (c) are the same as those in FIGS. 120 (a) to 120 (c), and the description thereof is omitted. After the movable member 90321 moves to the tilt position (after the first tilt), the effect control CPU 90120 moves the movable member 90321 from the tilt position to the standing position in the second movable body operation effect shown in FIG. Move again (2nd standing up). Then, at the timing when the movable member 90321 reaches the standing position (the timing when the movable member 90321 is in the standing state), the background image of the image 901000 is changed to the black image 901001, and at the same time, the flame effect image 901020 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 901001. Run the flame effect effect again.

  When the flame effect presentation is continued for a predetermined period while the movable member 90321 is in the standing position, the presentation control CPU 90120 pushes the push button 9031B on the black image 901001 and the flame effect image 901010 as shown in FIG. 120 (j). An operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image composed of an image 901090 that imitates the message and a message image 1091 showing the characters “Press!” Is superimposed and displayed.

  This operation promotion image is erased (the operation promotion effect ends) when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses without the push button 9031B being operated from the start of display. If the bush button 9031B is operated within the period in which the operation promotion image is displayed, the operation promotion image is erased (the operation promotion effect ends). Then, when the bush button 9031B is operated, the effect control CPU 90120 selects an effect pattern that can change the effect effect mode according to the player's operation as the effect pattern. The effect image superimposed on the black image 901001 is changed from the flame effect image 901010 to the lightning effect image 901020. On the other hand, when an effect pattern that does not change the effect effect mode according to the player's operation is selected as the effect pattern, an effect image superimposed on the black image 901001 is displayed as shown in FIG. The flame effect image 901010 is not changed.

  FIG. 123A shows the execution timing and execution period of the movable body operation effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect when the effect pattern that can change the effect effect mode according to the player's operation is selected. It is a timing chart.

  The explanation about the timings (1) to (4) is the same as that in FIG. 121, and the explanation is omitted. When the second standing operation of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (5), the second flame effect effect is executed. Then, the operation promotion image is displayed at the timing (X) within the second flame effect production period. When the operation promotion image is displayed, the effect image superimposed on the black image 901001 is changed from the flame effect image 901010 to the lightning effect image 901020 in response to the operation of the push button 32B at the timing (Y). Let The lightning effect effect ends when the second tilting operation of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (6). And it shifts to challenge production at timing (7).

  Thus, by making it possible to change the aspect of the effect effect according to the player's operation, the interest of the effect effect can be further improved. Further, by changing from a flame effect image 901010 having a low expectation level to a lightning effect image 901020 having a high expectation level in accordance with the player's operation, it is possible to make the performance surprising.

  For example, in the above-described effect pattern A2, the operation promotion image is superimposed and displayed on the black image 901001 and the flame effect image 901010 within the period in which the second flame effect effect is being executed. When the push button 9031B is operated, the operation promotion image is deleted (the operation promotion effect ends), but the effect image superimposed on the black image 901001 remains the flame effect image 901010. Production control shall be performed. Thereby, you may comprise "the production pattern which does not change the aspect of an effect production according to a player's operation."

  In addition, in the above-described effect pattern A3, when the second movable body operation effect is executed, the flame effect image 901010 instead of the lightning effect image 901020 is initially superimposed on the black image 901001 as an effect effect. The operation promoting image is superimposed on the black image 901001 and the flame effect image 901010 during the period in which the flame effect image 901010 is displayed. When the push button 9031B is operated, the operation promotion image is deleted (the operation promotion effect ends), and the effect image superimposed on the black image 901001 is changed from the flame effect image 901010 to the lightning effect image 901020. It is assumed that the production control is performed. Thereby, you may comprise "the effect pattern which changes the aspect of an effect effect according to a player's operation".

  In the example shown in FIG. 123 (A), the display of the already started black image 901001 is continued without changing when the flame effect effect changes to the lightning effect effect according to the operation of the push button 9031B. Thus, only the effect image superimposed on the black image 901001 is changed from the flame effect image 901010 to the lightning effect image 901020. That is, if the effect effect is composed of the black image 901001 as the first effect and the effect image as the second effect, only the aspect of the second effect is changed without changing the aspect of the first effect. This makes it possible to give an impression as if the aspect has changed in accordance with the player's operation during the execution of a series of effects.

(Modification 2)
In the above-described example, the movable body operation effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect are effects that are executed during the execution of the round, which suggests whether or not the probability change control is performed after the jackpot gaming state ends. Not only in such a form, but also in response to each of the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 904A and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 904B in the special symbol game. As a reach effect to be executed when the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a movable body action effect, an effect effect, and a challenge effect are executed, and whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit game state by these effect patterns and effect modes. You may make it suggest.

  The above-described effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 are applied as effect patterns of the movable body operation effect and effect effect executed in the reach state. That is, when the movable body operation effect and the effect effect are executed as reach effects in the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, A3, B2, B1, A2, and A1.

  FIG. 123 (B) shows a control example of effect production, movable body production, and challenge production as reach production. From the start (11) of the variation display of the effect symbol (special symbol) to the occurrence of the reach state (12), the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect mode of the normal variation display as shown in FIG. 115 (A). Is executed in the effect display device 905.

  When the reach state occurs at the timing (12) in the effect display device 905, the display shifts to the reach effect. In the reach effect, the flame effect effect is executed when the first standing operation of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (13), and the flame is performed when the first tilting operation of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (14). The effect production ends (examples of production patterns A1 to A3).

  In the case of the production pattern A1, after that, the second movable body operation production is not performed, and the process proceeds to the challenge production at the timing (17). In the case of the effect pattern A2, the second flame effect effect is executed when the second standing operation of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (15), and the second tilt of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (16). When the operation is performed, the second flame effect production ends. And it shifts to a challenge production at timing (17). In the case of the effect pattern A3 illustrated in FIG. 123B, the lightning effect effect is executed when the second standing operation of the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (15), and the movable member 90321 is performed at the timing (16). When the second tilting operation is performed, the lightning effect effect ends. And it shifts to a challenge production at timing (17).

  Then, if it is determined that the confirmed effect symbol that is a jackpot combination is to be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the effect symbol, it becomes a success mode at the timing (18) in the challenge effect, and as a result of the variation display It is notified that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. If it is determined that the fixed effect symbol that is a reach-losing combination is to be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the effect symbol, the challenge effect may be failed at timing (18) and not controlled to the big hit gaming state. Informed. Thus, the reach result is displayed on the effect display device 905 at the timing (18), so that the reach result is notified. After that, when the reach result effect is completed, a stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 115 (G) is executed in the effect display device 905 at the timing (19), and a display for determining the stop symbol of the effect symbol is performed. At the same time, the variable display ends.

(Other variations)
In the above embodiment, the movable body operation effect according to the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 is an effect of moving the movable member 90321 from the tilt position (first position) to the standing position (second position). Although explained, not only in such a form, but the gaming machine has a plurality of movable members, and each movable member is moved by moving each movable member from the corresponding first position to the second position. You may make it the movable body union operation | movement effect in which a specific form (combining form) is comprised by each movable member gathering in the state which exists in each 2nd position is performed. As the movable body operation effect ends, each movable member moves from the corresponding second position to the first position, thereby releasing the specific form (union form). The movable united operation effect will also be described in detail in FIG. 118 described later.

  Further, the movable body operation effect may be an effect in which the form of the movable member changes, or may be an effect in which a predetermined operation, for example, an operation in a rotating manner, is performed without changing the position of the movable member. For example, a movable body operation effect is an effect that the movable member changes to an expansion / contraction mode, an effect that changes to an open / close mode, an effect that changes to an expansion / contraction mode, or the movable member has another role (for example, It may be an effect that combines with an accessory that is fixed to the game board surface and does not operate.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the effect linked with the movable body operation effect is an effect effect in which the effect image is superimposed and displayed on the black image 901001 in the effect display device 905 has been described. The effect linked with the movable body operation effect may be an effect of causing the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, the panel side LEDs 909d and 909e, or the light emitting portion 90321A of the movable member 90321 to emit light in a specific manner. For example, in the production patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, in place of the “flame effect production”, the “top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, panel side LEDs 909d and 909e or the light emitting unit 90321A are changed to the first emission color (for example, "Blue)" is executed, and instead of "lightning effect effect", "top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, panel side LEDs 909d, 909e or light emitting unit 90321A is set to the second emission color (for example, red). It is better to execute the “effect to emit light with”.

  The effect linked to the movable body operation effect may be an effect of outputting a specific sound (specific sound effect or specific music) from the speakers 908L and 908R. For example, in the production patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, in place of the “flame effect production”, an “production that outputs a first specific sound (for example, a low-frequency sound effect)” from the speakers 908L and 908R is executed. Instead of the “lightning effect effect”, “the effect of outputting the second specific sound (for example, a high-frequency sound effect)” from the speakers 908L and 908R may be executed.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, after performing a movable body operation | movement effect and the effect production performed in cooperation with this, a predetermined state (probability change state or jackpot game state) is performed by performing the challenge effect in the effect display apparatus 905. However, the notification effect is not limited to such a form, and the notification effect for notifying whether or not the predetermined state is reached is operated in the previously performed movable body motion effect. It may be an effect of notifying whether or not a predetermined state is obtained depending on whether or not the movable member 90321 or a movable member different from the movable member 90321 is operated.

  For example, when notifying that a predetermined state (probability change state or big hit game state) is to be made after the effects of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 are finished, the movable member 90321 is moved from the tilted position to the standing position. At the same time, a special image different from the flame effect image 901010 and the lightning effect image 901020 may be superimposed on the black image 901001.

  In the above-described embodiment, when a plurality of movable body operation effects are executed as in the production patterns A2, A3, and B2, the first production is performed with the end of the first movable body operation effect. Although an example has been described in which both the black image 901001 and the effect image that is the second effect are erased and once returned to the normal background image, the present invention is not limited to such a form. For example, when the first movable body motion effect is finished, the first effect image is deleted, while the black image 901001 does not continue to return to the normal background image, but the second movable body motion effect. Is executed, the second effect image may be superimposed on the continuous black image 901001. By adopting such a form, the player expects the second movable body motion effect to be executed because the black image 901001 continues even after the first movable body motion effect is completed. can do.

  Further, in the case of such a form, in the effect pattern (A1 and B1) in which the movable body motion effect is executed only once, the first movable body motion effect is finished and superimposed on the black image 901001. Even after the effect image that has been erased is deleted, the black image 901001 may be continued for a predetermined period (for example, until the transition to the challenge effect). In this way, the player's interest can be maintained for a predetermined period even after the first movable body operation effect is completed.

  Further, before the first movable body operation effect is executed, when the black image 901001 as the first effect is displayed in advance and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the movable member 90321 is in an upright state). In addition, the first effect image may be superimposed and displayed on the black image 901001. As described above, the effect image may be displayed within the display period of the black image 901001 (the second effect is executed within the execution period of the first effect).

  In addition, when the first movable body operation effect ends, both the black image 901001 and the first effect image do not continue to return to the normal background image, and the second movable body operation effect is executed. In this case, the effect image superimposed on the continuous black image 901001 may be changed from the first effect image to the second effect image.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the period in which the movable member 90321 is in the standing state and the period in which the effect image is displayed is the same has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the movable member 90321 is tilted. The display of the effect image may be started within the moving period in which the moving member 90321 moves from the position to the standing position or before the moving period, or in the moving period in which the movable member 90321 moves from the standing position to the tilted position or the movement thereof. You may make it the display of an effect image end after the period. “Effect production is executed in accordance with the operation of the movable member 90321” means that “the movable member 90321 starts to move from the tilted position to the standing position, then rises, and further moves from the standing position to the tilted position. It is sufficient that at least a part of [period until ending] is overlapped with at least a part of [period during which the effect image is displayed].

  In the above embodiment, it is suggested whether or not the probability variation control is performed after the big hit gaming state by the effect of the mode in which the movable body action effect and the effect effect are linked, or the effect symbol variation display is ended. The display result is derived and displayed, and it is suggested whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and suggests whether or not a special reach effect is executed. It may be a thing that indicates whether or not it is controlled to a big hit gaming state for a variable display (a special figure game that is put on hold) in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied ( It may be a so-called pre-reading notice effect).

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) A movable body effect can be executed in a plurality of types of effect display, such as the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. 115 and 117A and the story reach effect shown in FIGS. 116 and 117B. Depending on which type of effect display is performed, an effect effect display in which an effect image is superimposed on a black image and an effect effect display in which an effect image is superimposed on the effect image are displayed. Thus, it is possible to display the effect effect display in a different mode, so that it is possible to enhance the effect effect of linking the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display means.

  (2) As shown in FIG. 115 (E) and FIG. 117 (A), a specific type of effect display such as a battle reach effect in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 90321 is executed. 115D, an effect of superimposing an effect effect display of a specific mode such as the particle effect image 9071 of FIGS. 115D and 115E on a specific type of effect display such as a display of a victory effect image is executed. Since it is possible, it becomes possible to link the effect display of the specific type in which the movable body effect is executed and the effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 905. It is possible to further enhance the production effect in which the operation and the production effect display of the display means are linked.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 116 (E) and FIG. 117 (B), a specific type of effect display such as a story reach effect in which a movable object effect that operates a movable object such as the movable member 90321 is executed. 116D and 116E, a specific image such as a flame effect image 9073 shown in FIGS. 116D and 116E is displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 905 such as the black image 9072. Since the effect of superimposing and displaying can be executed, it is possible to link the predetermined effect of the predetermined type in which the movable body effect is executed with the effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 905. In addition, the entertainment of the game can be improved by emphasizing the movable body effect.

  (4) When the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable body, such as the initial operation in the movable member initialization process of step S9051B of FIG. 103, and step S9051A of FIG. , A running-in operation for moving the movable body is performed as in the operation in the running-in running-in process of FIG. For this reason, since the movement of the movable body is not accustomed, it is possible to suppress the influence on the operation of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable body from operating favorably.

The gaming machine described above also has the following characteristic configuration.
(1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine),
A movable object (for example, movable member 90321) movable to a standby position (for example, the first position shown in FIGS. 95 and 96) and an advance position (for example, the second position shown in FIGS. 95 and 96);
When the gaming machine is activated, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable object (for example, also referred to as initial operation or initial operation in the movable member initialization process in step S9051B in FIG. 103), and the movable object Control means (for example, a production control CPU 90120) for executing a running-in operation (for example, step S9051A in FIG. 103, an operation in the movable member running-in process in FIG. 105, also referred to as a short initial operation).

  According to such a configuration, the confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable object and the running-in operation for moving the movable object are executed. For this reason, since movement of a movable object is not accustomed, it can suppress affecting the operation | movement of a movable object. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the movable object from operating well.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
When an abnormality is detected in the operation of the movable object in the break-in operation, error processing means (for example, step S90513, step S90517 in FIG. 105) that performs error processing (for example, notification of abnormality) is further provided.

  According to such a configuration, error processing is executed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the movable object during the break-in operation. As a result, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to a state in which the movable object does not operate normally.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
The control means executes the break-in operation before the confirmation operation (see, for example, FIG. 103).

  According to such a configuration, the break-in operation is executed before the confirmation operation. As a result, it can suppress that a movable object does not operate | move favorably in confirmation operation | movement.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
The control means prohibits the execution of the confirmation operation when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the movable object during the break-in operation (for example, until a notification stop operation is performed in step S90514 of FIG. 105, step S90518). The movable member initialization process in step S9051B in FIG. 103 is not executed).

  According to such a configuration, when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the movable object during the break-in operation, the execution of the confirmation operation is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being performed while the movable object does not operate normally.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
The movable object is moved to the advanced position by different power sources during the game and during the running-in operation.

  According to such a configuration, the movable object is moved to the advanced position by different power sources during the game and during the running-in operation. As a result, the break-in operation can be performed with a suitable power source.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5) above,
The movable object is an elastic body (for example, a tension spring 90323, which may be another elastic body such as a spiral spring, a leaf spring, or rubber) during the game, and the elastic body during the running-in operation. A strong motor (for example, second effect motor 90330) is moved to the advanced position as a power source.

  According to such a configuration, a motor having a stronger force than the elastic body is used as a power source for the movable object during the break-in operation. As a result, it is possible to move the movable object to the advanced position more reliably during the break-in operation.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
The movable object includes an electric cable (for example, cable 90361) that bends and stretches as the movable object moves.
The running-in operation is an operation of bending and stretching the electric cable by moving the movable object.

  According to such a configuration, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable object and a running-in operation for bending and stretching the electric cable by moving the movable object are performed. For this reason, since the movement of the electric cable is not used, it is possible to suppress the influence on the operation of the movable object. As a result, it can suppress that a movable object does not operate | move favorably.

(8) In the gaming machine of (7) above,
The electric cable is provided in the vicinity of an object that generates heat (for example, the LCD of the effect display device 905, the first effect motor 90303, and the second effect motor 90330).

  According to such a configuration, the electrical cable becomes flexible due to heat. As a result, the movable object can be moved more reliably.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the running-in operation is an operation for bending and stretching the electric cable by moving the movable object. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the movable object is configured to move along the rail, the movable object is configured to move with a ball screw or a linear guide, and the movable object is a plain bearing. Or a bearing such as a metal bearing or a resin bearing, the operation may be such that the lubricant such as oil or grease moves and becomes accustomed so as to become familiar. In addition, when the movable object has a sliding part such as a rotation or a linear motion, the moving part may be an operation of moving and fixing the sliding part to make it smooth.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the break-in operation is performed at startup. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the break-in operation may be performed periodically during a demonstration in which a game after starting is not performed. Even if it does in this way, it can control that a movable object does not operate | move favorably during a game.

  (11) The cable 90361 according to the embodiment described above supplies power to the LED. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and power or control signals are supplied to other electrical components (for example, actuators such as motors and solenoids that move movable objects and display devices such as LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) that displays images). It may be.

  (12) The cable 90361 may be a flexible flat cable, a flat cable in which a plurality of coated wires are arranged and fused, a single wire or a twisted wire, or a twisted cable. It may be a paired line.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the break-in operation and the confirmation operation are performed separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the break-in operation and the confirmation operation may be executed as a series of operations.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the initial position of the movable object is detected in the confirmation operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial position of the movable object may be detected in the break-in operation. In addition to the break-in operation and the confirmation operation, the initial position of the movable object may be detected.

  As mentioned above, although embodiment of this embodiment has been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiment, and even if there is a change or addition within the scope not departing from the gist of this embodiment. Included in this embodiment.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of gaming balls may be played. The number of game balls used for a game is added while the number of loaned balls encapsulated inside the machine and lent out in response to a player's loan request and the number of prize balls awarded in response to a prize is added. This embodiment can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines that are subtracted and stored. In these enclosed game machines, not the game ball but points and points are given to the player, so these points and points assigned correspond to the game value. It can also be applied to slot machines.

  In the embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 904A and the second special symbol display unit 904B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol resulting in the variable display result, and then display the final stop symbol. However, this embodiment is not limited to this, and after variably displaying multiple types of special symbols without including the final stop symbol that results in the variable display, the final stop symbol is displayed. A stop display may be used. That is, the final stop symbol that is the variation display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for variation display.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the microcomputer for effect control of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc. Although an example in which the variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the first command before reaching reach, such as the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence or absence of a slide effect, etc. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. In the game control microcomputer 90100, the change time is notified by each of the two commands, and the specific change mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. May be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, It is a concept that includes a relationship in which the ratio is different such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In the above embodiment, the production control board 9012, the sound control board 9013, the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F, and the like are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the presentation device is mounted. However, a circuit for controlling the effect device may be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 905 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (movable body, light emitter, speaker, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with a 2nd production control board.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits a command directly to the effect control microcomputer, but the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits an effect control command to another board. However, it may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer in the effect control board 9012 via another board. In that case, the command may simply be passed through another substrate, or control related to the movable body, the light emitter, the speaker, etc. is executed, and the received command is used as it is or, for example, as a simplified command. You may make it change and you may make it transmit to the microcomputer for effect control which controls the effect display apparatus 905. FIG. Even in such a case, the display control microcomputer performs display control according to the received command, similarly to performing display control according to the display control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 90100 in the above embodiment. It can be performed.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine that is controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit game is based on the fact that the big hit type is a probable big hit or a normal big hit and the big hit type is determined to be a promiscuous big hit. It is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a probable state after completion.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90100 side performs a display result (whether it is a big hit) or a winning determination (pre-reading determination) of the variation pattern type, and a command (design) indicating the winning determination result. (Designation command, variable category command) is transmitted, and on the production control microcomputer side, the case where the pre-reading notice production is executed based on the command indicating the determination result at the time of winning is shown. For example, the winning control determination (prefetch determination) may be performed on the production control microcomputer side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits a command specifying only the value of the random number extracted when the start winning is generated, and the effect control microcomputer side specifies the random number specified by those commands. The determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) may be performed based on the value of.

  It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of this embodiment is shown not by the above description but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

[2. Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment to which this embodiment is applied will be described.
In the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 executes a light emission effect that causes the LED 909 to emit light. Of course, embodiments to which this embodiment is applicable are not limited to the embodiments described below.

  In this embodiment, the effect control board 9012 of the pachinko gaming machine 901 controls the left frame LED 909b, the top frame LED 909a, and the right frame LED 909c via the serial-parallel conversion circuit described in the first embodiment, and these LEDs 909 are controlled. The light emission effect is executed by turning on / off the.

FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timing of signals from each drive output terminal in the serial-parallel conversion circuit in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, 12-channel drive output terminals are applied to the light emitter drivers 90413a, 90413a, and 90413c corresponding to the left frame LED 909b, the top frame LED 909a, and the right frame LED 909c, respectively. These serial-parallel conversion circuits are configured such that the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is dispersed to spread the spectrum, thereby preventing radiation noise and suppressing radio wave radiation. .

  In this embodiment, the internal oscillation clock circuit incorporated in the serial-parallel conversion circuit outputs a 6 MHz clock signal as in the above-described embodiment. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 124, the internal clock signal of 6 MHz is separated into three-phase clock signals of 1 MHz, and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are grouped into three groups of four channels per group, Disperse signal output timing.

  Specifically, group 1 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3, group 2 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7, and group 3 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q8 to Q11. Composed. The drive output terminals in the same group (for example, drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in group 1) have the same signal output timing, but drive output terminals in different groups (for example, the drive output of group 1). The output timing is distributed between the terminal Q0 and the group 2 drive output terminal Q4).

  In this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to each of the light emitter drivers 90413a, 90413a, and 90413c will be described as applying the configuration shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is applied and the drive output terminals are grouped into 3 groups of 4 channels per group. However, a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is described. And the drive output terminals may be grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group.

  In addition, a serial-parallel conversion circuit having more than 24 channels can be configured in the same manner, and the drive output terminals can be grouped into a plurality of groups of a prescribed number of channels per group. is there.

  Hereinafter, in the case of “time”, a time width (length of time) is indicated. In addition, “period” indicates a continuous time range from one timing to another timing. In addition, “period” indicates the predetermined time when the same phenomenon is repeated every predetermined time.

FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the principle of the light emission effect in this embodiment.
The effect control CPU 90120 performs an effect lottery by using an effect lottery using an emission effect distribution table 901212 described later.

  In this embodiment, at the timing when the reach state is generated in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (hereinafter referred to as “reach state generation timing”), the effect control CPU 90120 has the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitter control boards 9016D and 16E. , 9016F, the left frame LED 909b, the top frame LED 909a, and the right frame LED 909c are caused to emit light to execute a light emission effect.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 emits light by a light emission pattern (first pattern) that causes the LED 909 to emit light in a single color (specific color) and a light emission pattern (second pattern) that causes the LED 909 to emit light in a plurality of colors. The first pattern and the second pattern are characterized in that the big hit reliability is different and the production period is different. Here, for simplicity of explanation, the big hit reliability is "low" indicating that the reliability is low, "medium" indicating that the reliability is medium, and "high" indicating that the reliability is high. The principle will be explained by dividing it into four types, “highest” indicating that the reliability is the highest.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of the light emission effect in this embodiment.
This figure shows a timing chart showing an example of the control of the light emission effect in the specific super reach effect, and shows an example of the control of the light emission effect in the battle reach effect.

  In the following description, the timing at which the light emission effect starts is referred to as “light emission effect start timing”, and the timing at which the light emission effect ends is referred to as “light emission effect end timing”. Further, in this embodiment, “blue” and “red” emission colors that are single emission colors and “rainbow” emission colors that are emission colors represented by a plurality of colors are exemplified.

  When the battle reach effect is executed, the effect symbol is displayed in a normal variation display effect mode as shown in FIG. 115 (A) between the start of the change display of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state. Is displayed on the effect display device 905.

  In the effect display device 905, when the reach state occurs at the time “tm1”, as shown in FIGS. 115B and 115C, a message image 9053 is displayed and a battle effect corresponding to the battle reach effect or the like is displayed. Is displayed. In this embodiment, in response to the occurrence of the reach state, the effect control CPU 90120 starts executing the light emission effect. That is, in this embodiment, the light emission effect start timing is the timing when the reach state occurs (time “tm1”).

  As described above, in the effect symbol variation display, the effect symbol variation display is simultaneously started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. In accordance with a predetermined stop order such as “,” “right” and “middle”, the change display of the effect symbols is sequentially stopped in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905R and 905C, and finally the effect is displayed in all the effect symbol display areas. When the symbol stops and the display result is derived and displayed, the variable display ends.

  After the effect symbols change display is started all at once, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), when the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L and 905R are stopped, the reach is stopped. It becomes a state. The effect control CPU 90120 measures the elapsed time from the start of the change by a timer or the like, and starts the light emission effect when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time from the start of change to the reach state occurrence for the change pattern. The timing is determined and the execution of the light emission effect is started.

  FIG. 125 (A) shows an example in which the big hit reliability is lower than in the cases (B) and (C), and the fluctuation display result is “lost”. In this example, execution of the light emission effect is terminated at time “tn1” during the battle reach effect. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time “tn1”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “tn1”. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LED 909 to emit light with the emission color A. The light emission color A in this case may be a single light emission color and a light emission color (for example, blue) indicating that the big hit reliability is low.

  Here, the light emission effect period is determined based on the jackpot reliability in the variation. Specifically, the light emission effect period is controlled to be longer as the big hit reliability is higher. The light emission effect period indicates a continuous time range from the light emission effect start timing to the light emission effect end timing.

  FIG. 125B shows an example in which the big hit reliability is higher than that in the case of (A) but lower than that in the case of (C), and the variation display result is “lost”. In this example, execution of the light emission effect is terminated at the time “tn2 (> tn1)” during the battle reach effect. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time “tn2”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “tn2”. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LED 909 to emit light with the emission color B. The light emission color B in this case may be a single light emission color, and may be a light emission color (for example, green) indicating that the big hit reliability is medium.

  FIG. 125 (C) shows an example in which the big hit reliability is higher than the cases of (A) and (B), but lower than the case of (D), and the fluctuation display result is “lost”. Yes. In this example, the case where the execution of the light emission effect is ended at the time “tn3 (> tn2)” during the reach result effect executed after the battle reach effect is shown. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time “tn3”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “tn3”. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LED 909 to emit light with the emission color C. The luminescent color C in this case may be a luminescent color (for example, red) indicating that the big hit reliability is high.

  FIG. 125D shows an example in which the big hit reliability is the highest and the fluctuation display result is “big hit”. In this example, after the reach result effect after the battle reach effect, the execution of the light emission effect is terminated at the time “tn4 (> tn3)” when the special symbol change display ends in the stop symbol effect that is executed last. Show. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time “tn4”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “tn4”. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LED 909 to emit light with the special emission color. The special emission color in this case may be a special color (for example, rainbow color) indicating that the jackpot reliability is “highest”.

  Thus, in this embodiment, in the light emission effect, the timing at which the LED 909 starts to emit light (light emission effect start timing) is common (for example, when the reach state occurs), but the timing at which light emission ends (light emission effect end timing). By making the difference, the player can have a sense of expectation. In other words, the higher the big hit expectation level, the longer the time for which light emission continues, so that the player can expect a big hit and have a sense of excitement.

  In addition, when the special symbol variation display result is a display result corresponding to the big hit, the player can have a special sense of expectation by executing a light emission effect with a light emission pattern that causes the LED 909 to emit light with a special light emission color. Can do.

  In this embodiment, the three frames 909, the left frame LED 909b, the top frame LED 909a, and the right frame LED 909c, are caused to emit light to realize a light emission effect. However, all of the plurality of LEDs 909 emit light with the same light emission color. The plurality of LEDs 909 may emit light in different colors. Hereinafter, a case where light emission is performed with different emission colors will be exemplified.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of a light emission pattern table 901211 that is stored in the ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012 and defines the light emission pattern of the LED 909 for realizing the light emission effect in this embodiment. .

  In the light emission pattern table 901211, for example, a category, a light emission pattern, an electrical component, a light emission type, a light emission color, and a light emission effect time (millisecond ms) are defined in association with each other.

The category defines a category in which the light emission patterns are classified. In this embodiment, the light emission pattern of the top frame LED 909 (hereinafter referred to as “top frame light emission color”) is assumed to have the same category, and the head number of the light emission pattern (LP1, LP2, LP3, LP4, )).
In the light emission pattern, the number of the light emission pattern of the LED 909 applied in the light emission effect is determined according to the category.
In the light emitting pattern, the type of LED 909 to be emitted (left frame LED 909b, top frame LED 909a, right frame LED 909c) is determined for each electrical component.

  In the light emission type, the type of light emission of each electric component in the light emission pattern is determined. In this light emission type, “continuous” indicating that continuous light emission of the same color (hereinafter referred to as “continuous light emission”) is performed, or “switching” indicating that light emission is performed by changing (changing) a plurality of colors. ", Blinking" indicating that blinking is performed by turning on / off one color. Continuous light emission means lighting continuously (continuously) without a break.

  The color of light emitted from each electrical component is determined in the light emission pattern. The emission colors include colors such as “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow”.

  In the light emission effect time, a time width (time length) in which the light emission effect is executed by applying the light emission pattern is determined. Specifically, for the light emission patterns belonging to the same category, an appropriate light emission effect time corresponding to the variation display time of the variation pattern is determined in correspondence with each variation pattern described in FIG. The light emission effect time is a time for the LED 909 to emit light with the above-described light emission effect start timing as the beginning, and since the light emission effect time differs for each light emission pattern, the light emission effect end timing changes according to the light emission pattern.

  In addition, as can be seen from FIG. 126, in the light emission pattern table 901211, light emission patterns for causing the LEDs 909 to emit light in the same manner for the light emission patterns of the same category and light emission in different manners for the respective LEDs 909 are performed. The light emission pattern to be activated is determined. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to implement | achieve the light emission effect of a some variation, the effect effect of a light emission effect can be heightened, and game entertainment can be improved.

  FIG. 127 is stored in the ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012 in this embodiment, and the light emission effect distribution table 901212 that defines the allocation for the effect control CPU 90120 to select the light emission pattern defined in the light emission pattern table 901211 described above. It is a figure which shows an example of this table structure.

  127 (A) shows a light emission effect distribution table 901212A at the time of loss, and FIG. 127 (B) shows a light emission effect distribution table 901212B at the time of normal big hit, which is a distribution table at the time of normal big hit. 127 (C) shows a normal big hit light emission effect distribution table 901212C, which is a distribution table at the time of probability variation big hit, and these tables show the fluctuation pattern type, the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern allocation. The light emission pattern allocation is determined in association with each other.

In the variation pattern type, a variation pattern type designated by a variation pattern type designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is defined.
In the variation pattern, a variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern type and specified by a variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 9011 is defined. In the figure, the fluctuation display time is shown in parentheses with the contents of the fluctuation pattern.
In the variation pattern distribution, a ratio at which the variation pattern is selected is determined.
In the light emission pattern allocation, the ratio of the light emission patterns of the categories (LP1, LP2, LP3, LP4,...) Corresponding to the ceiling frame light emission color among the light emission patterns determined in the light emission pattern table 901211 is determined. It has been.

This will be specifically described.
In the deviation light emission effect distribution table 901212A of FIG. 127 (A), “normal fluctuation deviation”, “normal reach deviation”, and “super reach deviation” are defined as variation pattern types.
In the variation pattern type “regular variation deviation”, “regular variation deviation (7 seconds)” and “normal variation deviation (15 seconds)” are defined as variation patterns.
In the variation pattern type “normal reach loss”, “normal reach loss (20 seconds)” and “normal reach (30 seconds)” are defined as variation patterns.
In the variation pattern type “super-reaching”, “first super-reach (battle production) is off (40 seconds)” and “second super-reaching (story production) is off (50 seconds)” are defined as the fluctuation patterns. Yes.

  For fluctuation pattern allocation, the fluctuation pattern “deviation for normal fluctuation (7 seconds)” is “60%”, the fluctuation pattern “deviation for normal fluctuation (15 seconds)” is “20%”, and the fluctuation pattern “normal reach”. “9%” for “out of range (20 seconds)”, “6%” for the fluctuation pattern “out of normal reach (30 seconds)”, and “out of the first super reach (battle production)” (40 seconds). Is “3%”, and “2%” is defined for the variation pattern “second super reach (story production) deviation (50 seconds)”, and when these ratios are added together, “100%” is obtained.

  In the light emission pattern allocation, “0%” is defined for all the variation patterns included in the variation pattern types “deviation in normal variation” and “displacement in normal reach”. On the other hand, regarding the variation pattern included in the variation pattern type “super-reaching out”, blue “70%” is green “20%” in the variation pattern “first super-reach (battle effect) out (40 seconds)”. However, the red “10%” and the rainbow “0%” are defined, and the blue pattern “65%” is green for the fluctuation pattern “2nd super reach (story production) off (50 seconds)”. “25%”, red “10%”, and rainbow “0%” are defined.

  In the off-time light emission effect distribution table 901212A, the light emission pattern allocation is all set to “0%” for the fluctuation pattern types “regular fluctuation deviation” and “normal reach deviation”. For this reason, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the light emission effect in the case of a deviation due to normal fluctuation and a deviation from normal reach. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern type “super-reaching”, the light emission pattern allocation is set so that the relation of blue> green> red is relatively high, and the ratio of blue accounts for the majority. ing. For this reason, the ratio which performs the light emission effect which makes LED909 emit light in blue becomes the highest. “Rainbow” is set to “0%”. For this reason, the light emission effect which makes LED909 light-emit in a rainbow color is not performed.

In the normal big hit light emission effect distribution table 901212B of FIG. 127 (B), “normal reach big hit” and “super reach big hit” are defined as the variation pattern types.
In the variation pattern type “normal reach big hit”, “normal reach big hit (20 seconds)” and “normal reach big hit (30 seconds)” are defined as variation patterns.
Fluctuation pattern types “first super reach (battle production) big hit (40 seconds)” and “second super reach (story production) big hit (50 seconds)” are defined.

  For the fluctuation pattern allocation, the fluctuation pattern “normal reach big hit (20 seconds)” is “5%”, the fluctuation pattern “normal reach big hit (30 seconds)” is “10%”, and the fluctuation pattern “first super reach ( "Battle production) Big hit (40 seconds)" is set to "40%", and the fluctuation pattern "Second super reach (Story production) big hit (50 seconds)" is set to "45%", respectively. The total is “100%”.

  In the light emission pattern allocation, “0%” is set for all the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type “normal reach big hit”. On the other hand, the variation pattern “first super reach (battle production) big hit (40 seconds)” included in the fluctuation pattern type “first super reach (battle production) big hit (40 seconds)” is blue “20%” Green “30%”, red “30%”, and rainbow “20%” are defined, and the variation pattern “second super reach (story production) jackpot (50 seconds))” is blue “15”. % ", Green" 35% ", red" 30% ", and rainbow" 20% ".

  In the normal big hit light emission effect distribution table 901212B, for the variation pattern type “normal reach big hit”, the light emission pattern allocation is all “0%”. For this reason, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the light emission effect in the case of a normal reach big hit. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern type “super reach big hit”, the value is determined so that the ratio of green and red is relatively high in the light emission pattern allocation. For this reason, the ratio of executing the light emission effect of causing the LED 909 to emit light in green or red is relatively high.

In the probability variation big hit light emission effect distribution table 901212C of FIG. 127 (C), “normal reach big hit” and “super reach big hit” are defined as the variation pattern types.
In the variation pattern type “normal reach big hit”, “normal reach big hit (20 seconds)” and “normal reach big hit (30 seconds)” are defined as variation patterns.
Fluctuation pattern types “first super reach (battle production) big hit (40 seconds)” and “second super reach (story production) big hit (50 seconds)” are defined.

  For the fluctuation pattern allocation, the fluctuation pattern “normal reach big hit (20 seconds)” is “1%”, the fluctuation pattern “normal reach big hit (30 seconds)” is “4%”, and the fluctuation pattern “first super reach ( “Battle production) big hit (40 seconds)” is set to “40%”, and the fluctuation pattern “second super reach (story production) big hit (50 seconds)” is set to “55%”. The total is “100%”.

  In the light emission pattern allocation, “0%” is set for all the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type “normal reach big hit”. On the other hand, in the variation pattern “first super reach (battle production) big hit (40 seconds)” included in the fluctuation pattern type “first super reach (battle production) big hit (40 seconds)”, blue “5%” Green “25%”, red “40%”, and rainbow “30%” are defined, and the variation pattern “second super reach (story production) jackpot (50 seconds)” is blue “1”. % ", Green" 29% ", red" 40% ", and rainbow" 30% ".

  In the probability variation big hit light emission effect distribution table 901212C, for the variation pattern type “normal reach big hit”, the emission pattern allocation is all “0%”. For this reason, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the light emission effect in the case of a normal reach big hit. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern type “super reach big hit”, values are determined so that the ratio of red and rainbow colors is relatively high in the light emission pattern allocation. For this reason, the ratio of executing the light emission effect of causing the LED 909 to emit light in red or rainbow is relatively high.

  The effect control CPU 90120 emits the ceiling light according to the allocation defined in the corresponding variation pattern in the above-described emission effect distribution table 901212 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 9011. Select a color. Then, the light emission pattern defined in the light emission pattern table 901211 of FIG. 126 is selected, and the light emission pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is selected from the light emission patterns included in the selected ceiling frame light emission color category. The light emission pattern used for the light emission effect is determined.

  Here, the jackpot reliability is defined as “occupancy ratio in jackpot variation in the overall appearance rate including both jackpot variation and outlier variation” for a plurality of light emission patterns. From the light emission pattern allocation determined in the light emission effect distribution table 901212, the occupancy corresponding to the emission color “blue” is generally a big hit reliability “low”, and the occupancy corresponding to the emission color “green” is a big hit reliability. The occupation ratio corresponding to “medium” and the emission color “red” corresponds to the big hit reliability “high”, and the occupation ratio corresponding to the emission color “rainbow” corresponds to the big hit reliability “highest”.

  Here, the description has been made assuming that the category of the light emission pattern is selected based on the light emission color of the top frame, but this is merely an example, and the light emission color of the left frame LED 909b (left frame light emission color) or the light emission of the right frame LED 909c. The light emission pattern table 901211 and the light emission effect distribution table 901212 may be determined so as to select a light emission pattern category based on the color (light emission color in the right frame).

  Further, in the above-described light emission effect distribution table 901212, the light emission pattern allocation is set to “0%” for the fluctuation pattern type for normal fluctuation, normal reach loss, and normal reach big hit, but the light emission color is similar to the super reach fluctuation pattern type. Allocation may be determined for each.

FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table configuration of a light emission control table 901213 that is stored in the ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012 and used for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform light emission control of the LED 909 in this embodiment.
In the light emission control table 901213, for example, a light emission pattern, a driver ID, an output terminal number, an electrical component, and light emission control generation data are defined in association with each other.

In the light emission pattern, each light emission pattern determined in the light emission pattern table 901211 is stored.
The driver ID stores IDs (“D1”, “D2”, “D3” in order in this embodiment) as identification information for identifying each of the light emitter drivers 90413a, 90413b, 90413c.
In the output terminal number, the number of the output terminal of the luminous body driver 90413 (00 to 11 in this embodiment) is stored.
In the electrical component, the luminous body driver 90413 and the electrical component corresponding to the output terminal number (in this embodiment, “left frame”, “top frame”, “right frame”) are stored in order.
The light emission control generation data is data for controlling a serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light emitter driver, and is used for generating light emission control data based on the control data format described with reference to FIG. Data is stored.

FIG. 129 and FIG. 130 are diagrams showing an example of the data configuration of the light emission control generation data included in the light emission control table 901213 described above.
Each light emission control generation data includes, for example, a data name, a format type, an address, a data transmission cycle, a unit light emission time, a light emission control cycle, and format data.

In the data name, the data name of the format generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern of the light emission control table 901213 is stored.
In the format type, identification information (“basic” or “extended”) indicating which of the basic format (EX = 0) and extended format (EX = 1) shown in FIG. 72 is applied is stored. The

The address stores an address set in a serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light emitting driver.
In the data transmission cycle, a cycle in which light emission control data is transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the light emitter driver 90413 of each light emitter control board via the effect control relay board 9016A is stored. In this embodiment, the data transmission cycle is described as 10 ms (milliseconds).
In the unit light emission time, a unit time for causing the LED 909 corresponding to the light emitter driver to emit light is stored.

  In the light emission control cycle, a time as a light emission control unit for one cycle (hereinafter, this cycle is referred to as “light emission control cycle”) is stored. This light emission control cycle differs depending on the light emission type. Specifically, when the light emission type is “continuous” or “flashing”, a time such as “100 ms” can be set in advance, and the light emission type is “switched” (special light emission color ( In the case of rainbow-colored light emission or the like, a time such as “1800 ms” can be determined. Details will be described later.

  In the format data, time-series Q data to be included in the light emission control data by applying the format of the format type is stored. Specifically, in the format data, the light emission order and the Q data corresponding to the RGB values corresponding to the light emission order are defined in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that the light emission of the LED 909 is controlled by Q data expressed in hexadecimal (color hexadecimal, RGB color value). In the color hexadecimal number, each of RGB is represented by a total of six digits of hexadecimal numbers (0 to F), representing “16 × 16 = 256 gradations”. In this specification, two digits for each of RGB are represented. The numerical values of are the same, and each of RGB is shown and described as a notation in which one digit is omitted for a total of three digits. For simplicity, the notation of “0x” representing a hexadecimal number is omitted and illustrated.

  The Q data includes Q data targeted for group 1, Q data targeted for group 2, as Q data output to the serial-parallel conversion circuit that constitutes the light emitter driver 90413 corresponding to the address, Q data for group 3 is included. In the Q data corresponding to each group, RGB values to be output from the four output terminals Q included in the group are stored.

  Specifically, regarding the RGB values as output data, in group 1, Q0 corresponds to the R value (R), Q1 corresponds to the G value (G), and Q2 corresponds to the B value (B). Since Q3 is connected to the ground, it is not present (-). In group 2, Q4 corresponds to the R value (R), Q5 corresponds to the G value (G), and Q6 corresponds to the B value (B). Q7 is not (−) because it is connected to the ground. In Group 3, Q8 corresponds to the R value (R), Q9 corresponds to the G value (G), and Q10 corresponds to the B value (B). Since Q11 is connected to solenoid 90500, it is set to no (-)

This will be specifically described.
The light emission control generation data shown at the top of FIG. 129 is data whose data name is “dat1-1-a”.
The format type is “basic”, and it is determined that the basic format of FIG. 72 (2) is applied.
The address is “08”, and it is determined that the address is applied to the light emitter driver 90413b corresponding to the left frame LED 909b.
The data transmission cycle is “10 ms”, and it is determined that data is transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the light emitter driver 90413b every 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is “100 ms”, and it is determined that the left frame LED 909b emits light with a unit light emission time of 100 ms.
The light emission control cycle is “100 ms”. The light emission type of the light emission pattern is “continuous”, and the time equal to the unit light emission time is determined as the light emission control cycle in order to perform continuous light emission of a specific color.

  In the format data, the order of “1” to “N” is defined as the light emission order. For each of the light emission orders “1” to “N”, “0, 0, F” is defined as Q data (RGB values) for each group. For all the light emission orders, the R value and G value in the Q data are set to “0” and the B value is set to “F”, so that blue continuous light emission is realized.

FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating another example of the light emission control generation data.
The light emission control generation data is data having a data name “dat4-1-a”.
The format type is “basic”, and it is determined that the basic format of FIG. 72 (2) is applied.
The address is “08”, and it is determined that the address is applied to the light emitter driver 90413b corresponding to the left frame LED 909b.
The data transmission cycle is “10 ms”, and it is determined that data is repeatedly transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the light emitter driver 90413b at a cycle of 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is “40 ms”, and it is determined that the left frame LED 909b emits light with a unit light emission time of 40 ms.
The light emission control cycle is “120 ms”. The light emission type of the light emission pattern is “switching”, and in order to perform rainbow light emission by switching (changing) three colors of red, green and blue, a time three times the unit light emission time of 40 ms is set as the light emission control cycle. It has been established.

  In the format data, the order from “1” to “M” is determined as the light emission order. In the light emission order “1”, “F, 0, 0” is defined as Q data (RGB values) of each group, and in the light emission order “2”, “0, F, 0 ”is defined,“ 0, 0, F ”is defined as the Q data (RGB values) for each group in the light emission order“ 3 ”, and Q data for each group is defined in the light emission order“ 4 ”. “F, 0, 0” is defined as (RGB value). The same applies hereinafter. Thereby, red light emission, green light emission, and blue light emission are performed every unit light emission time of 40 ms. As a result, the player can visually recognize the rainbow light emission.

FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an example of the light emission pattern in this embodiment and the temporal change of the RGB value corresponding to each light emission pattern.
FIG. 131 (1) shows an example of the light emission pattern A corresponding to the big hit reliability “low” and causing the LED 909 to emit light continuously in a single color blue. In this example, by setting the R value and the G value to “0” and the B value to “F”, continuous light emission of a single blue color is realized. Δts in the figure is the data transmission cycle described above, and is, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δtm in the figure is the unit light emission time described above, for example, 100 ms. Here, in order to realize continuous light emission with the light emission type “continuous”, it is illustrated as “continuous unit light emission time”.

  FIG. 131 (2) shows an example in which the LED 909 continuously emits light in a single green color corresponding to the big hit reliability “medium” as the light emission pattern B. In this example, by setting the R value and the B value to “0” and the G value to “F”, continuous light emission of a single green color is realized. Δts in the figure is the data transmission cycle described above, and is, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δtm in the figure is the unit light emission time described above, for example, 100 ms. Here, in order to realize continuous light emission with the light emission type “continuous”, it is illustrated as “continuous unit light emission time”.

  FIG. 131 (3) shows an example in which the LED 909 continuously emits light in a single green color corresponding to the big hit reliability “high” as the light emission pattern C. In this example, the G value and the B value are set to “0”, and the R value is set to “F”, thereby realizing continuous red light emission of a single color. Δts in the figure is the data transmission cycle described above, and is, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δtm in the figure is the unit light emission time described above, for example, 100 ms. Here, in order to realize continuous light emission with the light emission type “continuous”, it is illustrated as “continuous unit light emission time”.

  FIG. 131 (4) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in rainbow colors corresponding to the big hit reliability “highest” as the light emission pattern D. In this example, each of the RGB values is changed in the order of “F” → “0” → “F” → “0”,... Is realized. Δts in the figure is the data transmission cycle described above, and is, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δts in the figure is the unit light emission time described above, for example, 40 ms. Here, in order to realize switching light emission with the light emission type “switching”, it is illustrated as “switching unit light emission time”.

  In the light emission patterns A to C, monochromatic blue, green, and red are continuously emitted, whereas in the light emission pattern D, rainbow colors are expressed by sequentially changing red → green → blue. Therefore, the continuous light emission time as a single color is shorter than the light emission patterns A to C. Also, focusing on the unit light emission time, the switching unit light emission time Δtn in the light emission pattern D is shorter than the continuous unit light emission time Δtm corresponding to the light emission patterns A to C.

  In the above-described light emission pattern, for example, the light emission pattern A may be continuously emitted in white by setting the RGB value to the maximum value instead of blue.

  Next, control data for controlling the gradation of the LED and realizing light emission by color mixture will be described. The Q data (RGB values) in the gradation control data described here can be directly applied to the Q data of the format data included in the light emission control generation data.

FIG. 132 illustrates an example of gradation control data that is control data for performing gradation control for realizing rainbow light emission.
In this gradation control data, the leftmost column shows a change in the emission color. The right column shows the switching unit light emission time Δtn / data transmission cycle Δts, and the right column shows Q data (RGB values) corresponding to each group (group 1, group 2,...). Expressed in hexadecimal, the rightmost column shows the light emission order. In this example, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 40 ms, and the data transmission period Δts is 10 ms (Δtn = 40, Δts = 10).

  In the light emission order 01 to 03, white light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, F, F”. In the light emission order 04 to 09, red light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, 0, 0”. In the emission order 10 to 15, orange light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, A, 0”.

  In the light emission order 16 to 21, yellow light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, F, 0”. In the light emission sequence 22 to 27, green light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “0, F, 0”. In the light emission order 28 to 33, light emission of light blue is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “0, F, F”.

  In the light emission order 34 to 39, blue light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “0, 0, F”. In the light emission order 40 to 45, purple light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “8, 0, 8”.

  The light emission order 01 to 45 can be configured as Q data for one cycle, for example. The time corresponding to this one cycle corresponds to the light emission control cycle described above. Here, the light emission control cycle is “1800 ms”. That is, the control is performed so that the LEDs 909 emit light sequentially in the light emission color according to the light emission order in the light emission control cycle of 1800 ms, with 01 to 45 as one set.

  As described above, by controlling the light emission colors to be emitted from the LED 909 in a short switching unit light emission time Δts so as to sequentially switch between a plurality of colors, it is as if human eyes are emitting rainbow light. It can be visually recognized.

FIG. 133 shows an example of gradation control data for realizing red continuous light emission.
In this gradation control data, the leftmost column shows continuous unit light emission time Δtm / data transmission cycle Δts, and the right column shows Q data corresponding to each group (group 1, group 2,...). (RGB value) is expressed in hexadecimal, and the rightmost column shows the light emission order. In this example, the continuous unit light emission time Δtm is 100 ms, and the data transmission period Δts is 10 ms (Δtm = 100, Δts = 10).

  In the light emission order 01, red light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, 0, 0”. The light emission in the light emission order 01 can be configured as Q data of the light emission control period, for example. Here, the light emission control cycle is “100 ms”. That is, the light emission of 01 may be controlled to emit light with a light emission control period of 100 ms.

FIG. 134 shows an example of gradation control data for realizing red blinking.
In this gradation control data, the leftmost column shows the switching unit light emission time Δtn / data transmission cycle Δts, and the right column shows Q data corresponding to each group (group 1, group 2,...). (RGB value) is expressed in hexadecimal, and the rightmost column shows the light emission order. In this example, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 50 ms, and the data transmission period Δts is 10 ms (Δtn = 50, Δts = 10).

  The light emission sequence 01 realizes red light emission by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, 0, 0”. In the light emission order 02, the Q data (RGB value) of each group is set to “0, 0, 0”, thereby realizing the light-off.

  The light emission order 01, 02 can be configured as Q data of the light emission control period. Here, the light emission control cycle is “100 ms”. That is, it is only necessary to control the LEDs 909 to emit light sequentially in the emission color according to the light emission order in the light emission control cycle of 100 ms, with 01 and 02 as one set.

  Note that during the period corresponding to the light emission control cycle (1800 ms in FIG. 132, 100 ms in FIGS. 133 and 134) described in the above gradation control data, the effect of the special symbol fluctuation period (special figure fluctuation period) is shown. It does not necessarily correspond to the period (production period) being executed. That is, the light emission control cycle is a control cycle indicating one cycle of a group of control data as shown in FIGS. 132 to 134, and this is not related to the production period.

  Here, when executing the light emission effect by changing the plurality of colors described above (rainbow color light emission effect at the time of jackpot determination), the timing at which a period corresponding to an integral multiple of the light emission control cycle elapses is a variation of the special symbol. There is no problem if it coincides with the timing when the special symbol ends, but if the timing of the special symbol is later than the timing when the special symbol changes, the light emission by the LED 909 will continue even after the special symbol variation ends. Problems arise.

  As one of the methods for solving this, the production control CPU 90120 generates light emission control data including a light emission stop command in the header (HD) at the timing when the change of the special symbol ends, and the light emitter The data can be transmitted to the driver 90413 (serial-parallel conversion circuit).

  In this case, in the serial-parallel changing circuit, after receiving the light emission control data including the light emission stop command in the header (HD), the light emission control data transmitted from the effect control CPU 90120 is parallel to the serial signal from the decoder. Stop converting to signal. As a result, no data is output to the LED 909, and as a result, the light emission of the LED 909 is stopped.

  As another method, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits blank data (for example, data in which all Q values are “0”) to the luminous body driver 90413 after the variation of the special symbol is finished. Also good.

  In this case, the serial-parallel conversion circuit continuously performs the conversion from the serial signal to the parallel signal, but since it is blank data, the LED 909 is completely turned off, and as a result, the light emission of the LED 909 is stopped.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the light emission effect process executed by the effect control CPU 90120 in this embodiment.
First, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a light emission effect execution condition that is a condition for executing the light emission effect is satisfied (A1). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the main board 9011.

  If it is determined that it is established (A1; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines a light emission pattern (A3). Specifically, based on the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern command, a light emission pattern is selected from the light emission pattern table 901211 by the above-described method using the light emission effect distribution table 901212 and determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is the light emission effect start timing (A5). Specifically, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the effect symbol reaches a predetermined time that is predetermined as the time from the start of variation to the occurrence of the reach state for the variation pattern, the light emission effect The start timing is determined.

  If it is determined that it is the light emission effect start timing (A5; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is the data transmission timing (A7). The data transmission timing is a timing each time when the time corresponding to the above-described data transmission cycle elapses.

  If it is determined that it is the data transmission timing (A7; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the process of loop A for each electrical component (LED 909) (A9 to A21).

  In the process of loop A, the effect control CPU 90120 executes light emission control data generation processing for generating light emission control data for the electrical component (A11). Specifically, with reference to the light emission control data 901213, the light emission control generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern determined in A3 is read. Then, using the read light emission control generation data, light emission control data in the format (basic format or extended format) corresponding to the common format and format type shown in FIG. 72 is generated for the electrical component.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a light emission control data transmission process for transmitting the light emission control data generated in A9 to each light emitter control board 16 (A13).

  As shown in FIG. 68, the light emission control data transmitted from the effect control CPU 90120 is a serial-parallel conversion circuit that first configures the light emitter driver 90413b of the light emitter control board 9016D via the effect control relay board 9016A. To the data input terminal (DATA / I). The input light emission control data is sent from the data through terminal (DATA / O) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit to the data input terminal (DATA / I) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit that constitutes the light emitter driver 90413a of the light emitter control board 9016E. ). The input light emission control data is sent from the data through terminal (DATA / O) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit to the data input terminal (DATA / I) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit that constitutes the light emitter driver 90413c of the light emitter control board 9016F. ).

  In the serial-parallel conversion circuit constituting each light emitter driver 90413 (90413a, 90413b, 90413c), address information (AD1 to AD5 in 12 channels) included in the common format of the input light emission control data is input as a decode address. It is determined whether or not it matches the address information set from the terminal (AD0 to AD5 in the case of 12 channels), and the input serial format clock signal and light emission control data are converted into a parallel format signal only if they match. Converted. That is, only the light emission control data in which the address information included in the input light emission control data matches the address information set from the decode address input terminal (AD0 to AD5 in the 12th channel) is parallel in the corresponding light emitter driver 90413. Since it is converted into a signal, the light emission control data for the light emitter driver 90413 having a different address is passed through as it is.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 increments the group number (group No.) by “1” (A15). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the above processing is completed for all the groups corresponding to the electrical component (A17), and if it is determined that the processing is not completed (A17; No), A9. Return processing to. If it is determined that the process has been completed (A17; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 resets the group number to “0” (A19). Then, the effect control CPU 90120 moves the process to the next electrical component (LED 909).

  If the process of loop A is executed for all the electrical components (LEDs 909) (A21), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is the end timing of the light emission effect (A23). If it is determined that it is not the end timing (A23; No), the effect control CPU 90120 returns the process to A7.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the light emission effect (A23; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether to end the process (A25). If it determines with continuing a process (A25; No), CPU90120 for presentation control will return a process to A1. On the other hand, if it determines with complete | finishing a process (A25; Yes), CPU90120 for effect control will complete | finish a light emission effect process.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a light emission effect using the LED 909. The effect control CPU 90120 produces a light emission effect by a first pattern that causes the LED 909 to emit light in a specific color such as blue, green, and red, and a second pattern that causes the LED 909 to emit light in a plurality of colors (blue, green, red, and the like). It is feasible. The first pattern and the second pattern have different jackpot reliability and have different light emission effect periods.
According to this, by making the big hit reliability different between the first pattern and the second pattern and making the light emission effect period different, the effect effect of the light emission effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a light emission effect by a plurality of light emission patterns having at least a part of light emission modes (e.g., light emission colors), and each of the plurality of light emission patterns is specified as blue, green, red, or the like. It is a light emission mode including light emission of color, and the big hit reliability is different in these plural light emission patterns, and the light emission unit time for a specific color is different.
According to this, it becomes possible to pay attention to the difference in the period during which the specific color is emitted, so that the effect of the light emission effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, an embodiment in which a light emission pattern that causes the LED 909 to blink in a specific color is applied as the light emission pattern will be described. In this embodiment, the LED 909 is caused to emit light by a plurality of light emission patterns based on a light emission mode in which a specific color is blinked. The feature is that the period is referred to as different.

FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table configuration of the light emission pattern table 901211 according to the third embodiment.
The table configuration of the light emission pattern table 901211 is the same as that of the light emission pattern table 901211 described with reference to FIG. 126, but the contents are different.

  In this light emission pattern table, for each category, the light emission pattern includes a light emission pattern whose light emission type is “flashing” and whose light emission color is “red”. That is, a light emission pattern for causing the LED 909 to emit red blinking light is determined. In addition, a red flashing light emission pattern is determined according to the jackpot reliability. This embodiment is characterized in that the unit light emission time of the red blinking light emission pattern is changed according to the big hit reliability.

FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating an example of a data configuration of light emission control generation data in this case.
The data structure of the light emission control generation data is the same as that of the light emission control generation data described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130, but the contents of the data are different.

Specifically, the light emission control generation data illustrated in FIG. 137 is data having a data name “dat11-1-a”.
The format type is “basic”, and it is determined that the basic format of FIG. 72 (2) is applied.
The address is “08”, and it is determined that the address is applied to the light emitter driver 90413b corresponding to the left frame LED 909b.
The data transmission cycle is “10 ms”, and it is determined that data is transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the light emitter driver 90413b every 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is “100 ms”, and it is determined that the left frame LED 909b emits light with a unit light emission time of 200 ms.
The light emission control period is “200 ms”. The light emission type of the light emission pattern is “flashing”, and in order to cause red light to be turned on / off, a time twice as long as the unit light emission time of 10 ms is set as the light emission control cycle.

  In the format data, the order of “1” to “P” is determined as the light emission order. In the light emission order “1”, “F, 0, 0” is defined as Q data (RGB values) for each group, and in the light emission order “2”, “0, “0, 0” is defined, “F, 0, 0” is defined as the Q data (RGB values) of each group in the light emission order “3”, and Q data of each group is defined in the light emission order “4”. “0, 0, 0” is defined as (RGB value). The same applies hereinafter. As a result, the red light is turned on / off every unit light emission time of 50 ms. As a result, red flashing is realized.

FIG. 138 is a timing chart showing an example of the light emission pattern in this embodiment and the temporal change of the RGB value corresponding to each light emission pattern.
FIG. 138 (1) shows an example in which the LED 909 blinks in red corresponding to the big hit reliability “low” as the light emission pattern E. In this example, by switching the red lighting with the R value “F”, the G value and the B value “0”, and the red lighting with the RGB values “0” respectively, by the blinking unit light emission time Δt 1. Realizes flashing red.

  FIG. 138 (2) shows an example in which the LED 909 blinks in red corresponding to the big hit reliability “medium” as the light emission pattern F. In this example, by switching the red lighting with the R value “F”, the G value and the B value “0”, and the red lighting with each RGB value “0” by switching by the blinking unit light emission time Δt 2. Realizes flashing red. Here, the blinking unit light emission time Δto2 can be determined to be shorter than the blinking unit light emission time Δto1 in FIG. 138 (1) (Δto2 <Δto1).

  FIG. 138 (3) shows an example in which the LED 909 blinks in red corresponding to the big hit reliability “high” as the light emission pattern G. In this example, by switching the red lighting with the R value “F”, the G value and the B value “0”, and the red lighting with the RGB values “0” respectively, by switching the flashing unit light emission time Δt 3 by 3 times. Realizes flashing red. Here, the blinking unit light emission time Δto3 can be determined to be shorter than the blinking unit light emission time Δt02 in FIG. 138 (2) (Δt03 <Δt02).

In FIG. 138 (4), the light emission pattern H corresponds to the big hit reliability “highest”,
An example is shown in which LEP9 emits light in rainbow colors. In this example, each of the RGB values is changed in order of “F” → “0” → “F” → “0” →... Realizes light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn can be set to be shorter than the blinking unit light emission time Δt03 in FIG. 138 (3) (Δtn <Δt03).

  The light emission patterns E, F, and G are light emission patterns that cause the LED 909 to emit light in a light emission mode in which red blinks, and these light emission patterns correspond to the first specific pattern. Further, the light emission pattern H is a light emission pattern that causes the LED 909 to emit light in a light emission mode in which a color is changed from red to other colors among a plurality of colors (red, green, and blue), and this light emission pattern corresponds to the second specific pattern. To do.

  The light emission patterns E, F, G (first specific pattern) and the light emission pattern H (second specific pattern) are controlled so that the big hit reliability is different and the red light emission period is different. Specifically, the light emission pattern H having the highest jackpot reliability is controlled so that the red light emission period is the shortest.

  Also, the light emission patterns E, F, and G that are the same first specific pattern are controlled so that the big hit reliability is different and the red light emission period is different. Specifically, the light emission pattern G having the highest jackpot reliability is controlled so that the red light emission period, that is, the red blinking period is the shortest.

  In the above example, since the blinking and lighting of red are switched by the blinking unit light emission time Δt0, “2 × Δto” that is twice the blinking unit light emission time Δto is the red light emission cycle.

  Here, red has been described as an example of the specific color for blinking the LED 909, but this may be other colors such as blue and green. Further, the lighting time and the blinking time do not necessarily have to be the same, and one of the times may be longer than the other time.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 has a first specific pattern for causing the LED 909 to emit light in a light emission mode in which specific colors such as blue, green, and red are blinked, and any one of a plurality of colors including the specific color. The light emission effect can be executed by the second specific pattern that causes the LED 909 to emit light according to the light emission mode changed from the other color to the other color, and the big hit reliability is different between the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern, and the specific color The light emission period is different.
According to this, by making the big hit reliability different between the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern and making the light emission cycle of the specific color different, it becomes possible to focus on the difference in the light emission cycle of the specific color. It is possible to enhance the production effect of the light emission effect and improve the game entertainment.

  Regarding the light emission effect by the light emission pattern described in the third embodiment, the principle of the light emission effect including the timing of starting / ending the light emission effect, the data configuration for realizing the light emission effect, and the control method are described in the second embodiment. A method similar to that of the form can be applied.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, an embodiment in which a light emission pattern having a common color change mode including a specific color is applied as the light emission pattern will be described. This embodiment is characterized in that the LED 909 is caused to emit light by a common pattern having a common color change mode, the big hit reliability is varied by a plurality of common patterns, and the light emission period of a specific color is varied.

FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating an example of a data configuration of light emission control generation data in this case.
The data structure of the light emission control generation data is the same as that of the light emission control generation data described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130, but the contents of the data are different.

Specifically, the light emission control generation data illustrated in FIG. 139 is data having a data name “dat21-1-a”.
The format type is “basic”, and it is determined that the basic format of FIG. 72 (2) is applied.
The address is “08”, and it is determined that the address is applied to the light emitter driver 90413b corresponding to the left frame LED 909b.
The data transmission cycle is “10 ms”, and it is determined that data is transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the light emitter driver 90413b every 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is “100 ms”, and it is determined that the left frame LED 909b emits light with a unit light emission time of 200 ms.
The light emission control period is “200 ms”. The light emission type of the light emission pattern is “switching”, and in order to perform light emission by switching (change) between white and blue, a time twice as long as the unit light emission time of 100 ms is set as the light emission control cycle.

  In the format data, the order of “1” to “P” is determined as the light emission order. In the light emission order “1”, “F, F, F” is defined as Q data (RGB values) of each group, and in the light emission order “2”, “0, “F, F, F” is defined as the Q data (RGB values) of each group in the light emission order “3”, and the Q data of each group is defined in the light emission order “4”. “0, 0, F” is defined as (RGB value). The same applies hereinafter. Accordingly, white light emission and blue light emission are performed every unit light emission time of 50 ms. As a result, white-blue light emission is realized.

FIG. 140 is a timing chart showing an example of the light emission pattern in this embodiment and the temporal change of the RGB value corresponding to each light emission pattern.
FIG. 140 (1) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in white and blue as the light emission pattern S, corresponding to the big hit reliability “low”. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R, G, and B values set to “F” and the second emission (blue) with the B value set to “F” and the R and G values set to “0”. ) With the switching unit light emission time Δtn1 at a time, thereby realizing white-blue switching light emission.

  FIG. 140 (2) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in white and blue corresponding to the big hit reliability “medium” as the light emission pattern T. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R, G, and B values set to “F” and the second emission (blue) with the B value set to “F” and the R and G values set to “0”. ) Is switched by the switching unit light emission time Δtn2 at a time, thereby realizing white / blue switching light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn2 can be determined to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn1 in FIG. 140 (1) (Δtn2 <Δtn1).

  FIG. 140 (3) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in white and blue corresponding to the big hit reliability “high” as the light emission pattern U. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R, G, and B values set to “F” and the second emission (blue) with the B value set to “F” and the R and G values set to “0”. ) Is switched by the switching unit light emission time Δtn3 step by step to realize white / blue switching light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn3 can be determined to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn2 in FIG. 140 (2) (Δtn3 <Δtn2).

  FIG. 140 (4) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in white and blue corresponding to the big hit reliability “highest” as the light emission pattern V. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R, G, and B values set to “F” and the second emission (blue) with the B value set to “F” and the R and G values set to “0”. ) Is switched by the switching unit light emission time Δtn4 at a time, thereby realizing white / blue switching light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn4 can be determined to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn3 in FIG. 140 (3) (Δtn4 <Δtn3).

  The light emission patterns S, T, U, and V realize a light emission pattern having a common color change mode by switching between white light emission and blue light emission. Further, the higher the big hit reliability, the shorter the unit light emission time for switching between white and blue is controlled. Further, since the light emission patterns S, T, U, and V are light emission patterns that change a plurality of colors, the light emission patterns S, T, U, and V correspond to a second pattern and a common pattern that has a common color change mode.

  In the above description, the switching light emission of white and blue has been described as an example, but switching light emission of white green and switching light emission of white red may be realized in the same manner.

In this embodiment, the CPU 90120 for effect control can execute the light emission effect by the second pattern by a plurality of common patterns having a common color change mode, and the big hit reliability is different among the plurality of common patterns. The light emission cycle is different.
According to this, it is possible to focus attention on the difference in the light emission period of the common color by making the light emission period of the common color different in the big hit reliability in a plurality of common patterns, and enhance the effect effect of the light emission effect. , Can improve the game entertainment.

  Regarding the light emission effect by the light emission pattern described in the fourth embodiment, the principle of the light emission effect including the timing to start / end the light emission effect, the data configuration for realizing the light emission effect, and the control method are described in the second embodiment. A method similar to that of the form can be applied.

[5. Other Embodiments]
Embodiments to which this embodiment can be applied are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of this embodiment. Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described. In addition, about the same structure as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted again.

[5-1. Game machine]
In the above embodiment, the gaming machine according to this embodiment has been described as a pachinko gaming machine 901. However, a slot machine that allows a player to play a game using a gaming medal is used as a gaming machine according to this embodiment. You may make it perform the light emission effect similar to said embodiment.

[5-2. Light emitting part]
In the above embodiment, the light emitting unit according to this embodiment has been described as the three types of the left frame LED 909b, the top frame LED 909a, and the right frame LED 909c. However, similarly, for example, the board-side LEDs 909d and 909e may be used as the light emitting unit according to this embodiment.

  In addition, for example, a movable member for production (production effect) is configured to be operated by driving a solenoid, and an LED is formed on this production role, and the feature LED is used as the light emitting unit according to this embodiment. It is good.

  Further, for example, LED light is irradiated from the side surface of a laser-processed acrylic plate and the like, and a light guide plate such as an LED light guide plate configured as an acrylic plate that emits surface light by a special pulse mark, or a 7-segment display method is used for display A segment display, a dot display capable of performing display by a dot display method, and the like are configured as a light emitting unit in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and these light emitting units are used as the light emitting unit according to this embodiment. The light emission effect may be executed.

[5-3. Flash pattern]
In the above embodiment, the light emission pattern in which the light emitting unit emits light with the specific color as a single color has been described as an example as the first pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting unit may emit light by using a light emission pattern that continuously emits a mixed color (such as a color obtained by mixing RGB at a predetermined ratio) as a specific color.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the light emission pattern that causes the LED 909 to emit light in the light emission mode in which the specific color is blinked as a single color has been described as an example of the first specific pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting unit may be caused to emit light by using a light emission pattern that blinks a mixed color (such as a color in which RGB is mixed at a predetermined ratio) as a specific color as the first specific pattern.

  Further, the following light emission pattern may be determined as the light emission pattern.

  FIG. 141 is a timing chart showing an example of light emission patterns and temporal changes in RGB values corresponding to the respective light emission patterns in other embodiments.

  FIG. 141 (1) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in white and blue corresponding to the big hit reliability “low” as the light emission pattern W. In this example, the first emission (white) with the R, G, and B values set to “F” and the second emission (blue) with the B value set to “F” and the R and G values set to “0”. ) Is switched by the switching unit light emission time Δtn5, thereby realizing white-blue switching light emission.

  FIG. 141 (2) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits white and green light corresponding to the big hit reliability “medium” as the light emission pattern X. In this example, the first light emission (white) with the R, G, and B values set to “F” and the second light emission (green) with the G value set to “F” and the R and B values set to “0”. ) Is switched in units of switching unit light emission time Δtn6, thereby realizing white-green switching light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn6 can be determined to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn5 in FIG. 141 (1) (Δtn6 <Δtn5).

  FIG. 141 (3) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits white and red light as the light emission pattern Y, corresponding to the big hit reliability “high”. In this example, the first light emission (white) with the R, G, and B values being “F” and the second light emission (red) with the R value being “F” and the G and B values being “0”. ) Is switched by the switching unit light emission time Δtn7 step by step, thereby realizing white-red switching light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn7 can be determined to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn6 in FIG. 141 (2) (Δtn7 <Δtn6).

  FIG. 141 (4) shows an example in which the LED 909 emits light in rainbow colors corresponding to the big hit reliability “highest” as the light emission pattern Z. In this example, each of the RGB values is changed in order of “F” → “0” → “F” → “0” →... Realizes light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn8 can be determined to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn7 in FIG. 141 (3) (Δtn8 <Δtn7).

[5-4. Flash control]
In the above-described embodiment, the light emission of the LED 909 is controlled based on the RGB value expressed in hexadecimal. However, this is merely an example. For example, decimal (256 gradations: 0 to 255). The light emission of the LED 909 may be controlled based on the RGB value expressed by

  Further, for example, the light emission control data is configured by modeling based on the HSV (hue, saturation, lightness) color space, and the light emission effect is realized by causing the LED 909 to emit light using the light emission control data. Good.

  In addition, a light emitting area as a light emitting unit is configured for each light emitting element having RGB as one set or a plurality of light emitting elements having RGB as one set so that each light emitting area emits light with a different light emitting color. It may be. For example, a light emitting region composed of a plurality of light emitting elements may be configured, and each light emitting region may emit light in different colors to form a gradation, thereby realizing rainbow light emission.

[5-5. Lighting effect time]
In the above embodiment, it has been described that the light emission effect time is determined for each light emission pattern according to the variation pattern of the special symbol. However, instead of doing this, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines the light effect time each time according to the change pattern specified from the change pattern command transmitted from the main board 9011, and determines it. You may make it perform light emission control of LED909 by light emission production time.

[5-6. Specific color]
In the above embodiment, the specific color is described as a single color such as blue, green, and red. However, the specific color is not limited to these, and the mixed color generated by mixing these single colors is the specific color according to this embodiment. It is good.

  In general, “monochromatic” means a color that is not mixed with only one color. In this case, in terms of RGB, it is conceivable that only one component has a value and the other component has no value (0) and is defined as a single color. However, the color that the player visually recognizes as a single color, that is, the color that the player visually recognizes as a single color may be handled as a single color to control light emission.

  Specifically, in the case of “blue”, for example, with 256 gradations, the B value is set to “255”, and the R value and the G value are set to very small values of “1 to 9”. It is considered that the player visually recognizes “blue”. The same applies to “green” and “red”. Therefore, for example, a light emission pattern having a maximum value for a component corresponding to a color that is a main element of a single color among RGB values and a minute value for the other two components is determined as a single color light emission pattern. You may do it. That is, even if the colors are actually mixed, this embodiment may be applied by regarding a color that is recognized as a single color by the player as a single color.

  Moreover, what is necessary is just to make LED909 light-emit so that a player may be visually recognized as a specific color, and what kind of light emission control technique is applied and LED909 is made to light is a design matter, and said embodiment It is not limited to the control method using the serial-parallel conversion circuit explained in the above.

[5-7. Hold display related]
In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 changes the display mode (display color, lighting / flashing, etc.) of the hold display displayed on the hold display 9025 (the first hold display 9025A or the second hold display 9025B). You may make it perform the light emission effect which makes LED909 light-emit with a corresponding light emission pattern.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the hold display notice effect determination process executed by the effect control CPU 90120 in this case.
First, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a start winning determination result designation command has been received from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 (B1).

  On the game control microcomputer 90100 side, at the time of starting winning, a display result (whether it is a big hit) or a variation pattern type winning determination (pre-reading determination) is performed, and a command (display result designation command, The change pattern type designation command) is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 as a start winning determination result command.

  Here, the variation pattern types include variation pattern types such as “non-reach miss”, “normal reach miss”, “super reach miss”, “normal reach big hit”, and “super reach big hit”. In B 1, it is determined whether or not the start winning determination result command is received from the main board 9011.

  If it determines with having received (B1; Yes), CPU90120 for production control will change the display mode of a hold display from the prefetching mode determination table 901219 memorize | stored in ROM90121 based on the received start winning time determination result designation | designated command. Determine (B3). The effect control CPU 90120 controls the hold display 9025 to perform hold display in the display mode determined in B3.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the light emission mode of the LED 909 based on the display mode of the hold display determined in B3 (B5). The effect control CPU 90120 controls each LED 909 to emit light with a light emission pattern corresponding to the determined light emission mode. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 ends the hold display notice effect determination process.

FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table configuration of the prefetching mode determination table 901219.
In the prefetching mode determination table, for example, the variation pattern type and the hold display are defined in association with each other.

In the variation pattern type, a variation pattern type of a special symbol is determined.
In the hold display, a hold display mode such as “lighting” and “blinking”, a display color of the hold display such as normal color, blue, green, and red, or a combination thereof is defined as a display mode of the hold display. . In the hold display, a selection ratio for selecting the display mode of the hold display is determined.

This will be specifically described.
In the prefetching mode determination table 901219 shown in FIG. 143, “non-reach out”, “normal reach out”, “super reach out”, “normal reach out”, and “super reach out” are defined as the variation pattern types. In the hold display, “normally lit”, “blue lit”, “red lit”, and “red blinking” are defined as display modes of the held display.

  With respect to the variation pattern type “non-reach”, the on-hold display has a selection ratio of “75%” for “normally lit”, “25%” for “blue lit”, “red lit” and “flashing red”. “0%” is defined.

  As for the variation pattern type “out of normal reach”, in the hold display, as a selection ratio, “normally lit” is “60%”, “blue lit” is “20%”, “red lit” is “15%”, “red “Blinking” is set to “5%”.

  With respect to the variation pattern type “super-reaching failure”, the on-hold display has selection ratios of “normally lit” “20%”, “blue lit” “25%”, “red lit” “25%”, “ “Blinking red” is set to “30%”.

  For the variation pattern type “normal reach big hit”, the on-hold display has a selection ratio of “normally lit” “10%”, “blue lit” “20%”, “red lit” “30%”, “red “Blink” is set to “40%”.

  For the variation pattern type “Super Reach Big Bonus”, the hold display has a selection ratio of “2%” for “normally lit”, “8%” for “blue lit”, “40%” for “red lit”, “ “Blinking red” is set to “50%”.

  The effect control CPU 90120 selects and determines the display mode of one hold display according to the selection ratio according to the variation pattern type. In this case, when “normally lit” is determined, a white-lit hold display is performed, and the LED 909 is caused to emit light with a white-lit emission pattern corresponding to the white-lit.

  When “blue lighting” is determined, the blue lighting on-hold display is performed, and the LED 909 is caused to emit light with a blue lighting emission pattern corresponding to the blue lighting. When it is determined that “red lighting” is selected, the red lighting on-hold display is performed, and the LED 909 is caused to emit light with a red lighting emission pattern corresponding to the red lighting. In addition, when “red flashing” is determined, a red flashing hold display is performed, and the LED 909 is caused to emit light with a red flashing light emission pattern corresponding to the red flashing.

  As described above, by executing the light emission effect by the light emission pattern corresponding to the display mode of the hold display (specific display) corresponding to the variable display, the effect effect of the light emission effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved.

  Here, the specific display corresponding to the variable display is the hold display as the display corresponding to the variable display on which the execution is suspended, but the active display as the display corresponding to the variable display being executed is the specific display. The light emission effect may be executed by a light emission pattern corresponding to the display mode of the specific display. That is, the specific display according to this embodiment can be a variable display compatible display including a hold display and an active display.

[5-8. Luminous effect start / end timing]
The light emission effect start timing and light emission effect end timing described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it is of course possible to change the design as appropriate.

FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the principle of another light emission effect.
FIG. 144 (1) shows a first example of the light emission effect.
This figure shows a timing chart showing an example of the control of the light emission effect in the specific super reach effect, and shows an example of the control of the light emission effect in the battle reach effect.

  When the battle reach effect is executed, the effect symbol is displayed in the normal variation display effect mode as shown in FIG. 136 (A) between the start of the change display of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state. Is displayed on the effect display device 905.

  In the effect display device 905, when the reach state occurs at the time “tm1”, as shown in FIGS. 115B and 115C, a message image 9053 is displayed and a battle effect corresponding to the battle reach effect or the like is displayed. Is displayed. In this embodiment, in response to the occurrence of the reach state, the effect control CPU 90120 starts executing the light emission effect. That is, the start (start timing) of the light emission effect is the timing (time “tm1”) when the reach state occurs.

FIG. 144 (A) shows an example in which the big hit reliability is lower than that in FIGS. 144 (B) and 144 (C), and the variation display result is “lost”.
In this example, the case where the execution of the light emission effect is ended at the time “ts1” when the battle reach first half effect is ended is shown. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time “ts1”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “ts1”. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LED 909 to emit light with the emission color A. The luminescent color A in this case may be a single luminescent color and a luminescent color (for example, white or blue) indicating that the big hit reliability is low.

FIG. 144 (B) shows an example in which the big hit reliability is higher than that in FIG. 144 (A) but lower than that in FIG. 144 (C), and the fluctuation display result is “lost”. Yes.
In this example, the time “tm1” at which the reach state occurs is set as the light emission effect start timing, and an example of the light emission effect including the two effect stages of the first effect stage and the subsequent second effect stage is shown. In this example, the first effect stage ends at the time “ts1” when the battle reach first half effect ends, and the second effect stage ends at the time “ts2” when the battle reach second half effect that is developed and executed thereafter ends. To do. That is, for the entire light emission effect, the light emission effect start timing is time “tm1”, the light emission effect end timing is time “ts2”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “ts2”.

  In the first stage, the stage start timing is “tm1”, the stage end timing is “ts1”, and the stage period of the first stage is a period from time “tm1” to “ts1”. . In the second stage, the stage start timing is “ts1” and the stage end timing is “ts2”, and the stage period of the second stage is a period from time “ts1” to “ts2”.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LED 909 to emit light with the emission color A in the first effect stage, and controls the LED 909 to emit light with the emission color B in the second effect stage. The luminescent color A in this case is a single luminescent color, and may be a luminescent color (for example, white or blue) indicating that the big hit reliability is low, and the luminescent color B is a single luminescent color, The emission color (for example, green) indicating that the big hit reliability is medium may be used.

FIG. 144 (C) shows an example in which the big hit reliability is the highest and the fluctuation display result is “big hit”.
In this example, the time “tm1” at which the reach state occurs is set as the light emission effect start timing, and an example of the light emission effect including the two effect stages of the first effect stage and the subsequent second effect stage is shown. In this example, at the time “ts1” when the first half of the battle reach effect ends, the first effect stage ends, and then the reach result effect and the stop symbol effect are executed through the battle reach second half effect that is developed and executed. Thus, at the time “ts3” when the variable display ends, the second effect stage ends. That is, for the entire light emission effect, the light emission effect start timing is time “tm1”, the light emission effect end timing is time “ts3”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “ts3”.

  Further, as the first effect stage, the effect start timing is time “tm1” and the effect end timing is “ts1”, and the effect period of the first effect stage is a period from time “tm1” to “ts1”. As the second stage, the stage start timing is “ts1” and the stage end timing is “ts3”, and the stage period of the second stage is a period from time “ts1” to “ts3”.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the LED 909 to emit light with the emission color C in the first effect stage, and controls the LED 909 to emit light with the special emission color in the second effect stage. The light emission color C in this case may be a single color light emission color and may be a light emission color (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot reliability is high, and the special light emission color indicates that the jackpot reliability is the highest. A light emission color (for example, iridescent) may be used.

In the above example, after the second effect stage, the light emission effect of causing the LED 909 to emit light in the special light emission color may be executed. For example, in the first effect stage, the LED 909 is caused to emit light with the emission color A or the like (first specific color), and in the subsequent second effect stage, the LED 909 is emitted with the emission color B, C or the like (second specific color). , And after the period corresponding to the second effect stage ends, a light effect that causes the LED 909 to emit light in the special light emission color may be executed. Further, the light emission pattern exemplified in the third embodiment (light emission pattern blinking in a specific color) and the light emission pattern exemplified in the fourth embodiment (light emission pattern having a common color change mode including the specific color) are applied. May be. For example, in the first effect stage, the LED 909 is caused to emit light in a light emission mode in which the emission color A or the like (first specific color) is blinked, and in the subsequent second effect stage, the light emission colors B, C, etc. (second specific color). The LED 909 may be caused to emit light in a light emission mode in which the color) is blinked, and after the period corresponding to the second effect stage has ended, a light emission effect may be performed in which the LED 909 emits light in a special light emission color. The combination of the emission color and the emission mode can be any combination.
In this way, by executing a plurality of stages of light emission effects with different colors and modes for causing the light emitting unit to emit light, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effects and improve the game entertainment. Also, after the period corresponding to the first effect stage and the second effect stage is over, the player can have a special sense of expectation by executing the light emission effect by the light emission pattern that causes the LED 909 to emit light with the special light emission color. it can.

  In the above embodiment, the timing at which the reach state occurs is set as the light emission effect start timing. However, this is merely an example, and a specific timing after the reach state occurs may be set as the light emission effect start timing. For example, the timing at which a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the reach state has occurred may be set as the light emission effect start timing.

  In each of the light emission patterns shown in FIGS. 125 and 144, the light emission effect start timing (time “tm1”) is illustrated and described as a common timing. However, the light emission effect start timing is not necessarily required for all the light emission patterns. It doesn't have to be common.

  Specifically, the light emission effect start timing may be varied depending on the variation pattern and the variation pattern type, or the light emission effect start timing may be varied depending on the type of effect to be executed and the type of reach. May be.

  In this case, the light emission effect start timing may be set so that the light emission effect is started at a later timing in time as the jackpot reliability becomes higher as a result. On the contrary, the light emission effect start timing may be set so that the light emission effect is started at an earlier timing as the jackpot reliability is higher as a result.

  Also, the light emission effect end timing (time “tn” in FIG. 125, “ts” in FIG. 144) is only an example in the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. . As described above, even if the light emission effect start timing is made common or different, the light emission effect ends at a later timing as the jackpot reliability increases as a result. It is preferable to set the light emission effect end timing and the light emission effect time in advance.

[5-9. Lighting effect based on player's movement]
During the execution of the reach effect in the above embodiment, the light emission effect may be executed based on a predetermined action of the player.

  Specifically, for example, after the reach effect is executed, when the push button 9031B is pressed by the player and the push sensor 9035B detects that the push button 9031B is pressed, a detection signal is output from the push sensor 9035B. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 may start execution of the light emission effect.

  In this case, the number of times the player pushes the push button 9031B, that is, the number of times the push sensor 35 detects the push button 9031B being detected and the detection signal is output is counted internally. When the number reaches the specified number of times, the color of light emitted from the LED 909 may be changed (for example, blue → green → red → rainbow).

  In addition to the above, for example, when the player performs a tilting operation of the stick controller 9031A, the controller sensor unit 9035B detects the tilting operation of the stick controller 9031A, and a detection signal is output. The CPU 90120 may execute a light emission effect.

  In this case, the color of light emitted from the LED 909 may be changed according to the tilt angle of the stick controller 9031A. In this case, the emission color is determined for each numerical range corresponding to the tilt angle of the stick controller 9031A, and the effect control CPU 90120 corresponds to the numerical range including the tilt angle detected by the controller sensor unit 9035B. The LED 909 may emit light based on the emission color.

  In addition, the stick controller 9031A is provided with a trigger button at a predetermined position of the operation stick held by the player, so that when the pressing operation of the trigger button is detected, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the light emitting effect. You may make it do.

  In addition, the button operation and the stick operation in the above case, for example, as a hidden element (hidden operation: hidden button) related to the execution of the light emission effect, by not performing notification that prompts the execution of the operation, Can be improved.

  However, it does not necessarily have to be a hidden element, and a message or effect image that prompts button operation or stick operation is displayed on the effect display device 905 so that the player can perform button operation or stick operation. Also good.

  As described above, during the execution of the reach effect, by executing the light emission effect based on the predetermined action of the player, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the game entertainment.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 may output a predetermined sound effect from the speaker 908 during execution of the light emission effect in response to the button operation or stick operation by the player.

  Specifically, for example, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 908 every time the number of button presses reaches a specified number (for example, 10 times) or every time the tilt angle of the stick reaches a specified angle. Also good.

  In this case, depending on the number of times the button is pressed and the tilt angle of the stick, the specific color in the continuous light emission is changed (for example, blue → green → red → rainbow), or the specific color is turned on / off in the flashing light emission ( For example, it is sufficient to change blue lighting → blue off) or change a specific color in switching light emission (for example, white → blue, blue → white).

[5-10. Luminescence for each luminescent site]
In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be configured with a light-emitting unit configured with a plurality of light-emitting parts, and a light-emitting effect may be performed in which the light-emitting parts emit light with different colors.

  Specifically, for example, a light-emitting unit having a hat shape, a stick shape, an arch shape, or the like, which includes a light-emitting body including a plurality of light-emitting portions such as LEDs, and gradation of the LEDs of the plurality of light-emitting portions. It may be changed to realize the light emission effect by the rainbow-colored light emission pattern described in the above embodiment.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporal change in the color of the light emitting site in this case. Here, a case where a light emitting effect is realized by controlling a light emitting body composed of three light emitting parts, a first light emitting part, a second light emitting part, and a third light emitting part is illustrated.

  For example, the light emission color of the first light emitting portion is changed in order such as “white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → white →. In this case, based on the emission color of the first light emitting part, for example, the color is shifted by one, and the emission color of the second light emitting part is changed to “red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → white → red → ・.. ", for example, by shifting the color by two and changing the light emission color of the third light emitting part in the order of" Orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → white → red → orange → ... ” Change with.

  In this way, by executing the light emission effect by using the special pattern that causes the plurality of light emitting portions constituting the light emitting unit to emit light in different colors, the effect effect of the light emission effect can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved.

[5-11. Pre-reading notice effect]
The effect control CPU 90120 may execute the pre-reading notice effect, and may execute the light emission effect in response to the execution of the pre-reading notice effect.

  Specifically, a pre-reading notice determination table prepared in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the presence / absence of the pre-reading notice effect and the prefetching notice pattern. The pre-reading notice determination table is compared with a random number value for determining the pre-reading notice type according to the specification content of the variable category command transmitted from the main board 9011 based on the start winning corresponding to the variable display to be notified. The numerical value (determined value) may be assigned to a determination result of “no execution” corresponding to the case where the prefetching notice effect is not executed, a plurality of prefetching notice patterns when the prefetching notice effect is executed, or the like.

  In this case, for example, a plurality of light emission patterns are determined in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment in association with the prefetch notice pattern. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 refers to the prefetching notice determination table based on the numerical data indicating the randomness value for prefetching notice extraction extracted from the random number circuit 90124 and the like, and determines the presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect and the prefetching notice pattern. decide. Then, the light emission pattern corresponding to the determined prefetch notice pattern may be selected to execute the light emission effect described in the above embodiment.

This embodiment is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 Production display device 9a 1st variable display part 9b 2nd variable display part 9c Background symbol display part 13 1st start winning opening 13a 1st start opening Switch 14 Second start winning opening 14a Second start opening switch 15 Variable winning ball device 17 Actuating gate 17a Acting gate switch 18c Symbol holding memory display unit 20 Special variable winning ball device 22 Special variable winning ball device 23 Bottom member 24 Special winning port 23a First count switch 25a Second count switch 31 Main board 32 Gate 56 CPU 80 Production control board 200 Production control microcomputer 201 Production control CPU 560 Game control microcomputer 901 Nko game machine 905 performance display device 90100 gaming control microcomputer 90102 RAM ninety thousand one hundred twenty presentation control CPU 90,321 movable member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information in parallel;
A predetermined state control means which is advantageous for the player and can be controlled to a predetermined state different from the advantageous state;
Control is possible between a normal state and a special state that is frequently controlled to the predetermined state by selecting a short variation time at a higher rate as the execution time of the variable display of the second identification information than the normal state. A state control means;
First hold storage means capable of storing information relating to variable display of the first identification information as first hold storage;
Second hold storage means capable of storing information relating to variable display of the second identification information as second hold storage;
A hold display means capable of displaying a first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and a second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage;
The hold display means can display the first hold display but cannot display the second hold display in the normal state.
further,
A light emitting unit;
A light emitting effect means capable of executing a light emitting effect using the light emitting unit;
The light emission effecting unit changes a first specific pattern for causing the light emitting unit to emit light in a light emission mode in which a specific color is blinked, and a light emission mode for changing from one of a plurality of colors including the specific color to another color. The light emission effect can be executed by the second specific pattern that causes the light emitting unit to emit light.
The first specific pattern and the second specific pattern have different expectations for the player, and the light emission period of the specific color is different.
A gaming machine characterized by that.